SUMANDEEP VIDYAPEETH(Declared as Deemed to be University under Section 3 of the UGC Act 1956)

Accredited by NAAC with a CGPA of 3.53 out of four-point scale at'A' GradeAt & Post Pipaia, Tal: Waghodia 391760 (Gujarat) lndia.

Ph : 02668-24 5262164166, Telefax: 02668-2451 26,Website: www.sumandeepvidyapeethdu.edu. in

CURRIGULUM

MASTER OF DENTAL SURGERY

(MDS)

e/^:'t4 lAV I/frNr\e

De€med to be Uriversity

2015

SUMANDEEP VIDYAPEETH

(Declared as Deemed to be University Under Section 3 of UGC Act,

1956)

Village: Piparia, Taluka: Waghodia,

Dist: Vadodara, State - GUJARAT. Pin - 391760

Phone: 02668-245262 / 64 / 66, Telefax: 02668-245292

E-mail: info@sumandeepuniversity.co.in

Website: www.sumandeepuniversity.co.in

FOR

MASTER OF DENTAL SURGERY COURSE

1

REGULATIONS AND CURRICULUM

2

Our Vision:

SUMANDEEP VIDYAPEETH should be a world class centre of excellence in

learning and innovation driven by social sensitivity and state-of-the-art

technology. The University is amongst the top rated Educational Institute offering

contemporary education, high quality research, and training and consultancy

services in Health sciences to suit the ever changing needs of society.

Our Philosophy:

• To train the students through Evidence Based Education System

• To encourage Research in all the disciplines in health sciences.

• To set the Benchmark in Educational Standards, Policies and Practice.

• To function with spirit of humanity, liberty, integrity, responsibility and

togetherness.

• To encourage new ideas and inculcate spirit of Entrepreneurship.

• To create and maintain National as well as Global identity.

• To create a rewarding sense of belonging for mutual growth.

• To develop a sense of partnership amongst all.

• To strive hard towards creating human centered development and building

knowledge-centered society and nation.

Our Strength:

• First Largest and Recognized Deemed Health University of Gujarat State.

• First University in India to introduce Evidence Based Education System in

Dental Curriculum.

• First deemed university of Gujarat State to start Dental Postgraduate courses

(MDS) in all speciality of Dentistry.

• Largest Dental Hospital of Gujarat state having 400 hi-tech dental chairs.

3

INDEX

SECTION CONTENT PG NO.

SECTION I Regulations 5-18

SECTION II Goals and objectives of MDS course 19-21

SECTION III Teaching and learning activities 23-25

SECTION IV M. D.S Course Curriculum:

26-309

4

SECTION-I

MASTER OF DENTAL SURGERY COURSE RULES & REGULATIONS

1. SHORT TITLE AND COMMENCEMENT: 1.1 These Regulations shall be called

“THE REGULATIONS FOR THE MASTER OF DENTAL SURGERY COURSE OF THE SUMANDEEP VIDYAPEETH, PIPARIA-VADODARA”.

1.2 The Regulations and the Syllabus are as prescribed in these Regulations and

are subject to modifications by the Academic Council of Sumandeep Vidyapeeth from time to time.

2. ELIGIBILITY:

To be Eligible for the Admission for the Degree of Master of Dental Surgery, the Candidate shall – 2.1 Hold the Degree of Bachelor of Dental Surgery (B.D.S.) of Sumandeep

Vidyapeeth or of any other University duly recognized by the Dental Council of India.

2.2 Be registered with Dental Council of India. 2.3 Qualify in Merit the Qualifying examination conducted by the Sumandeep

Vidyapeeth University. 2.4 Comply with the General Rules and Regulations. 2.5 Be admitted with the status of one who is entitled to proceed to the degree of

MDS. 3. AGE LIMIT:

There is No Upper Age Limit. 4. PHYSICAL FITNESS CERTIFICATE:

4.1 Every candidate before admission to the course shall submit to the Principal of the Institution a Certificate of Medical Fitness from an authorized Medical Officer that the Candidate is physically fit to undergo the M.D.S course and does not suffer from any contagious disease or Psychiatric problems.

4.2 Students with Disability should produce the Disability Certificate issued by the duly constituted District Medical Board.

4.3 Disable students should also produce FITNESS CERTIFICATE from SVU medical board.

5. ELIGIBILITY CERTIFICATE:

The candidate who has passed the qualifying examination conducted by the Sumandeep Vidyapeeth, before seeking admission to any one of the affiliated institution, shall obtain an Eligibility Certificate from the University by remitting the prescribed fees along with the filled Application form along with the required documents.

6. CUT OFF DATES FOR ADMISSION:

5

The Candidates admitted up to 31st May, shall be registered for the MDS Course.

7. ENROLLMENT:

A candidate admitted to the Master of Dental Surgery Course (M.D.S.) in any one of the affiliated institutions of the Sumandeep Vidyapeeth, Piparia shall submit the prescribed application form for Enrollment, duly filled along with prescribed fee and filled in Declaration Form to the Registrar of this University through the Principal of the affiliated institution within 15 days from the joining to the Master of Dental Surgery course. The candidate who fails to submit the Enrollment form in stipulated time period will get an Extension of One term i.e. Six months.

8. DURATION OF THE COURSE:

8.1 The Period of certified study & training of the Master of Dental Surgery Postgraduate Degree Course shall be Complete Three Years.

8.2 No exemption shall be given from this period of study and training for any other experience gained prior to the admission to the MDS course.

9. COMMENCEMENT OF THE COURSE:

Academic Year for the Master of Dental Surgery course shall commence from First May of Each Year.

10. POST GRADUATE GUIDE: 10.1. The qualifications required to be a postgraduate teacher are as laid down

by the Dental council of India. 10.2. The postgraduate teacher will be a registered post graduate teacher of

Sumandeep Vidyapeeth. 10.3. The recognized postgraduate teacher can register maximum two post

graduate students in each academic year of MDS course. 10.4. Not more than 6 active postgraduate students should be registered under

each post graduate Teacher during the 3 years MDS course 10.5. The post graduate teacher will register the post graduate student in the

same specialty in which he/she is trained. 10.6. The post graduate teacher should be actively involved in the academics

of the department. He/she should publish at least 2 papers per year as first author in the national /international indexed Journal.

10.7. The postgraduate teacher shall always certify the clinical /practical work, library and final Dissertation, research project and any other activities conducted by post graduate student under him.

10.8. No postgraduate teacher shall enroll candidates for a discipline other than the subject of his/her Specialty for the post-graduate programme and no teacher shall be recognized as Postgraduate teacher for more than one specialty.

6

11. CURRICULUM:

The Curriculum and the Syllabus for the course shall be as prescribed in the Regulations and are subject to modifications by the Academic Council of Sumandeep Vidyapeeth from time to time.

12. MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION:

English shall be the medium of instruction for all the subjects of the M.D.S. course.

13. WORKING DAYS IN THE ACADEMIC YEAR: 13.1 No candidate shall be permitted to appear in the M.D.S. Examination,

unless he / she has attended the course in all the subjects for the prescribed period in an affiliated Institution recognized by this University and has produced the necessary certificate of Study, Attendance, Satisfactory Conduct and Progress from the Head of the Department and Principal of the Institution.

13.2 A candidate is required to put in minimum of 80% of Attendance both in Theory and Practical separately in each subject before admission to the examination.

13.3 A candidate lacking in the prescribed attendance and progress in any one subject - in theory and practical wherever necessary in the first appearance – shall not be permitted for admission to the entire examination.

14. CONDONATION OF ATTENDANCE:

There shall be No condonation of Attendance for the MDS course.

15. EXAMINATIONS: 15.1 Eligibility to Appear -

The following requirements should be fulfilled by every candidate to become Eligible to appear for the Final examination: 15.1.1 Attendance: Every candidate should have fulfilled the minimum attendance i.e. 80% of the attendance during each academic year of the Postgraduate MDS course as prescribed by the Dental council of India and the University.

15.1.2 Progress and Conduct: 15.1.2.1 Every candidate should have Presented Seminars, Journal review meetings, Special Cases during each year as designed by the concerned department. 15.1.2.2 Every candidate should have attended Clinics and Didactic lectures during each year as designed by the concerned department 15.1.2.3 Every candidate should have attended Symposia and speciality Conferences.

7

15.1.2.4 Every candidate should have conducted / actively participated in at least One Research projects other then the Main Dissertation, during the course. 15.1.2.5 Every candidate must have submitted for Publication at least One Scientific Article in reputed Indexed journal. 15.1.2.6 Work diary and Log book: Every candidate shall maintain a Work Diary and Log book for recording his or her participation in the training program conducted by the department. The work done diary and log book shall be verified and certified by the Head of the department and Head of the institution. The certification of satisfactory progress is based on the work diary and log book.

15.1.3. Dissertation: 15.1.3.1 Every candidate should have submitted one Library Dissertation before the end of first academic year. 15.1.3.2 Every candidate should have submitted one Main Dissertation 6 months before the end of third academic year. 15.1.3.3 The Dissertation work should be accepted and certified as per the university guidelines.

15.2. University Examination: 15.2.1 The University Examination shall consist of

(a) Written Examination (b) Clinical and /or Practical Examination and (c) Viva-Voce or Oral Examination.

15.2.1.1 The Theory examination shall consist of Four Papers of 75 marks each:

Paper - I Paper - II Paper - III Paper - IV

15.2.1.2 Paper-I shall be of Applied Basic Sciences and Paper-IV shall be of Essay.

15.2.1.3 Paper I, II & III should comprise of Two long essays of 20 marks each and five short notes of 07 marks each.

15.2.1.4 Each paper shall be of Three hours duration. 15.2.1.5 The Practical & Clinical Examination shall be of 200 marks 15.2.1.6 The Clinical or Practical examination should aim at

examining clinical skills and competence of candidates for undertaking independent work as a specialist.

15.2.1.7 The clinical or practical exams shall be reviewed jointly by all 4 examiners, but marks shall be awarded separately and average shall be computed for final result by the University.

15.2.1.8 The Viva voce and Pedagogy shall be of 100 marks. The Viva-voce examination shall aim at assessing depth of knowledge, logical reasoning, confidence, verbal communication skills.

15.2.1.9 The Viva voce shall be conducted by two pairs (one external and one internal examiner in each pair). Each pair shall

8

conduct viva for 20 minutes per candidate and award marks out of 40 (Pair A-40 marks + Pair B-40 Marks=Total 80 Marks). Pedagogy exercise is reviewed jointly by all 4 examiners. 20 Marks for Pedagogy exercise shall be awarded individually by each examiner.

15.2.2 There shall be one final University Examination at the end of MDS Course.

15.2.3 Every candidate appearing for the Degree of Master of Dental Surgery (M.D.S.) examination must have completed Three Academic Years of study after registration as a Post-graduate student under a recognized Post-graduate Teacher of Sumandeep Vidyapeeth.

15.2.4 Examination leading to the Degree of Master of Dental Surgery (M.D.S.) in various branches shall be held twice a year at such place and on such dates as may be declared by the University.

15.2.5 The candidate appearing for the M.D.S. examination will have to submit to the Registrar following certificates along with the examination: 15.2.5.1 A certificate for having obtained a recognized BDS degree. 15.2.5.2 A certificate of having been engaged as Full-time registered post graduate student in the concerned branch for a period of not less than three academic years after registration at a recognized Dental College and Hospital affiliated to this University, under the direction and to the satisfaction of his / her recognized post graduate teacher and Head of the Department. 15.2.5.3 A certificate of attendance; having attendance of at least 80% of lectures / seminars and Practical /Clinics during the three years of his / her postgraduate studies by Head of the department and countersigned by Dean / Principal. 15.2.5.4 A certificate from Dean / Principal for having submitted a Library Dissertation assigned by the Head of the Department in first year of course. 15.2.5.5 Four typed /Printed copies of the Main Dissertation, prepared by the candidate under the guidance and directions of the recognized P.G. teacher under whom the candidate is registered, are required to be submitted to the University through the Head of the Department and the Dean/Principal of the Dental College, Six months prior to commencement of the University MDS Theory examination. 15.2.5.6 The dissertation shall be referred to all the examiners confidentially and acceptance of it by at least 2/3rd of examiners shall be the essential prerequisite for the eligibility of the candidate to appear for the Written and Practical examination. It may form the basis of the viva voce examination.

15.3. Title of Papers:

9

For written examination, following shall be the Titles of Papers in which the students will be examined in his/ her respective specialization-

I. Prosthodontics, Crown & Bridge and Oral Implantology: Paper – I : Applied Basic Sciences

Paper – II: Removable Prosthodontics & Oral Implantology Paper – III :Fixed Prosthodontics Paper – IV :Essay II. Periodontology and Oral Implantology: Paper –I: Applied Basic Sciences

Paper –II: Etio-pathogenesis Paper –III: Clinical Periodontology and Oral Implantology Paper –IV:Essay

III. Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery and Oral Implantology:

Paper – I: Applied Basic Sciences Paper – II:Minor Oral Surgery and Trauma Paper – III:Maxillofacial Surgery and Oral Implantology Paper – IV:Essay

IV. Conservative and Endodontics: Paper – I : Applied Basic Sciences Paper–II: Conservative Dentistry & Aesthetic Dentistry Paper – III: Endodontics Paper – IV: Essay

V. Orthodontics and Dentofacial Orthopedics: Paper – I : Applied Basic Sciences Paper – II: Diagnosis and Treatment planning Paper – III: Clinical Orthodontics & Mechanotherapy Paper – IV:Essay VI. Oral Pathology & Microbiology and Forensic Odontology: Paper – I: Applied Basic Sciences Paper – II : Oral Pathology, Microbiology and Oncology Paper – III: Laboratory Techniques and Diagnosis Paper – IV: Essay VII. Public Health Dentistry: Paper – I: Applied Basic Sciences Paper – II :Public Health Paper – III:Dental Public Health Paper – IV:Essay VIII. Paediatric and Preventive Dentistry:

10

Paper- I : Applied Basic Sciences Paper- II : Clinical Paediatric Dentistry Paper-III : Preventive & Community Dentistry as applied to Paediatric

Dentistry Paper – IV:Essay IX. Oral Medicine and Radiology: Paper – I :Applied Basic Sciences Paper – II :Oral and Maxillofacial Radiology Paper – III:Oral Medicine, Therapeutics and Laboratory investigations Paper – IV:Essay

15.4. Commencement of Examination: 15.4.1 FIRST WEEK OF APRIL / FIRST WEEK OF OCTOBER 15.4.2 The Theory Examination will not be held on Sundays and public

holidays. 15.4.3 There shall be a gap of minimum 1 day in between two theory papers.

15.5. Examination Centre:

When the PG university examination is being conducted in the same city / town having more than one PG institution under the same university, one central examination centre shall be fixed by the concerned university and all the PG students from all the PG institutions of the city will take the examination in that centre only. Centers can be rotated as per the direction of the university.

15.6. Valuation of Answer Books: The Answer books of the Four Theory Question Paper shall be valued individually by the Four Examiners during the Practical / Clinical examination. Average of commuted marks should be awarded for final result.

15.7. Reevaluation/ Retotalling of Answerbooks: There is No provision for revaluation of answer papers. However, Re-

totaling is allowed in the failed subjects.

15.8. Number of Attempts: A candidate registered for three years M.D.S. Course must qualify in the Examinations within six years from the date of his / her admission. The candidate will not be permitted to appear for more than six attempts in the final examinations and shall be discharged from the course if he / she fail to pass examination in the said number of attempts.

15.9. Criteria for Declaring As Pass:

To Pass in the university examination, a candidate shall secure in both Theory examination and in Practical/ Clinical including Viva - voce independently an aggregate of 50% of total marks allotted (150 marks out of 300 allotted for Theory and 150 out of 200 for clinical + 100 for viva -

11

voce together). A candidate securing less mark as described above shall be declared to have FAILED in the examination. A postgraduate student who fails in the university examination will have to attend the department/clinical duties and/or bridge remedial and enrichment programs as scheduled during the period till the next examination. They will have to gain 80% attendance to be eligible for the next examination. All the PG students who have failed shall have to pay the applicable fees according to the university guidelines for the failed period.

A candidate who is declared successful in the MDS examination shall be granted a Degree of Master of Dental Surgery in the respective specialty.

15.10 Award of Distinction and University Ranks:

Distinction will be awarded to successful candidates who secure 75% marks or more as a course aggregate in the concerned subject without any failure.

16. DISSERTATION:

16.1.Every candidate appearing for the MDS degree examination for the first time shall submit with his application for the admission to the examination, four type written copies of a dissertation of a research topic undertaken by the candidate and prepared under the direction and guidance and to the satisfaction of his university Teacher / Guide.

16.2 The dissertation should be submitted to the University six months prior to the commencement of MDS theory examination.

16.3 The dissertation shall be referred to FOUR External examiners approved by SVU for the MDS examination and Acceptance of it by 75% of the examiners shall be a pre condition for the candidate to appear in the final university examination.

16.4 A candidate whose dissertation has been accepted by the examiners, but who is declared to have failed at the examination will be permitted to reappear at the subsequent MDS examination without having to prepare a new dissertation, if, however, the dissertation is rejected, the authorities shall give reasons thereof and suggestion for the improvement of the same and the dissertation thus improved will have to be resubmitted to the examiners and accepted before appearing in MDS examination.

16.5 Acceptance of dissertation: 16.5.1 The dissertation submitted by the candidate must be accepted at

least by 75 % of the examiners. 16.5.2 In case, the dissertation submitted by the candidate is not accepted

by the examiners, the concerned candidates will not be allowed to appear for the Theory & Practical examination and he/she will be required to resubmit a fresh dissertation complying with the observations/remarks made by the examiners for not accepting the dissertation previously.

16.5.3 An unsuccessful examinee whose dissertation has already been accepted by the examiners shall not be required to submit a fresh dissertation while appearing at the subsequent examination. However, a fresh dissertation shall be required to be submitted

12

and accepted by the examiners, shall be an essential pre-requisite in case the candidate seeks to appear for the examination in another branch of the M.D.S.

16.5.4 A candidate whose dissertation has been accepted by the examiners but who is declared failed at the subsequent examination(s), on submission of fresh application and payment of fresh examination fee, producing a certificate to that effect by the Head of the Department is allowed to appear for the subsequent examinations.

17. ACTIVE STUDENTS

17.1 The postgraduate student who is actively pursuing the MDS course and regularly attending the day to day various activities, and whose dissertation is yet to be completed as well as completed three years shall be considered as Active student for the purpose of calculating Active student under a postgraduate teacher.

17.2 However, students having completed the attendance and dissertation , but not having appeared or failed in the examination or, candidates having discontinued the course (absent for more than six months) and students not completing the dissertation within 1 year after the regular duration of course, shall not be considered as Active student for this purpose.

18. RE-ADMISSION AFTER BREAK OF STUDY:

As per the University common Regulations for Re-admission after break of study for all courses.

19. MIGRATION/TRANSFER OF CANDIDATES:

Request for Migration/Transfer of candidates during the course of study from one recognized college to another recognized college of this University or from another University shall not be granted under any circumstances.

20. VACATION:

The Head of Institution shall declare 2 weeks vacation in an academic year to the students. The period(s) of vacation can be decided by the Head of the Department and Head of the Institution.

21. MAINTENANCE OF LOG BOOK:

21.1 Every Post Graduate candidate shall maintain a record of skills (Log Book), he/ she has acquired during the more years training period, certified by the various Heads of Department, where he / she has undergone training.

21.2 The candidate is also required to participle in the teaching and training programme for the under graduate student.

13

21.3 In addition, the Head of the Department shall involve their Post-Graduate students in seminars, journal clubs, group discussions and Participation in conferences.

21.4 At the end of the course, the candidate should summarize the contents and get the Log Book certified by the Head of the Department.

21.5 Every Post-Graduate candidate should be encouraged to present scientific papers in conferences and improve on it and submit them for publication in reputed Dental journals, Motivation by the Heads of Departments shall be essential in this area to sharpen the research skills of the Post-Graduate candidates.

22. INTERNAL EXAMINATIONS:

22.1 The internal examinations for MDS course will be conducted by the authorities of the dental college.

22.2 There shall be three internal examinations during 3 years of MDS course. All these three exams are compulsory. Only in exceptional cases eg. Medical grounds or unavoidable circumstances a separate examination should be conducted for the particular candidate/s.

22.3 First internal examination shall be conducted at the end of first year, with 4 theory papers and one clinical/practical examination.

22.4 Second internal examination shall be conducted at the end of second year, with 4 theory papers and one clinical/practical examination.

22.5 Third internal examination called as the Mock exam will be conducted 2 months before the University examinations, with 4 theory papers and one clinical/practical examination.

22.6 The mock examinations shall be conducted by internal and external examiners similar to that of University exams pattern.

22.7 A score of minimum average of 40 percent among the three internals is compulsory failing which the candidate will not be permitted to appear for the University examinations. The candidate may however, can appear for the University examination after six months and after fulfilling the above criteria.

14

SECTION II

Goals & Objectives of MDS course:

Goals: The goals of postgraduate training in various specialties are to train M.D.S. graduates who will, after successful completion of the course:

❖ Practice respective specialty efficiently and effectively, backed by scientific knowledge and skill.

❖ Exercise empathy and a caring attitude and maintain high ethical standards.

❖ Continue to evince keen interest in continuing professional education in the specialty and allied specialties irrespective of whether in teaching or practice.

❖ Willing to share the knowledge and skills with any learner, junior or a colleague.

❖ Develop the faculty for critical analysis and evolution of various concepts and views, to adopt the most rational approach.

Objectives:

❖ The objective is to train a candidate so as to ensure higher competence in both general and special area of interest and prepare him for a Career in Teaching, Research and Specialty Practice.

❖ A candidate must achieve a high degree of Clinical proficiency in the subject matter and develop competence in research and its methodology as related to the field concerned.

These objectives are to be achieved by the time the candidate completes the course and the objectives may be considered as under:

1. Knowledge (Cognitive domain)

2. Skills (Psycho motor domain)

3. Human values, ethical practice and communication abilities.

Knowledge :

❖ Demonstrate understanding of basic sciences relevant to specialty.

❖ Describe etiology, patho-physiology and principles of diagnosis and management of common problems within the specialty in adults in children.

15

❖ Identify social economic, environmental and emotional determinants in a given case and take them into account for planning treatment.

❖ Recognize conditions that may be outside the area of specialty/competence and to refer them to an appropriate specialist.

❖ Update knowledge by self study and by attending courses, conferences and seminars relevant to specialty.

❖ Undertake audit, use information technology and carryout research both basic and clinical with the aim of publishing or presenting the work at various scientific gatherings.

Skills:

❖ Take a proper clinical history, examine the patient, perform essential diagnostic procedures and other relevant tests and interpret them to come to a reasonable diagnosis about the condition.

❖ Acquire adequate skills and competence in performing various procedures as required in the specialty.

Human values, ethical practice and communication abilities:

❖ Adopt ethical principles in all aspects of practice.

❖ Professional honesty and integrity are to be fostered.

❖ Patient care is to be delivered irrespective of social status, caste, creed or religion of the patient.

❖ Develop communication skills, in particular and skill to explain various options available in management and to obtain a true informed consent from the patient.

❖ Develop communication skills, in particular and skill to explain various options available in management and to obtain a true informed consent from the patient.

❖ Provide leadership and get the best out of his team in a congenial working atmosphere.

❖ Apply high moral and ethical standards while carrying out human or animal research.

❖ Be humble and accept the limitations in his knowledge and skill and to ask for help from colleagues when needed.

❖ Respect patient’s rights and privileges including patient’s right to information and right to seek a second opinion.

16

GENERAL OBJECTIVES OF POST-GRADUATE TRAINING EXPECTED FROM STUDENTS AT THE END OF POST-GRADUATE TRAINING:

At the End of the Postgraduate training in the discipline concerned, the student shall be able to:

1. Recognize the importance to the concerned specialty in the context of the health needs of the community and the national priorities in the health section.

2. Practice the specialty concerned ethically and in step with the principles of primary health care.

3. Demonstrate sufficient understanding of the basic sciences relevant to the concerned specialty.

4. Identify social, economic, environmental, biological and emotional determinants of health in a given case, and take them into account while planning therapeutic, rehabilitative, preventive and primitive measure/strategies.

5. Diagnose and manage majority of the conditions in the specialty concerned on the basis of clinical assessment, and appropriately selected and conducted investigations.

6. Plan and advice measures for the prevention and rehabilitation of patients suffering from disease and disability related to the specialty.

7. Demonstrate skills in documentation of individual case details as well as morbidity and mortality rate relevant to the assigned situation.

8. Demonstrate empathy and humane approach towards patients and their families and exhibit interpersonal behavior in accordance with the societal norms and expectations.

9. Play the assigned role in the implementation of National Health Programme, effectively and responsibly.

10. Organize and supervise the chosen/assigned health care services demonstrating adequate managerial skills in the clinic/hospital or the field situation.

11. Develop skills as a self-directed learner, recognize continuing education needs; select and use appropriate learning resources.

12. Demonstrate competence in basic concepts of research methodology and epidemiology, and be able to critically analyze relevant published research literature.

13. Develop skills in using educational methods and techniques as applicable to the teaching of medical/nursing students, general physicians and paramedical health workers.

17

14. Function as an effective leader of a health team engaged in health care, research or training.

Programme Outcomes (PO’s) (MDS)

At the end of the program the student should be able to:

▪ Understand basic sciences relevant to specialty.

▪ Describe etiology, patho-physiology and principles of diagnosis

and management of common problems within the specialty in

adults in children.

▪ Identify social economic, environmental and emotional

determinants in a given case and take them into account for

planning treatment.

▪ Recognize conditions that may be outside the area of

specialty/competence and to refer them to an appropriate

specialist.

▪ Update knowledge by self-study and by attending courses,

conferences and seminars relevant to specialty.

▪ Undertake audit, use information technology and carryout

research both basic and clinical with the aim of publishing or

presenting the work at various scientific gatherings.

18

SECTION III

TEACHING AND LEARNING ACTIVITIES:

All the candidates registered for MDS course in various specialties shall pursue the course for a period of Three years as Fulltime students. During this period each student shall take part actively in learning & teaching activities designed by the institution/ university. The Sumandeep University desires the following Teaching & Learning activities in each specialty :

1. LECTURES:

There shall be Didactic lectures in the specialty and in the allied fields. The postgraduate departments should encourage the guest lecturers in the required areas to strengthen the training programmes. It is desirable to have certain integrated lectures by multidisciplinary teams on selected topics.

2. JOURNAL CLUB

The Journal review meetings shall be held at least once a week. All trainees are expected to participate actively and enter relevant details in Logbook. The trainee should make the Journal article presentations from the indexed journal as per the desired requirement of the respective department.

3. SEMINARS

The Seminars shall be held at least once a week in each post graduate department. All trainees are expected to participate actively and enter relevant details in Logbook. Each trainee shall make presentations as per the desired requirement of the respective department.

4. SYMPOSIUM

It is recommended to the post graduate students of respective specialty to participate in National and State level symposiums on topics covering multiple disciplines.

5. CLINICAL POSTINGS

Each trainee shall work in the clinics on regular basis to acquire adequate professional skills and competency in managing various cases to be treated by the specialist.

6. CLINICO- PATHOLOGICAL CONFERENCES

The Clinico-Pathological meets/conferences should be held once in a month involving the faculties of Oral Medicine and Radiology, Oral Pathology and concerned clinical department. The trainees should be encouraged to present the clinical details, radiological and histo-pathological interpretations and participation in the discussions.

19

7. INTERDEPARTMENTAL MEETINGS

To bring in more integration among various specialties, there shall be interdepartmental meetings chaired by the Principal / Dean with all Heads of Postgraduate Department at least once a month.

8. TEACHING SKILLS

All the trainees shall be encouraged to take part in undergraduate teaching programmes either in the form of lectures or group discussions.

9. CONTINUING DENTAL EDUCATION PROGRAMMES (CDE)

Each postgraduate department and Institute shall organize CDE programmes on regular basis involving the other institutions. The trainees shall also be encouraged to attend such programmes conducted elsewhere.

10. CONFERENCES/ WORKSHOPS/ ADVANCED COURSES

The trainees shall be encouraged not only to attend conference/ workshops/ advanced courses but also to send at least two papers at State / National Speciality meetings during their training period.

11. ROTATIONAL POSTINGS IN OTHER DEPARTMENTS AND RELATED FIELDS

To bring in more integration between the speciality and allied fields, each postgraduate department shall workout a programme to rotate the trainees in related fields.

12. DISSERTATION / THESIS/ RESEARCH

The Sumandeep Vidyapeeth appreciates the importance of Research activities for the growth of the profession. Trainees shall prepare a dissertation based on the clinical or experimental work or any other study conducted by them under the supervision of the Postgraduate guide and the Head of the Department.

13. POSTINGS AT RURAL HEALTH CARE CENTRE/ OLD AGE HOMES/ ORPHANAGES

The postgraduate students should interact with these centers for specialized learning of clinical skills in handling these patients.

14. WORK DIARY/LOG BOOK

Every candidate shall maintain a work diary and record his/her participation in the training programmes conducted by the department such as journal reviews, seminars, etc. Special mention may be made of the presentations by the candidate as well as details of clinical or laboratory procedures, if any conducted by the candidate

20

21

SECTION IV MASTER OF DENTAL SURGERY (MDS) COURSE SYLLABUS

MDS is a Postgraduate Dental Education, recognized by the Dental Council of

India.

BRANCH-I

PROSTHODONTICS, CROWN & BRIDGE AND ORAL IMPLANTOLOGY

Prosthodontics, Crown & Bridge and Oral Implantology is the dental specialty pertaining to the diagnosis, treatment planning, rehabilitation and maintenance of the oral function, comfort, appearance and health of patients with clinical conditions associated with missing or deficient teeth and/or maxillofacial tissues using biocompatible substitutes. 1. AIM

1.1 To train dental graduates as to ensure higher competence in both general and special areas of Prosthodontics

1.2 To prepare a candidate for teaching, research and clinical abilities, including prevention and after care in Prosthodontics including crown and bridge and Implantology.

2. GENERAL OBJECTIVES OF THE COURSE

2.1 Training programme in the Prosthetic dentistry including Crown & Bridge & Implantology is structured to achieve knowledge and skill in theoretical and clinical laboratory, attitude, communicative skills and ability to research with understanding of social, cultural, educational and environmental background of the society.

2.2 Have acquired adequate knowledge and understanding of applied basic and systemic medical science, knowledge in general and particularly of head and neck.

2.3 The postgraduates will be able to provide Prosthodontic therapy for patients with competence and working knowledge with understanding of applied medical, behavioural and clinical science that are beyond the treatment skills of the general BDS graduate and MDS graduate of other specialities, to demonstrate evaluative and judgment skills in making appropriate decisions regarding prevention, treatment, after care and referral to deliver comprehensive care to patients.

2.4 Upon completion of the evidence based Prosthodontic education the trainee should be able to:

2.4.1 Demonstrate significance of Evidence Based Prosthodontics 2.4.2 Demonstrate awareness of epidemiologically-based needs

assessments through research and systematic reviews of research evidence.

2.4.3 Contribute to the appraisal process. 2.4.4 Understand quality assurance in the delivery of prosthodontic care.

22

Course Prosthodontics, Crown & Bridge - (Theory &Practical)

Course Outcomes: The candidate should be able to

Examine the patients requiring prosthodontics therapy, investigate the patient

systemically, analyze the investigation results, radiology, diagnose the ailment, plan

a treatment, communicate it with the patient and execute it.Understand the

prevalence and prevention of diseases of cranio-mandibular system related to

prosthetic dentistry. Restore lost functions of stomatognathic system namely

mastication, speech, appearance and psychological comforts. Carry out appropriate

treatment at higher level of knowledge, training and practice skills currently available

in their specialty area. Identify target diseases and awareness amongst the

population for prosthodontic therapy. Perform clinical and laboratory procedure with

understanding of biomaterials, tissue conditions related t prosthesis and have

competent dexterity and skill for performing clinical and laboratory procedures in

fixed, removable, implant, maxillofacial, TMJ and aesthetics prosthodontics.

Management of Lab technique based on skills and knowledge of dental materials

and dental equipment and instrument management. Theoretical knowledge and

clinical practice shall include principles involved for support, retention, stability,

aesthetics, phonation, mastication, occlusion, behavioral, psychological, preventive

and social aspects of science of prosthodontics including crown & bridge and

implantology. Acquire knowledge and practice of history taking, systemic and oral

and craniofacial region and diagnosis and treatment plan, prognosis and record

maintaining. A comprehensive rehabilitation concept with pre prosthetic treatment

plan, impressions, jaw relations, aesthetics, phonation and psychological comfort. Fit

and insertion and instruction for patients after care and preventive prosthodontics,

management of failed restorations

3. KNOWLEDGE

3.1 The candidate should possess knowledge of applied basic and systemic medical sciences on human anatomy, embryology, histology, applied in general and particularly to head and neck, Physiology & Biochemistry, Pathology and Microbiology, Virology, Health and Diseases Nutrition, Behavioural science, age changes, genetics, Immunology, Congenital defects and syndrome and Anthropology, Bioengineering, Bio-medical and Biological Principle and applications to Dental material science.

3.2 Ability to diagnose and planned treatment for patients requiring a Prosthodontic therapy.

3.3 Ability to read and interpret a radiograph and other investigations for the purpose of diagnosis and treatment plan.

3.4 Tooth and tooth surfaces, restorations, complete denture Prosthodontics, removable partial Prosthodontics, implants and implant supported Prosthodontics, T.M.J. and occlusion, craniofacial aesthetic

23

and biomaterials, craniofacial disorders, problems of psychogenic origin.

3.5 Age changes and Prosthodontic therapy for the aged. 3.6 Ability to diagnose failed restoration and provide Prosthodontic therapy

and after care. 3.7 Should have essential knowledge on ethics, laws and Jurisprudence

and forensic odontology in Prosthodontics. 3.8 General health conditions and emergency as related to Prosthodontics

treatment 3.9 Identify cases, which are outside the area of his speciality /

competence and refer those appropriate specialists. 3.10 Advice regarding case management involving surgical, interim

treatment etc. 3.11 Competent specialization in team management of craniofacial design. 3.12 To have acquired adequate knowledge and understanding of applied

basic and systematic medical science knowledge in general and particular to head and neck.

3.13 Should attend continuing education programs, seminars and conferences related to Prosthodontics, thus updating himself.

3.14 Teach and guide his/her team, colleague and other students. 3.15 Should be able to use information technology tools and carry out

research both basic clinical, with the aims of publishing his/her work and presenting his/her work at various scientific forums.

3.16 Should have essential knowledge of personal hygiene, infection control, prevention of cross infection and safe disposal waste, keeping in view the risks of transmission of Hepatitis and HIV.

3.17 Should have an abi9lity to plan to establish Prosthodontics clinic/hospital teaching department and practice management.

3.18 Should have a sound knowledge for application of pharmacology. Effects of drugs on oral tissue and systems of body and for medically compromised patients.

3.19 The postgraduates will be able to provide Prosthodontic therapy for patients with competence and working knowledge with understanding of applied medical, behavioural and clinical science that are beyond the treatment skills of the general BDS graduate and MDS graduate of other specialties, to demonstrate evaluative and judgment skills in making appropriate decisions regarding prevention, treatment, after care and referral to deliver comprehensive care to patients.

3.20 Upon completion of Evidence based Prosthodontics education the trainee should be able to describe: 3.20.1 Evidence based clinical practice including cost effectiveness. 3.20.2 The development and application of clinical guidelines and

standards. 3.20.3 The process of risk assessment as relevant to clinical practice 3.20.4 Multi-disciplinary clinical care pathways and appropriate

integration of Prosthodontics.

4. SKILLS:

24

4.1 The candidate should be able to examine the patients requiring Prosthodontics therapy, investigate the patient systemically, analyze the investigation results, radiology, diagnose the ailment, plan a treatment, communicate it with the patient and execute it.

4.2 Understand the prevalence and prevention of diseases of cranio-mandibular system related to prosthetic dentistry.

4.3 The candidate should be able to restore lost functions of stomatognathic system namely mastication, speech, appearance and psychological comforts. By understanding biological, biomedical, bioengineering principles and systemic condition of the patient to provide a quality health care of the craniofacial region.

4.4 The candidate should be able to interact with other speciality including medical specialty congenital defects, Temporo-mandibular joint syndromes, aesthetics, implant supported prosthetics and problems of psychogenic origin.

4.5 Should be able to demonstrate the clinical competence necessary to carry out appropriate treatment at higher level of knowledge, training and practice skills currently available in their specialty area.

4.6 Identify target diseases and awareness amongst the population for Prosthodontic therapy.

4.7 Perform clinical and laboratory procedure with understanding of biomaterials, tissue conditions related t prosthesis and have competent dexterity and skill for performing clinical and laboratory procedures in fixed, removable, implant, maxillofacial, TMJ and aesthetics Prosthodontics.

4.8 Laboratory technique management based on skills and knowledge of Dental Materials and dental equipment and instrument management.

4.9 To understand demographic distribution and target diseases of cranio-mandibular region related to Prosthodontics.

4.10 Understanding all applied aspects for achieving physical psychological well being of the patients for control of diseases and / or treatment related syndromes with the patient satisfaction and restoring function of cranio-mandibular system for quality life of a patient.

4.11 The theoretical knowledge and clinical practice shall include principles involved for support, retention, stability, aesthetics, phonation, mastication, occlusion, behavioural, psychological, preventive and social aspects of science of Prosthodontics including Crown & Bridge and Implantology.

4.12 Students shall acquire knowledge and practice of history taking, systemic and oral and craniofacial region and diagnosis and treatment plan, prognosis and record maintaining. A comprehensive rehabilitation concept with pre prosthetic treatment plan, impressions, jaw relations, aesthetics, phonation and psychological comfort. Fit and insertion and instruction for patients after care and preventive Prosthodontics, management of failed restorations.

4.13 Upon completion of the subject of Prosthodontics the trainee should be able to: 4.13.1 Utilize appropriate communication / presentation skills 4.13.2 Utilize critical appraisal skills and be able to apply to research

evidence

25

4.13.3 Produce and update patient information material. 4.13.4 Construct, analyze and use patient surveys. 4.13.5 Use procedures to ensure consumer involvement and

consultation. 5. ATTITUDES:

5.1 Adopt ethical principles in all Prosthodontic practice. Professional honesty and integrity are to be fostered. Treatment to be delivered irrespective of social status, caste, creed or region of patient.

5.2 Willing to share knowledge and clinical experience with professional colleagues.

5.3 Willing to adopt new methods and techniques in Prosthodontics from time to time based on scientific research, which is in patient’s best interest.

5.4 Respect patient’s rights and privileges including patient’s right to information and right to seek second opinion.

5.5 Upon completion of the subject of prosthodontics, the trainee should be able to recognize: 5.5.1 Importance of maintaining professional standards by EBP. 5.5.2 The need to constantly appraise and evaluate clinical practice

and procedures.

6. COMMUNICATIVE ABILITIES:

6.1 Develop communication skills, in particular, to explain treatment option available in management.

6.2 Provide leadership and get the best out of his group in a congenial working atmosphere.

6.3 Should be able to communicate in simple understandable language with the patient to explain the principles of Prosthodontics to the patient. He should be able to guide and counsel the patient with regard to various treatment modalities available.

6.4 Develop the ability to communicate with professional colleagues through various media like Internet, e-mail, videoconference, and etc. to render the best possible treatment.

7. COURSE CONTENT:

7.1 The candidates shall under go training for Three academic years with satisfactory attendance above 80% for each year.

7.2 The course includes epidemiology and demographic studies, research and teaching skills.

7.3 Ability to prevent, diagnose and treat with after care for all patients for control of diseases and / or treatment related syndromes with patient satisfaction for restoring functions of stomatognathic system by Prosthodontic therapy.

7.4 The program outline addresses the knowledge, procedural and operative skills needed in Masters Degree in Prosthodontics. A minimum of three years of formal training through a graded system of education as specified will enable the trainee to achieve Masters

26

Degree in Prosthodontics including Crown & Bridge and Implantology, competently and have the necessary skills / knowledge to update themselves with advancements in the field. The course content has been identified and categorized as Essential knowledge as given below.

Paper I : Applied Anatomy of Head and neck, Embryology, Growth &

Development, Dental Anatomy & Histology, Applied Physiology and Nutrition, Pathology and Dental materials, Endocrines, Nutrition, Applied Biochemistry, Applied Pharmacology and Therapeutics, Applied Pathology and Microbiology, Biostatistics and Research Methodology, Applied Radiology, Applied Medicine, Applied Surgery and Anesthesia, Plastic Surgery, Applied Dental Materials,

Paper II : Removable Complete Denture Prosthodontics, Removable Partial Denture Prosthodontics, Maxillofacial Rehabilitation, Occlusion and oral Implantology

Paper III: Fixed Prosthodontics, TMJ Dysfunction and Aesthetics Paper IV: Essay- Any content of paper-I, paper-II and paper-III.

8. SYLLABUS DISTRIBUTION:

8.1 PAPER-I: APPLIED BASIC SCIENCES: A thorough knowledge on the applied aspects of Anatomy, Embryology, Histology particularly to head and neck, Physiology, Biochemistry, Pathology, Microbiology, Virology. Pharmacology, health and systemic diseases and principles in surgery medicine and anaesthesia, Nutrition, Behavioural sciences, age changes, genetics, Dental Material Sciences, Bio-engineering and Bio-medical and Research Methodology as related to masters degree in Prosthodontics, Crown & Bridge and Oral Implantology. It is desirable to have adequate knowledge in bio-statics, research methodology and use of computers, to develop necessary teaching skills in Prosthodontics including crown and bridge and Implantology.

8.1.1 APPLIED ANATOMY OF HEAD AND NECK: 8.1.1.1 General human anatomy – gross anatomy 8.1.1.2 Anatomy of head neck in detail. 8.1.1.3 Cranial and facial bones, 8.1.1.4 TMJ and function, 8.1.1.5 Muscles of mastication and facial expression, 8.1.1.6 Muscles of neck and back including muscles of deglutition and

tongue, 8.1.1.7 Arterial supply and venous drainage of the head and neck, 8.1.1.8 Anatomy of the paranasal sinuses with relation to the Vth cranial

nerve. 8.1.1.9 General consideration of the structure and function of the brain. 8.1.1.10 Brief consideration of V, VII, XI, XII, cranial nerves and

autonomic nervous system of the head and neck. 8.1.1.11 Salivary glands, 8.1.1.12 Pharynx, Larynx, Trachea and Esophagus,

27

8.1.1.13 Functional anatomy of mastication and Deglutition, 8.1.1.14 Speech, 8.1.1.15 Respiration and circulation, 8.1.1.16 Teeth eruption, Morphology, Occlusion and function. 8.1.1.17 Anatomy of TMJ, its movements and myofacial pain dysfunction

syndrome. 8.1.2 EMBRYOLOGY:

8.1.2.1 Development of the face, tongue, Jaws, TMJ, Paranasal sinuses, Pharynx, Larynx, Trachea, Esophagus,

8.1.2.2 Development of Salivary glands, 8.1.2.3. Development of oral and para oral tissue including detailed

aspects of tooth and dental hard tissue formation. 8.1.3 GROWTH & DEVELOPMENT:

8.1.3.1 Facial form and Facial growth and development overview of Dento-facial growth process and physiology from fetal period to maturity and old age,

8.1.3.2 Comprehensive study of craniofacial biology. 8.1.3.3 General physical growth, 8.1.3.4 Functional and anatomical aspects of the head, 8.1.3.5 Changes in craniofacial skeletal, 8.1.3.6 Relationship between developments of the dentition and facial

growth. 8.1.4 DENTAL ANATOMY:

8.1.4.1 Anatomy of primary and secondary dentition, 8.1.4.2 Mechanism of articulation, 8.1.4.3 Masticatory function. 8.1.4.4 Detailed structural and functional study of the oral dental and

para oral tissues. 8.1.4.5 Normal occlusion development of occlusion in deciduous missed

and permanent dentitions, 8.1.4.6 Root length, Root configuration, 8.1.4.7 Tooth-numbering system.

8.1.5 DENTAL HISTOLOGY: 8.1.5.1 Histology of enamel, Dentin, Cementum, periodontal ligament and bone 8.1.5.2 Pulpal anatomy, Histology and biological consideration. 8.1.5.3 Salivary glands and histology of epithelial tissues including glands. 8.1.5.4 Histology of general and specific connective tissue including bone,

Hematopoietic system, Lymphoid etc. 8.1.5.5 Muscle and neural tissues of Endocrinal system including thyroid and Salivary glands. 8.1.5.6 Histology of skin, Oral mucosa, Respiratory mucosa, Connective tissue, Bone Cartilage, 8.1.5.7 Cellular elements of blood vessels, Blood, Lymphatic, Nerves,

Muscles, Tongue, tooth and surrounding structures.

8.1.6 ANTHROPOLOGY & EVOLUTION:

28

8.1.6.1 Comparative study of tooth, joints, jaws, muscles of mastication and facial expression, tongue, palate, facial profile and facial skeletal system.

8.1.6.2 Comparative anatomy of skull, bone, brain,

8.1.6.3 Musculo-skeletal system.

8.1.6.4 . Neuromuscular coordination, posture and gait-planti gradee and otho gradee posture.

8.1.7 APPLED GENETICS AND HEREDITY:

8.1.7.1 Principles of orofacial genetics, 8.1.7.2 Molecular basis of genetics, 8.1.7.3 Genetic risks, 8.1.7.4 Counseling, 8.1.7.5 Bioethics and relationship to orthodontic management. 8.1.7.6 Dentofacial anomalies, 8.1.7.7 Anatomical psychological and pathological characteristics of

major groups of developmental defects of orofacial structures.

8.1.8 CELL BIOLOGY: 8.1.8.1 Detailed study of the structure and function of the mammalian

cell with special emphasis on ultra structure features and molecular aspects.

8.1.8.2 Detailed consideration of inter cellular junctions. 8.1.8.3 Cell cycle and division, cell-to-cell and cell-extra cellular matrix

interactions.

8.1.9 APPLIED PHYSIOLOGY AND NUTRITION: 8.1.9.1 Introduction, 8.1.9.2 Mastication and Deglutition, 8.1.9.3 Digestion and assimilation, 8.1.9.4 Homeostasis, 8.1.9.5 Fluid and electrolyte balance. 8.1.9.6 Blood composition, volume, function, 8.1.9.7 Blood groups and hemorrhage, Blood transfusion and

Circulation, 8.1.9.8 Heart, Pulse, Blood pressure, 8.1.9.9 Capillary and lymphatic circulation, 8.1.9.10 Shock, 8.1.9.11 Respiration control, Anoxia, Hypoxia, Asphyxia, Artificial

respiration. 8.1.9.12 Endocrine glands in growth and development of teeth, Bone and

jaws. 8.1.9.13 Role of vit. A, C, and B complex in oral mucosal and periodontal

health. 8.1.9.14 Physiology and function of the masticatory system. 8.1.9.15 Speech mechanism, mastication, Swallowing and deglutition

mechanism, 8.1.9.16 Salivary glands and saliva.

8.1.10 ENDOCRINES:

29

8.1.10.1 General principle of endocrine activity and disorders relating to pituitary, Thyroid, Pancreas, Parathyroid, Adrenals, Gonads, Including pregnancy and lactation.

8.1.10.2 Physiology of saliva, 8.1.10.3 Urine formation, Normal and abnormal constituents, 8.1.10.4 Physiology of pain, 8.1.10.5 Sympathetic and parasympathetic nervous system. 8.1.10.6 Neuromuscular co-ordination of the stomatogenic system.

8.1.11 APPLIED NUTRITION:

8.1.11.1 General principles, 8.1.11.2 Balanced diet, 8.1.11.3 Effect of dietary deficiencies and starvation, 8.1.11.4 Diet, 8.1.11.5 Digestion, Absorption, Transportation and utilization, 8.1.11.6 Diet for elderly patients.

8.1.12 APPLIED BIOCHEMISTRY:

8.1.12.1 General principles governing the various biological activities of the body,

8.1.12.2 Osmotic pressure, electrolytic dissociation, oxidation-reductions, etc.

8.1.12.3 General composition of the body, 8.1.12.4 Intermediary metabolism, 8.1.12.5 Carbohydrates, Proteins, Lipids and their metabolism, 8.1.12.6 Enzymes, Vitamins, Minerals, and Hormones, 8.1.12.7 Blood and body fluids, 8.1.12.8 Metabolism of inorganic elements, 8.1.12.9 Detoxication in the body, 8.1.12.10 Anti metabolites.

8.1.13 APPLIED PHARMACOLOGY AND THERAPEUTICS:

8.1.13.1 Definition of terminologies used – dosage and mode of administration of drugs.

8.1.13.2 Action and fate of the drugs in the body, 8.1.13.3 Drug addiction, 8.1.13.4 Tolerance and hypersensitive reactions, 8.1.13.5 Drugs acting on CNS, General anesthetics, Hypnotics. 8.1.13.6 Analeptics and tranquilizers, 8.1.13.7 Local anesthetics, 8.1.13.8 Chemotherapeutics and antibiotics, 8.1.13.9 Anti tubercular and anti syphilitic drugs. 8.1.13.10 Analgesics and antipyretics, 8.1.13.11 Antiseptics, 8.1.13.12 Styptics, 8.1.13.13 Sialogogues and antisialogogues, 8.1.13.14 Haematinics, 8.1.13.15 Cortisone, 8.1.13.16 ACTH,

30

8.1.13.17 Insulin and other antidiabetics vitamins: A, D, B complex, C and K etc.

8.1.13.18 Chemotherapy and radiotherapy.

8.1.14 APPLIED PATHOLOGY:

8.1.14.1 Inflammation, Repair and degeneration,

8.1.14.2 Necrosis and gangrene,

8.1.14.3 Circulatory disturbances, Ischemia, Hyperemia,

8.1.14.4 Chronic venous congestion, edema,

8.1.14.5 Thrombosis, Embolism and infarction.

8.1.14.6 Infection and infective granulomas,

8.1.14.7 Allergy and hypersensitive and reaction,

8.1.14.8 Neoplasm, Classification of tumors,

8.1.14.9 Carcinogenesis,

8.1.14.10Characteristics of benign and malignant tumor,

8.1.14.11Spread of tumors.

8.1.14.12Applied histopathology and clinical pathology. 8.1.15 APPLIED MICROBIOLOGY:

8.1.15.1 Immunity, 8.1.15.2 Knowledge of organisms commonly associated with diseases of

the oral cavity (morphology cultural characteristics etc) of strepto. Staphylo, pneumo, gono and meningococci, clostridia group of organisms etc.

8.1.15.3 Virology, 8.1.15.4 Cross infections, 8.1.15.5 Spirochetes, 8.1.15.6 Organisms of tuberculosis, 8.1.15.7 Leprosy, 8.1.15.8 Diphtheria, actinomycosis and moniliasis etc. 8.1.15.9 Cross infection control, 8.1.15.10 Sterilization and hospital waste management 8.1.15.11 Applied oral pathology

8.1.15.11.1 Developmental disturbances of oral and para oral structures,

8.1.15.11.2 Regressive changes of teeth, bacterial, 8.1.15.11.3 Viral and mycotic infections of oral cavity, 8.1.15.11.4 Dental caries, diseases of pulp and Periapical tissues. 8.1.15.11.5 Physical and chemical injuries of the oral cavity, 8.1.15.11.6 Oral manifestations of metabolic and endocrine

disturbances, 8.1.15.11.7 Diseases of the blood and blood forming organism in

relation to the oral cavity, 8.1.15.11.8 Periodontal diseases, 8.1.15.11.9 Diseases of the skin, nerves and muscles in relation to

oral cavity. 8.1.15.12 Laboratory determinants -Blood groups, blood matching, 8.1.15.13 RBC and WBC COUNT,

31

8.1.15.14 Bleeding and clotting time, 8.1.15.15 Smears and cultures – urine analysis and culture.

8.1.16 BIOSTATISTICS:

8.1.16.1 Study of biostatistics as applied to dentistry and research.

8.1.16.2 Definition, Aim characteristics and limitations of statics,

8.1.16.3 Planning of statistical experiments, Sampling,

8.1.16.4 Collection, Classification and presentation of data (tables, graphs, pictograms)

8.1.16.5 Analysis of data.

8.1.16.6 Introduction to biostatistics: Scope and need for statistical application to biological data.

8.1.16.6.1 Definition of selected terms – scale of measurements related to statistics,

8.1.16.6.2 Methods of collecting data, presentation of the statistical diagrams and graphs.

8.1.16.6.3 Frequency curves, mean, mode of median, standard deviation and co-efficient of variation,

8.1.16.6.4 Correlation - co-efficient and its significance, 8.1.16.6.5 Binominal distributions normal distribution and poisson

distribution, 8.1.16.6.6 Tests of significance.

8.1.16.7 Research methodology: 8.1.16.7.1 Understanding and evaluating dental research, 8.1.16.7.2 Scientific method and the behavior of scientists, 8.1.16.7.3 Understanding to logic-inductive logic- analogy, models,

authority, 8.1.16.7.4 Hypothesis and causation, quacks, cranks, abuses of

logic, 8.1.16.7.5 Measurement and errors of measurement, 8.1.16.7.6 Presentation of observation, experimentation and

experimental design. 8.1.16.7.7 Logic of statistical interference balance judgments, 8.1.16.7.8 Judgment under uncertainty, 8.1.16.7.9 Clinical vs. scientific judgment, 8.1.16.7.10 Problem with analysis as a means of literature evaluation, 8.1.16.7.11 Influencing judgments, the problem of contradictory

evidence, 8.1.16.7.12 Citation analysis as a means of literature evaluation, 8.1.16.7.13 Influencing judgment: Lower forms of rhetorical life,

denigration, terminal, and inexactitude. 8.1.17 APPLIED RADIOLOGY:

8.1.17.1 Introduction, 8.1.17.2 Radiation, Background of radiation, Sources, 8.1.17.3 Radiation biology, 8.1.17.4 Somatic damage, Genetic damage, and protection from primary

and secondary radiation,

32

8.1.17.5 Principles of x-ray production applied principles of radio therapy and after care

8.1.17.6 Roentgenographic techniques: 8.1.17.6.1 Intra oral & extra oral roentogenography,

8.1.17.6.2 Methods of localization digital radiology and ultra sound.

8.1.17.6.3 Normal anatomical landmarks of teeth and jaws in radiograms,

8.1.17.6.4 Temporo-mandibular joint radiograms, neck radiograms.

8.1.18 APPLIED MEDICINE:

8.1.18.1 Systemic diseases and its influence on general health and oral and dental health.

8.1.18.2 Medical emergencies in the dental offices-Prevention, Preparation, Medico legal consideration,

8.1.18.3 Unconsciousness, 8.1.18.4 Respiratory distress, 8.1.18.5 Altered consciousness, Seizures, 8.1.18.6 Drug related emergencies, 8.1.18.7 Chest pain, Cardiac arrest, 8.1.18.8 Premedication, and Management of ambulatory patients 8.1.18.9 Resuscitation, 8.1.18.10 Applied psychiatry, 8.1.18.11 Child, adult and senior citizens. 8.1.18.12 Assessment of case, Premaliation, Inhibition, Monitoring,

Extubalin, 8.1.18.13 Complication arising in O.T. for anesthesia.

8.1.19 APPLIED SURGERY & ANESTHESIA: 8.1.19.1 General principles of surgery, 8.1.19.2 Wound healing, Incision, Wound care, 8.1.19.3 Hospital care, 8.1.19.4 Control of hemorrhage, Electrolyte balance, 8.1.19.5 Common bandages, Sutures splints, Shifting of critically ill

patients, 8.1.19.6 Prophylactic therapy, 8.1.19.7 Bone surgeries, 8.1.19.8 Grafts, etc, 8.1.19.9 Surgical techniques, 8.1.19.10 Nursing assistance, Anesthetic assistance. 8.1.19.11 Principles in speech therapy, 8.1.19.12 Surgical and radiological craniofacial oncology, 8.1.19.13 Applied surgical ENT and ophthalmology.

8.1.20 PLASTIC SURGERY:

33

8.1.20.1 Applied understanding and assistance in program of plastic surgery for Prosthodontics therapy.

8.1.21 APPLIED DENTAL MATERIAL:

8.1.21.1 All materials used for treatment of craniofacial disorders-clinical, treatment, and laboratory materials,

8.1.21.2 Associated materials, 8.1.21.3 Technical considerations 8.1.21.4 Shelf-life, storage, and manipulations.. 8.1.21.5 Students shall be trained and practiced for all clinical procedures

with and advanced knowledge of theory of principles, concepts and techniques of various honorably accepted methods and materials for Prosthodontic treatment modalities which includes honorable accepted methods of diagnosis, treatment plan, records maintenance, and treatment and laboratory procedures and after care for prevention.

8.1.21.6 Theoretical knowledge and clinical practice shall include knowledge for laboratory work and material science.

8.1.21.7 Clinical methods and materials for implants supported extra oral and intra oral prosthesis.

8.1.21.8 Student shall acquire knowledge of testing biological, mechanical and other physical properties of all material used for the clinical and laboratory procedures in prosthodontic therapy.

8.1.21.9 Students shall acquire full knowledge and practice equipments, instruments, materials, laboratory procedures at a higher competence with accepted methods.

8.1.21.10 All clinical practice shall involve personal and social obligation of cross infection control, sterilization and waste management.

8.1.22 EVIDENCE BASED PROSTHODONTICS

8.1.22.1 Introduction to evidence-based decision making

8.1.22.2 Assessing Evidence

8.1.22.3 Implementing Evidence- Based Decision in Clinical Practice

8.2 PAPER-II: REMOVABLE PROSTHODONTICS AND IMPLANTS A. PROSTHODONTIC TREATMENT FOR EDENTULOUS PATIENTS—

Complete denture, Immediate Complete Denture, Single Complete Denture, Tooth Supported Complete Denture, Implant Supported Prosthesis for Completely Edentulous.

B. PROSTHODONTIC TREATMENT FOR PARTIALLY EDENTULOUS PATIENTS—Clasp Retained Partial Dentures, Intra-coronal and Extra-coronal precision attachment retained Partial Dentures, Maxillofacial Prosthesis.

8.2.1 PROSTHODONTIC TREATMENT FOR EDENTULOUS PATIENTS:

34

8.2.1.1 Introduction,- Complete denture prosthesis – definitions, terminology, G.P.T., Boucher’s clinical dental terminology, Scope of Prosthodontics-the Cranio-Mandibular system and its functions, the reasons of for loss of teeth and methods of restorations, Infection control, cross infection barrier - clinical and laboratory and hospital and lab waste management.

8.2.1.2 Edentulous predicament, Biomechanics of the edentulous state, Support mechanism for the natural dentition and by wearing complete denture biological considerations, Functional and para-functional considerations, Esthetic, behavioral and adaptive responses. Temporomandibular joints changes,

8.2.1.3 Effects of aging of edentulous patients – gaining population, distribution and edentulism in old age, Impact of age on edentulous mouth-mucosa, bone, saliva, jaw movements in old age, taste and smell, nutrition, aging, skin and teeth, concern for personal appearance in old age.

8.2.1.4 Sequelae caused by wearing complete dentures - the denture in the oral environment, mucosal reactions, altered taste perception, burning mouth syndrome, gagging, residual ridge reduction, oral cancer in denture wearers, nutritional deficiencies, masticatory ability and performance nutritional status and masticatory functions.

8.2.1.5 Temporo-mandibular disorders in edentulous patients – Epidemiology, etiology and management pharmacotherapy, physical modalities, and bio-behavioral modalities.

8.2.1.6 Nutrition care for the denture wearing patient- impact of dental status on food intake, gastrointestinal functions, nutritional needs and status of older adults, calcium and bone health, vitamin and herbal supplementation, diet counseling and risk factors for malnutrition in patients with denture and when teeth are extracted.

8.2.1.7 Preparing patient for complete denture- 8.2.1.7.1 Diagnosis and treatment planning for edentulous – 8.2.1.7.2 Familiarity with patients, principles of perception, health

questionnaires and identification data, 8.2.1.7.3 Problem identification, prognosis and treatment planning, 8.2.1.7.4 Contributing history – patient’s history, social information,

medical status – systemic status with special reference to debilitating diseases, diseases of the joint, cardiovascular, disease of the skin, neurological disorders, oral malignancies adaptability,

8.2.1.7.5 Geriatric changes – physiologic, pathological, and intra oral changes.

8.2.1.7.6 Intra oral-health – mucosa membrane, alveolar ridges, palate and vestibular sulcus and dental health.

8.2.1.7.7 Data collection recording, visual observation, radiography, palpation, measurement – sulci or fossa, extra oral measurement, the vertical dimension of occlusion on diagnostic casts.

35

8.2.1.7.8 Specific observations-existing dentures, soft tissue health, hard tissue health – teeth tone, neuromuscular co-ordination, tongue, cheek and lips.

8.2.1.8 Pre prosthetic surgery – improving the patients denture bearing areas and ridge relations

8.2.1.8.1 Non surgical methods – rest for the denture supporting tissues, occlusal correction of the old prosthesis, good nutrition, conditioning of the patients musculature,

8.2.1.8.2 Surgical methods – correction of conditions, that preclude optimal prosthetic function- hyperplastic ridge –d papillomatosis, frenular epulis fissuratum and papillomatosis, frenular attachments and pendulous maxillary tuberosities, ridge augmentation, maxillary and mandibular oral implants, corrections of congenital deformities, discrepancies in jaw size, relief of pressure on the mental foramen, enlargement of denture bearing areas, vestibuloplasty, ridge augmentation, replacement of tooth roots with osseo integrated denture implants.

8.2.1.9 Immediate denture – Advantages, disadvantages, contra indications, diagnosis treatment plan and prognosis, Explanation to the patient, Oral examinations, examinations of existing prosthesis, tooth modification, prognosis, referrals/adjunctive care, oral prophylaxis and other treatment needs. First extraction/surgical visit, preliminary impressions and diagnostic casts, management of loose teeth, custom trays, final impressions and final casts two tray or sectional custom impression tray, location of posterior limit and jaw relation records, setting of anterior teeth, wax contouring, flasking boil out, processing and finishing, surgical templates, surgery and immediate denture, over denture tooth attachments, implants or implant attachments.

8.2.1.10 Over dentures (tooth supported complete dentures) – indications and treatment planning, advantages and disadvantages, selection of abutment, lose of abutment teeth, tooth supported complete dentures. Non-coping abutments, abutment with coping, abutments with attachments, submerged vital roots, preparations of the retained teeth.

8.2.1.11 Single dentures: Single mandibular denture to oppose natural maxillary teeth, single complete maxillary denture to oppose natural mandibular teeth to oppose a partially edentulous mandibular arch with fixed prosthesis, partially edentulous mandibular arch with removable partial dentures. Opposing existing complete dentures, preservation of the residual alveolar ridge, necessity for retaining maxillary teeth and mental trauma.

8.2.1.12 Art of communication in the management of the edentulous predicament – communication – scope, a model of communication , why communication important, what are the elements of effective communications, special significance of doctor / patient communication, doctor behavior, the iatrosedative (doctor & act of making calm) recognizing and acknowledging the problem, exploring and identifyi9ng the problem, interpreting and explaining

36

the problem offering a solution to the problem for mobilize their resources to operate most efficient way, recognizing and acknowledging the probable, interpreting and explaining the problem offering a solution to the problem.

8.2.1.13 Materials prescribed in the management of edentulous patients:- Denture base materials, general requirements of biomaterials of edentulous patients, requirement of an ideal denture base, chemical composition of denture base resins, materials used in fabrication of prosthetic denture teeth, requirement of prosthetic denture teeth, denture lining materials and tissue conditioners, cast metal alloys as denture, bases- base-metal alloys.

8.2.1.14 Articulators – Classification, selection, limitations, precision, accuracy and sensitivity, and functional activities of the lower member of the articulator and uses.

8.2.1.15 Fabrications of complete dentures – complete denture impressions – factors that influence muscles of facial expressions and anatomical landmarks, support, retention, stability, aim and objectives – preservation, support, stability, aesthetics, and retention. Impression materials and techniques – need of 2 impressions the preliminary impression and final impression. Developing an analogue / substitute for the maxillary denture bearing area – anatomy of supporting structures – mucous membrane, hard palate, residual ridge, shape of the supporting structure and factors that influence the form and size of supporting bones, incisive foramen, maxillary tuberosity, sharp spiny process, torus palatines , anatomy of peripheral or limiting structures, labial vestibule, buccal vestibule, vibrating line, preliminary and final impressions, impression making, custom tray and refining the impression, boxing impression and making the casts. Developing an analogue / substitute for the mandibular denture bearing area-mandible- anatomy of supporting structure, crest of the residual ridge, the buccal shelf, shape for supporting structure, mylohyoid ridge, mental foramen, genial tubercle, torus mandibularis, anatomy of peripheral or limiting structure – labial vestibule. Bulccal vestibule, lingual border, mylohyoid muscle, retromylohyoid fossa, sublingual gland region, alveolingual sulculs, Mandibular impressions – preliminary impressions, custom tray, refining, preparing the tray, final impressions.

8.2.1.16 Mandibular movements, maxilo mandibular relation and concepts of occlusion – Gnathology, identification of shape and location of arch form – mandibular and maxillary, occlusion rim, level of occlusal plane and recording of trail denture base, tests to determining vertical dimension of occlusion, interocclusal, centric relation records, Biological and clinical considerations in making jaw relation records and transferring records from the patients to the articulator, Recording of mandibular movements – influence of opposing tooth contacts, TMJ, muscular involvements, neuromuscular regulation of mandibular motion, the envelope of motion, rest position, Maxillo – Mandibular relations – the centric, eccentric, physiologic rest position, vertical dimension, occlusion recording methods –

37

mechanical, physiological, Determining the horizontal jaw relation – Functional graphics, tactile or interocclusal check record method, Orientation / saggittal relation records, arbitrary / Hinge axis and face bow record, significance and requirement, principles and biological considerations and securing on articulators.

8.2.1.17 Selecting and arranging artificial teeth and occlusi0on for the edentulous patient- anterior tooth selection, posterior tooth selection, and principles in arrangement of teeth, and factors governing position of teeth – horizontal, vertical. The inclinations and arrangement of teeth for aesthetic, phonetics and mechanics – to concept of occlusion.

8.2.1.18 The Try in – Verifying vertical dimension centric relation, establishment of posterior palatal seal, creating a facial and functional harmony with anterior teeth, harmony of spaces of individual teeth position harmony with sex, personality and age f the patient, co-relating aesthetics and incisal guidance.

8.2.1.19 Speech considerations with complete dentures – speech production – structural and functional demands, neuropsychological background, speech production and the roll of teeth and other oral structure, bilabial sounds, linguoalveolar sound, articulatoric characteristics, acoustic characteristics, auditory characteristics, lingulopalatal and linguoalveolar sounds, speech analysis and prosthetic considerations.

8.2.1.20 Waxing contouring and processing the dentures their fit and insertion and after care- laboratory procedure – wax contouring, flasking and processing, laboratory remount procedures and selective grinding, finishing and polishing. Critiquing the finished prosthesis – doctors evaluation, patient evaluation, friends evaluation, elimination of basal surface errors, errors in occlusion, interocclusal records for remounting procedures – verifying centric relation, eliminating occlusal errors, special instructions to the patient – appearance with new denture, mastication with new dentures, speaking with new denture, speaking with new dentures, 0ral hygiene with dentures, oral hygiene with dentures, preserving of residual ridges and educational material for patients, maintaining the comfort and health of the oral cavity in the rehabilitated edentulous patients. Twenty -four hours oral examination and treatment and preventive Prosthodontics - periodontic recall for oral examination 3 to 4 months intervals and yearly intervals.

8.2.1.21 Implant supported prosthesis for partially edentulous patients - science of Osseo-integration, clinical protocol for treatment with implant supported over dentures, managing problems and complications, implant prosthodontics for edentulous patients: current and future directions. 8.2.1.21.1 Introduction and Historical Review 8.2.1.21.2 Biological, clinical and surgical aspects of oral implants 8.2.1.21.3 Diagnosis and treatment planning 8.2.1.21.4 Radiological interpretation for selection of fixtures 8.2.1.21.5 Splints for guidance fort surgical placement of fixtures 8.2.1.21.6 Intra oral plastic surgery

38

8.2.1.21.7 Guided bone and tissue generation consideration for implant fixture.

8.2.1.21.8 Implant supported prosthesis for completed edentulism and partial edentulism

8.2.1.21.9 Occlusion for implant supported prosthesis. 8.2.1.21.10 Peri-implant tissue and management 8.2.1.21.11 Peri – implant and management 8.2.1.21.12 Maintenance and aftercare 8.2.1.21.13 Management of failed restoration. 8.2.1.21.14 Work authorization for implant supported prosthesis –

definitive introductions, legal aspects, delineation of responsibility

8.2.2 Prosthodontic treatment for partially edentulous patients – Removable Partial Prosthodontics:

8.2.2.1 Scope, definition and terminology, 8.2.2.2 Classification of partially edentulous arches requirements of

an acceptable method of classification, 8.2.2.3 Kennedy’s classification, Applegate’s rules for applying the

Kennedy classification 8.2.2.4 Components of RPD –

8.2.2.4.1 Major connector – Mandibular and Maxillary, 8.2.2.4.2 Minor connectors 8.2.2.4.3 Design, Functions, form and location of major and minor

connectors, 8.2.2.4.4 Tissue stops, Finishing lines, and Reaction of tissue to

metallic coverage 8.2.2.4.5 Rest and rest seats- Form of the occlusal rest and rest

seat, Inter-proximal Occlusal rest seats, Internal Occlusal rests, Possible movements of partial dentures, Support for rests, Lingual rest on canines and incisor teeth, Incisal rest and rest seat.

8.2.2.4.6 Direct retainer- Internal attachment, Extra-coronal direct retainer, Relative uniformity of retention, Flexibility of claps arms, Stabilizing – reciprocal clasp arm, Criteria for selecting a given clasp design, The basic principles of clasp design, Circumferential clasp, Bar clasp, Combination clasp and other type of retainers.

8.2.2.4.7 Indirect retainers- Denture rotation about an axis, Factors influencing effectiveness of indirect retainers, Form of indirect retainers, Auxillary occlusal rest, Canine extentions from occlusal rests, Canine rest, Continuous bar retainers and linguoplates, Modification area, rugae support, direct – indirect retention.

8.2.2.4.8 Principles of removable partial denture design- Bio mechanical considerations and the factors influence after mouth preparations, Occlusal relationship of remaining teeth, Orientation of occlusal plane, Available space for restoration, arch integrity, tooth morphology, Response of oral structure to previous stress, periodontal conditions, Abutment support, tooth

39

supported and tooth and tissue supported, Need for indirect retention clasp design, need for rebasing, secondary impression, Need for abutment tooth modification, Type of major connector, Type of teeth selection, patients past experience, Method of replacing single teeth or missing anterior teeth.

8.2.2.4.9 Difference between tooth supported and tissue supported partial dentures essentials of partial denture design, components of partial denture design, tooth support, ridge support, stabilizing components, guiding planes, use of splint bar for denture support, internal clip attachments, overlay abutment as support for a denture base, use of a component partial to gain support.

8.2.2.4.10 Education of patient 8.2.2.4.11 Design, treatment sequencing and mouth preparation 8.2.2.4.12 Surveying- Description of dental surveyor, Purpose of

surveying, Aims and objectives in surveying of diagnostic cast and master cast, Paralleled blockout, shaped blockout, arbitrary blockout and relief.

8.2.2.4.13 Diagnosis and treatment planning- Infection control and cross infection barriers, Clinical and laboratory and hospital waste management, Objectives of prosthodontic treatment, records, systemic evaluation, oral examination, preparation of diagnostic cast, Interpretation of examination data, radiographic interpretation, Periodontal considerations, Caries activity, Prospective surgical preparation, endodontic treatment, Analysis of occlusal factors, fixed restorations, orthodontic treatment, Need for determining the design of components, Impression procedures and occlusion, Need for reshaping remaining teeth, Reduction of unfavorable tooth contours, Differential diagnosis: fixed or removable partial dentures, choice between complete denture and removable partial dentures, choice of materials

8.2.2.4.14 Preparation of mouth for removable partial denture- Oral surgical preparation, Conditioning of abused and irritated tissues, Periodontal preparation – objectives of periodontal therapy, periodontal diagnosis, control therapy, periodontal surgery.

8.2.2.4.15 Preparation of abutment teeth- Classification of abutment teeth, Sequence of abutment preparations on sound enamel or existing restorations, Conservative restoration using crowns, Splinting abutment teeth, Utilization temporary crowns to be used as abutment.

8.2.2.4.16 Impression materials and procedures for removable partial dentures, Rigid materials, thermoplastic materials, elastic materials, Impressions of the partially edentulous arch, Tooth supported, tooth tissue supported, individual impression trays.

40

8.2.2.4.17 Support for the distal extension denture base- Distal extension removable partial denture, Factors influencing the support of distal extension base, Method for obtaining functional support for the distal extension base.

8.2.2.4.18 Laboratory procedure- Duplicating a stone cast, Waxing the partial denture framework, Anatomic replica patterns, Spruing, investing, burnout, casting, and finishing of the partial denture framework, Making record bases, occlusion rims, making a stone occlusal template from a functional occlusal record, Arranging posterior teeth to an opposite cast or template, Types of anterior teeth, Waxing and investing the partial denture before processing acrylic resin base, Processing the denture, Remounting and occlusal correction to an occlusal template, Polishing the denture.

8.2.2.4.19 Initial placement, adjustment and servicing of the removable partial denture- Adjustments to bearing surfaces of denture framework, Adjustment of occlusion in harmony with natural and artificial dentition, Instructions to the patients, follow up services.

8.2.2.4.20 Relining and rebasing the removable partial denture- Relining tooth supported denture bases, Relining distal extension denture bases, Method of re-establishing occlusion on a relined partial denture.

8.2.2.4.21 Repairs and additions to removable partial dentures- Broken clasp arm, Fractured occlusal rests, Distortion or breakage of other components – major and minor connectors, loss of a tooth or teeth not involved in the support or retention of the restoration, Loss of an abutment tooth necessitating its replacement and making a new direct retainer, Other type of repairs, Repair by soldering.

8.2.2.4.22 Removable partial denture consideration in maxillofacial prosthetics- Intra oral prosthesis, Design consideration, Maxillary prosthesis- obturators, speech aids, palate lifts, palate augmentation, Mandibular prosthesis- treatment planning, framework design, class i restoration, class ii restoration, mandibular flange prosthesis, jaw relation record

8.2.2.4.23 Management of failed restorations and authorization. 8.2.3 MAXILLOFACIAL REHABILITATION:

8.2.3.1 Scope, terminology, definition, 8.2.3.2 Cross infection control and hospital waste management, 8.2.3.3 Work authorization. 8.2.3.4 Behavioral and psychological issues in head and cancer,

psychodynamic interactions – clinician and patient 8.2.3.5 Cancer chemotherapy: oral manifestations, complications,

and management,

41

8.2.3.6 Radiation therapy of head and neck tumors: oral effects, dental manifestations

8.2.3.7 Dental treatment etiology treatment and rehabilitation (restoration)

8.2.3.7.1 Acquired defects of the mandible, 8.2.3.7.2 Acquired defect of the hard palate,Soft palate, 8.2.3.7.3 Clinical management of edentulous and partially

edentulous maxillectomy patients, 8.2.3.7.4 Facial defects, 8.2.3.7.5 Restoration of speech, 8.2.3.7.6 Velopharyngeal function, 8.2.3.7.7 Cleft lip and palate, 8.2.3.7.8 Cranial implants, 8.2.3.7.9 Maxillofacial trauma, 8.2.3.7.10 Lip and cheek support prosthesis, 8.2.3.7.11 Laryngectomy aids, 8.2.3.7.12 Obstructive sleep apnea, 8.2.3.7.13 Tongue prosthesis, 8.2.3.7.14 Oesophageal prosthesis, 8.2.3.7.15 Vaginal radiation carrier, 8.2.3.7.16 Burn stents, 8.2.3.7.17 Nasal stents, 8.2.3.7.18 Auditory inserts, 8.2.3.7.19 Trismus appliances, 8.2.3.7.20 Mouth controlled device for assisting the

handicapped, 8.2.3.7.21 Custom prosthesis for lagophthalomos of the eyes, 8.2.3.7.22 Osseo integrated supported facial and maxillofacial

prosthesis. 8.2.3.7.23 Resin bonding for maxillofacial prosthesis, 8.2.3.7.24 Implant rehabilitation of the mandible compromise by

radiotherapy, craniofacial osseo integration, prosthodontic treatment, and material and laboratory procedures for maxillofacial prosthesis.

8.2.4 OCCLUSION EVALUATION, DIAGNOSIS AND TREATMENT OF

OCCLUSAL PROBLEMS: 8.2.4.1 Scope, definition, terminology, 8.2.4.2 Optimum oral health, anatomic harmony, functional

harmony, occlusal stability, 8.2.4.3 Causes of deterioration of dental and oral health,

anatomical physiological, neuro– muscular, psychological, consideration of teeth

8.2.4.4 Muscle of mastication, 8.2.4.5 Temporo-mandibular joint, 8.2.4.6 Intra oral and extra oral and facial musculatures, 8.2.4.7 The function of cranio-mandibular system. 8.2.4.8 Occlusal therapy, 8.2.4.9 Centric relation, 8.2.4.10 Vertical dimension,

42

8.2.4.11 The neutral zone, 8.2.4.12 The occlusal plane, 8.2.4.13 Differential diagnosis of Temporo-mandibular disorders, 8.2.4.14 Understanding and diagnosing intra articular problems, 8.2.4.15 Relating treatment to diagnosis of internal derangement

of tmj, 8.2.4.16 Occlusal splints, 8.2.4.17 Selecting instrument for occlusal diagnosis and

treatment, mounting casts, 8.2.4.18 Pankey-Mann-Schuler philosophy of complete occlusal

rehabilitation, 8.2.4.19 Long centric, 8.2.4.20 Anterior guidance, 8.2.4.21 Restoring lower anterior teeth, restoring upper anterior

teeth, 8.2.4.22 Determining the type of posterior occlusal contours, 8.2.4.23 Method for determining the plane of occlusion, 8.2.4.24 Restoring lower posterior teeth, restoring upper posterior

teeth, 8.2.4.25 Functionally generated path techniques for recording

border movements intra orally, 8.2.4.26 Occlusal equilibration, 8.2.4.27 Bruxism, 8.2.4.28 Procedural steps in restoring occlusions, 8.2.4.29 Requirement for occlusal stability, 8.2.4.30 Solving occlusal problems through programmed

treatment planning, 8.2.4.31 Splinting, 8.2.4.32 Solving

8.2.21.1.1 Occlusal – wear problems, 8.2.21.1.2 Deep over bite problems, 8.2.21.1.3 Anterior overjet problems, 8.2.21.1.4 Anterior overbite problems, 8.2.21.1.5 Tracing end to end occlusion, 8.2.21.1.6 Splayed anterior teeth, 8.2.21.1.7 Cross bite patient, 8.2.21.1.8 Crowded, irregular, or interlocking anterior bite, 8.2.21.1.9 Using cephalometric for occlusal analysis, 8.2.21.1.10 Solving severe arch mal-relationship problems, 8.2.21.1.11 Transcranial radiography, 8.2.21.1.12 Post operative care of occlusal therapy.

8.3 PAPER-III: FIXED PROSTHODONTICS, TEMPORO-MANDIBULAR JOINT DYSFUNCTIONS AND AESTHETIC:

8.3.1 CROWN AND BRIDGES

8.3.1.1 Introduction

8.3.1.1.1 Scope, Definition, Terminology and Classification. 8.3.1.1.2 Principles of design

43

8.3.1.1.3 Mechanical and biological considerations of components: Retainers, Connectors,

Pontics. 8.3.1.1.4 Work Authorization.

8.3.1.2 Diagnosis and treatment planning – patients history and interview, patients desires and expectations and needs, systemic and emotional health, clinical examinations – head and neck, oral – teeth, occlusal and periodontal, preparation of diagnostic cast, radiographic interpretation, aesthetics, endodontic consideration, abutment selection – bone support, root proximities and inclinations, selection of abutment, for cantilever, pier abutment, splinting, available tooth structures and crown morphology, TMJ and muscles of mastication and comprehensive planning and prognosis.

8.3.1.3 Management of carious teeth- caries in aged, Caries control, Removable carious, Protection of pulp, Reconstruction measures for compromising teeth– retentive pins, horizontal slots, retentive grooves, Resins, gold and gold alloys, glass ionomer, restorations Prevention of caries, diet, prevention of root caries and vaccine for caries.

8.3.1.4 Periodontal considerations- Attachment unit, Ligaments, Gingivitis, Periodontitis, Microbiological aspect of periodontal diseases, Marginal lesions, Occlusal trauma, Periodontal pockets, Attached gingival, interdental papilla, Gingival embrasures, Gingival/periodontal prosthesis, Radiographic interpretations of periodontia, Periodontal splinting – fixed prosthodontics with periodontally compromised dentition and placement of margin restorations.

8.3.1.5 Biomechanical principle of tooth preparations: 8.3.1.5.1 Individual tooth preparations- complete metal crowns,

PFC, All porcelain – cerestore crown, dicor crowns, inceram etc. Porcelain jacket crowns, Partial ¾, Proximal half, Radicular crown, 7/8th crown, Telescopic, Pin ledge, Laminates, Inlays and Onlays.

8.3.1.5.2 Preparations for restoration of teeth – amalgam, glass ionomer and composite resins,

8.3.1.5.3 Resin bond retainers, 8.3.1.5.4 Gingival marginal preparations – design, material

selection, biological and mechanical considerations. 8.3.1.5.5 Intracoronal retainer and precision attachment – custom

made and ready made 8.3.1.6 Isolation and fluid control- Rubber dam applications,

Tissue dilation – soft tissue management for cast restoration,

8.3.1.7 Impression materials, techniques, 8.3.1.8 Provisional restoration, 8.3.1.9 Interocclusal records, Occlusion, Occlusal equilibration,

Articulators, Recording and transferring of occlusal relations,

44

8.3.1.10 Laboratory procedures for fixed Prosthodontics- die system, wax patterns, investing and casting procedures finishing and polishing, casting failures.

8.3.1.11 Ceramic in fixed Prosthodontics. 8.3.1.12 Cementation of restorations

. 8.3.1.13 Restorations of endodontically treated teeth,

stomatognathic dysfunction and management 8.3.1.14 Management of failed restorations 8.3.1.15 Osseo integrated supported fixed Prosthodontics – osseo

integrated supported and tooth supported Fixed Prosthodontics

8.3.2 TEMPOROMANDIBULAR JOINT DYSFUNCTIONS:

8.3.2.1 Scope, definitions, and terminology 8.2.2.2 Anatomy of Temporo-mandibular joint and its function, 8.2.2.3 Orofacial pain, and pain from the Temporo-mandibular region, 8.2.3.4 Temporo-mandibular joint dysfunction, Temporo-mandibular

joint sounds, 8.2.3.5 TMJ disorders- Trauma, Disc displacement,

Osteoarthrosis/osteoarthritis, Hypermobility and dislocation, Infection arthritis, Inflammatory diseases, Eagle’s syndrome (styloid – stylohyoid syndrome), Synovial chondromatosis, Osteochondrosis disease, Osteonecrosis, Nerve entrapment process, growth changes, Tumors,

8.2.3.6 Radiographic imaging 8.2.3.7 Etiology and Diagnosis of craniomandibular pain, 8.2.3.8 Differential diagnosis, and management of orofacial pain-

Pain from teeth, pulp, dentin, muscle, TMJ, Psychological, physiological – endogenous control, acupuncture analgesia, Placebo effects on analgesia, Trigeminal neuralgia, Temporal arteritis

8.2.3.9 Occlusal splint therapy- Construction and fitting of occlusal splints, Management of occlusal splints, Therapeutic effects of occlusal splints, Occlusal splints and general muscles performance, TMJ joint uploading and anterior repositioning appliances, Use and care of occlusal splints.Occlusal adjustment procedures, Reversible therapy- Occlusal stabilization splints and physical therapies, jaw exercises, jaw manipulation and other physiotherapy. Irreversible therapy-Occlusal repositioning appliances, Orthodontic treatment, Orthognathic surgery, Fixed and removable prosthodontic treatment and occlusal adjustment. Indication for occlusal adjustment, Special nature of Orofacial pain, Psychopathological considerations, Occlusal adjustment philosophies, Mandibular position, Excursive guidance, Occlusal contact scheme, Goals of occlusal adjustment, Significance of a slide in centric, Preclinical procedures, Clinical procedures for occlusal adjustment.

45

8.3.3 AESTHETIC

8.3.3.1 Scope & Definitions of Morphopsycology and esthetics, 8.3.3.2 Structural esthetic rules

8.3.3.2.1 Facial components, 8.3.3.2.2 Dental component, 8.3.3.2.3 Gingival components and physical components.

8.3.3.3 Esthetics and its relationship to function 8.3.3.3.1 Crown morphology, 8.3.3.3.2 Physiology of occlusion, 8.3.3.3.3 Mastication, 8.3.3.3.4 Physical and physiological characteristic and muscular

activities of facial muscle, 8.3.3.3.5 Peri-oral anatomy and muscle retaining exercises.

8.3.3.4 Smile. 8.3.3.4.1 Classification and smile components, 8.3.3.4.2 Smile design, esthetic restoration of smile, 8.3.3.4.3 Esthetic management of the dentogingival unit, 8.3.3.4.4 Intraoral materials for management of gingival contours

and ridge contours, 8.3.3.4.5 Periodontal esthetics,

8.3.3.5 Restorations 8.3.3.5.1 Tooth colored restorative materials, 8.3.3.5.2 The clinical and laboratory aspects, 8.3.3.5.3 Marginal fit, 8.3.3.5.4 Anatomy, inclinations, form, size, shape, colour,

embrasures, contact point.

8.4 PAPER-IV: ESSAY:

Any contents from 8.1 to 8.3 can be included in essay

9. YEARLY PRACTICAL/CLINICAL SCHEDULE: 9.1. FIRST YEAR-FIRST TERM-PRECLINICAL EXERCISES

9.1.1 COMPLETE DENTURE PROSTHODONTICS:

9.1.1.1 Drawing of various Landmarks on maxillary and mandibular casts.

9.1.1.2 Different types of spacer designs.

9.1.1.3 Custom trays by using different materials (acrylic resin, polystyrene).

9.1.1.4 Stabilization of different types of record bases with ZOE impression paste, Light Body Elastomeric impression material and Acrylic Resin.

9.1.1.5 Setting of teeth and fabrication of complete dentures in class I jaw relation.

9.1.1.6 Setting of teeth and fabrication of complete dentures in class II jaw relation.

46

9.1.1.7 Setting of teeth and fabrication of complete dentures in class III jaw relation.

9.1.1.8 Repair of maxillary and mandibular complete dentures.

9.1.1.9 Rebasing and Relining of maxillary and mandibular complete dentures.

9.1.1.10 Denture characterization using SPA concepts.

9.1.1.11 One balanced arrangement on mean value articulator.

9.1.1.12 Balanced occlusion on Hanau Articulator

9.1.1.13 Acrylization of dentures in class I, II & III along with finishing, polishing and lab remounting.

9.1.2 REMOVABLE PARTIAL PROSTHODONTICS:

Step by Step procedure for a cast partial denture like: 9.1.2.1 Diagnostic Surveying 9.1.2.2 Tripoding 9.1.2.3 Mouth preparation 9.1.2.4 Surveying of master cast 9.1.2.5 Block out (different types) 9.1.2.6 Duplication, 9.1.2.7 Cast Hardening, 9.1.2.8 Patterns for Kennedy’s class I, II, III, & IV 9.1.2.9 Casting of any two patterns 9.1.2.10 Finishing & polishing 9.1.2.11 Placement of teeth and Acrylization on one of the finished

framework

9.1.3 FIXED PARTIAL PROSTHODONTICS: 9.1.3.1 Tooth preparations on Typodonts:

9.1.3.1.1 Anterior three unit porcelain fused to metal FPD. 9.1.3.1.2 Anterior all ceramic restoration. 9.1.3.1.3 Maxillary lateral incisor to receive composite/porcelain

laminate. 9.1.3.1.4 Posterior complete metal crown. 9.1.3.1.5 Posterior three unit porcelain fused to metal FPD. 9.1.3.1.6 7/8th crown on maxillary 1st molar 9.1.3.1.7 Proximal half crown. 9.1.3.1.8 3/4th on premolar & canine 9.1.3.1.9 Full veneer ceramic preparation on central incisor 9.1.3.1.10 PFM preparation on central incisor 9.1.3.1.11 All metal preparation on molar & premolar

9.1.3.2 Making Impression of the prepared teeth & pouring two sets of casts. 9.1.3.3 Die preparation with die ditching. 9.1.3.4 Mounting on articulator 9.1.3.5 Wax pattern in Duplicate 9.1.3.6 Casting

9.1.3.6.1 Posterior Bridge-Full cast 9.1.3.6.2 Anterior Bridge-PFM 9.1.3.6.3 Metal free ceramic

9.1.3.7 Post and core on maxillary central incisor.

47

9.1.4 MAXILLOFACIAL PROSTHODONTICS:

Fabrication of 9.1.4.1 Ocular prosthesis 9.1.4.2 Orbital prosthesis 9.1.4.3 Ear prosthesis 9.1.4.4 Finger prosthesis 9.1.4.5 Nasal prosthesis 9.1.4.6 Obturator 9.1.4.7 Gunning splint

9.1.5 IMPLANT PROSTHODONTICS:

9.1.5.1 Diagnosis & treatment planning on study cast 9.1.5.2 Placement of dummy implants in cast 9.1.5.3 Open tray & close tray technique for impression making

Important Note: Step by step digital photograph of preclinical work should be taken and to be submitted in a CD at the completion of the work.

9.2 FIRST YEAR MDS-SECOND TERM:

DIDACTIC AND RESEARCH ACTIVITIES:-

Sr.

no.

Didactic type Total

Conventional Evidence based

1. Seminars* 03 02

2. Journal clubs* 03 02

3. Pedagogue 03 02

4. Library dissertation 01

5. Attendance of Conferences/

conventions/ CDE/ workshops

01

6. Presentation at Conferences/

conventions/ CDE/ workshops

01

9.3 SECOND YEAR MDS

Sr.

no.

Didactic type Total

Conventional Evidence based

1. Seminars* 02 03

48

2. Journal clubs* 02 03

3. Case presentation# 03 02

4. Pedagogue 00 05

5. Interdisciplinary case

presentations /

clinico- pathologic meet

01

6. Short researches 01

7. Attendance of Conferences/

conventions/ CDE/ workshops

01

8. Presentation at Conferences/

conventions/ CDE/ workshops

01

9.5. THIRD YEAR MDS

Sr.

no.

Didactic type Total

Conventional Evidence based

1. Seminars* 02 03

2. Journal clubs* 02 03

3. Case presentation# 02 03

4. Pedagogue 00 05

5. Interdisciplinary case

presentations /

clinico- pathologic meet

01 (if not done at second MDS)

6. Short researches 01

7. Main dissertation 01

8. Publications 01

9. Attendance of Conferences/

conventions/ CDE/ workshops

01

10. Presentation at Conferences/

conventions/ CDE/ workshops

01

Total didactic quota:

49

Sr.

no.

Didactic type Total

Conventional Evidence based

1. Seminars* 07 08

2. Journal clubs* 07 08

3. Case presentation# 05 05

4. Pedagogue 03 12

4. Interdisciplinary case

presentations /

clinico- pathologic meet

01

5. Library dissertation 01

6. Short researches 02

7. Main dissertation 01

8. Publications 01

9. Attendance of Conferences/

conventions/ CDE/ workshops

03

10. Presentation at Conferences/

conventions/ CDE/ workshops

03

*Evidence based didactics in the form of evidence based seminars and journal clubs.

The objective of such evidence based didactics lies in not just the presentation of an

evidence but the need to appraise the evidence and grade the same. Evidence

based journal clubs are primarily chosen on a clinically relevant question pertaining

to diagnosis, prognosis, steps in treatment execution, quality of life and laboratory

guidelines. These articles are critically appraised through study specific checklists.

# Literature pertaining to the chief complaint of the patient is considered and

evidences pertaining to the chief expectation of the patient from the prosthesis is

appraised, evaluated, presented as case discussions and applied in the treatment

50

plan.

9.6 LIST OF CLINICAL / SPECIAL CASES

PROCEDURE CATEGORY

O A PA PI

Tooth and tooth surface restoration a) Composites – fillings , laminates, Inlay

, onlay b) Ceramics – laminates, Inlays , onlays c) Glass ionomer

2 2 1

2 2 1

2 2 1

10 10 10

CROWNS

FVC for metal 1 2 2 10

FVC for ceramic 1 2 2 10

Precious metal crown Galvanoformed crown

1 -

- 1 1

5 1

3/4thcrowns(canines ,premolars, centrals) 1 - - 5

7/8th posteriors crowns 1 - - 5

Proximal half crowns 1 - - 5

Pinledge and pinhole crowns 1 - - 5

Telescopic crowns 1 - - 5

Intraradicular crowns ( central, lateral, canine , premolars, and molar)

1 - - 5

Crown as implant supported prosthesis 1 - 1 5

FIXED PARTIAL DENTURES

Cast Porcelain (3 unit) 1 - - 5

Cast metal – precious and non precious (3 unit Posterior)

1 - - 5

Porcelain fused metal (anterior and posterior) 1 1 1 10

Multiple abutment – Maxillary and Mandibular Full arch

1 1 15

Incorporation of custom made and ready maded precision joint or attachments

1 1 1 4

Adhesive bridge for anterior / posterior 1 - 1 5

Metal fused to resin anterior FPD - - 1 5

Interim provisional restorations(crowns and FPDs)

1 1 1 10

Immediate fixed partial dentures (interim) 1 - - 5

Fixed prosthesis as a retention and rehabilitation for acquired and congenital defects - maxillofacial prosthetics

1 1 1 5

Implant supported prosthesis 1 - 1 1

Implant tooth supported prosthesis 1 - 1 1

REMOVABLE PARTIAL DENTURES

Provisional partial denture prosthesis 1 1 1 10

51

Cast removable partial denture (for kennedy’s applegate classification with modification)

1 1 1 6

Removable bridge with precision attachments and telescopic crowns for anterior and posterior

1 1 2 4

Immediate RPD Partial denture for medically compromise and handicapped patients

1

1

1 1

1

1

5 5

COMPLETE DENTURES

Neurocentric occlusion and characterized prosthesis

- - 1 5

Anatomic characterized prosthesis (by using semiadjustable articulator)

- - 1 25

Single dentures - - 1 5

Overlay dentures - - 1 5

Interim Complete dentures as a treatment prosthesis for abused denture supporting tissues

- - 1 5

Complete denture prosthesis (for abnormal ridge relation, ridge form and ridge size)

- - 1 5

Complete denture for patients with TMJ syndromes

- - 1 5

Complete denture for medically compromised and handicapped patients

- - 1 5

GERIATRIC PATIENTS

Tooth and tooth surface restorations, crowns , fixed prosthesis , removable prosthesis

- - 1 5

IMPLANT SUPPORTED COMPLETE PROSTHESIS

Implant supported complete prosthesis (maxillary and Mandibular)

- - 1 1

MAXILLOFACIAL PROSTHESIS

Guiding flange and obturators - - 1 4

Speech and palatal lift prosthesis - - 1 2

Eye prosthesis - - 1 2

Ear prosthesis - - 1 2

Nose prosthesis - - 1 2

Face prosthesis - - - 1

Maxillectomy - - 1 2

Hemimandibulectomy - - 1 2

Cranioplasty - - 1 1

Finger/hand ,foot - - 1 2

Body prosthesis - - 1 1

Management of burns , scars - - - 1

TMJ SYNDROMES MANAGEMENT

Splints – periodontal, teeth, jaws - - 1 4

TMJ supportive and treatment prosthesis - - 1 1

52

Stabilization appliances for maxilla and mandilble with freedom to move from IP To CRCP

- - - 1

In IP without the freedom to move to CRCP - - - 1

Repositioning appliances , anterior disclusion - - - 1

Chrome cobalt and acrylic resin stabilization appliances for modification to accommodate for the irregularities in the dentition

- - - 2

Occlusal adjustment and equibrilium - - 1 4

FULL MOUTH REHABILITATION

Full mouth rehabilitation – restoration of esthetics and function of stomatognathic system

- - 1 4

INTERDISCIPLINARY TREATMENT MODALITIES

Inter disciplianary management – restoration of orocraniofaceial defects for esthetics , phonation , mastication, and psychological comforts

- - 1 2

MANAGEMENT OF FAILED RESTORATION

Tooth and tooth surface restorations - - - 5

Removable prosthesis - - - 10

Crowns and fixed prosthesis - - - 5

Maxillofacial prosthesis - - - 2

Implant supported prosthesis - - - 1

Occlusal rehabilitation and TMJ syndrome - - - 2

Restoration failure of psychogenic - - - 5

Restoration of failure to age changes - - - 2

10. SCHEME OF EXAMINATION:

10.1 Theory Exams: 300 marks

Written examination shall consist of four question papers each of three hours duration. Total marks for each paper will be 75. Paper I, II, III shall consist of two long questions carrying 20 marks each. And 5 short essay questions each carrying 07 marks. Paper IV will be on essay.

Paper I: Applied Basic Sciences including Evidence Based Dentistry: 75 marks Paper II: Removable Prosthodontics and Oral Implantology -75 marks

Paper III: Fixed Prosthodontics -75 marks Paper IV: Essay-75 marks

*The topics assigned to the different paper are generally evaluated under those sections. However a strict division of the subject may not be possible and some overlapping of topics is inevitable. Students should be prepared to answer overlapping topics. Further the individual papers will also focus on evidence based appraisal topics, pertinent protocols and guidelines.

10.2 Practical / Clinical Examination: 200 marks

53

Examination shall be for three days. If there are more than 6 candidates, it may be extended for one more day. Each candidate shall be examined for a minimum of three days, 6 hours per day including viva voce.

10.2.1 Presentation of treated patients and records during their 3 years training period (evidence based)– 25 marks

1) C.D. - 1 mark 2) R.P.D. - 2 marks 3) F.P.D. including single tooth and surface restoration - 2 marks 4) Implant Supported Prosthesis - 5 marks 5) Occlusal rehabilitation - 5 marks 6) T.M.J - 5 marks 7) Maxillofacial prosthesis - 5 marks

10.2.2 Complete Denture Exercise: Total 100 marks

1) Discussion on treatment plan and patient review (evidence based) - 10 marks

2) Making primary impressions - 05 marks 3) Making final impressions -05 marks 4) Tentative jaw relation records - 05 marks 5) Face bow – transfer - 05 marks 6) Transferring it on articulators - 05 marks 7) Extra oral tracing and securing centric and protrusive/

Lateral record - 25 marks 8) Transfer on articulator - 05 marks 9) Selection of teeth -05 marks 10) Arrangement of teeth - 15 marks 11) Waxed up denture trial -10 marks 12) Fit, insertion and instruction of previously processed characterized, anatomic complete denture prosthesis -5 marks *All steps will include chair side and lab steps viva.

10.2.3 Fixed partial denture: 50 marks 1) Case discussion and selection of patients for F.P.D. -5 marks 2) Abutment preparation isolation and fluid control -25 marks 3) Gingival retraction and impressions -10 marks 4) Cementation of provisional restoration -10 marks

10.2.4 Removable partial denture: 25 marks 1) Surveying and designing of partial dentate cast -10 marks 2) Discussion on components and material selection -15 marks Including occlusal scheme

10.3 Viva Voce: 100 marks: The Viva voce includes Viva and Pedagogy

exercises which shall be of 100 marks. The Viva-voce examination shall be aimed at assessing depth of knowledge, logical reasoning, confidence and verbal communication skills.

10.3.1 Viva voce examination: 80 marks As per the university rules

54

10.3.2 Pedagogy exercise: 20 marks Pedagogy exercise is reviewed jointly by all 4 examiners. 20 Marks for Pedagogy exercise shall be awarded individually by each examiner. A topic shall be allotted to each candidate on the first day of the Practical/Clinical examination. He/she shall be asked to make an evidence based presentation on the allotted topic for 8 – 10 minutes.

11. RECOMMENDED BOOKS

SR.NO. AUTHOR TITLE

1 Murray J J,Bennett A Colour Atlas Of Acid Etch Technique

2 Sarandha D L Textbook Of Complete Denture Prosthodontics

3 Klineberg Iven Occlusion & Clinical Practice

4 Kenneth L.Stewart Clinical Removable Partial Prosthodontics

5 Malone W.F.P Tylman's Theory & Practice Of Fixed Prosthodontics

6 Bernard G N Smith Planning & Making Crowns & Bridges

7 James C. Kessler Fundamentals Of Tooth Preparations

8 Jens Fischer Esthetics & Prosthetics

9 Rosenstiel F. Stephen Contemporary Fixed Prosthodontics

10 Herbert T. Shillingburg Fundamentals Of Fixed Prosthodontics

11 Brudvik James S Advanced Removable Partial Dentures

12 Rosenstiel F. Stephen Contemporary Fixed Prosthodontics

13 Grant Alan A Complete Prosthodontics

14 Mcgivney Glen P. Removable Partial Prosthodontics

15 James S Brudvik Clinical Removable Partial Prosthodontics

16 Barclay C.W Fixed & Removable Prosthontics

17 Lovely M Review Of Fixed Partial Dentures

18 Carr Alan B. Removable Partial Prosthodontics

19 Mccracken William L Partial Denture Construction

20 Soratur Sh Essentials Of Prosthodontics

21 Stratton Russell J An Atlas Of Removable Partial Denturedesign

22 Bartlett David W Clinical Problem Solving In Prosthodontics

23 Mccord Fraser J Missing Teeth

24 Neill D J Partial Denture Construction

25 Dr. Venay C.G. Handbook Of Complete Denture

26 Tilakraj Tn Essentials Of Prosthodontics

27 Nallaswamy Deepak Text Book Of Prosthodontics

28 Kothavade Mukund Handbook Of Complete Denture Prosthodontics

29 Lechner Sybille K Removable Partial Prosthodontics

30 Liddelow K.P. Clinical Dental Prosthetics

31 Kawabe Seiji Complete Dentures

32 Rahn Arthur O Textbook Of Compulete Dentures

33 Agarwal Nitin Kumar Complete Denture Prosthodontics

34 Rahn Arthur O Syllabus Of Complete Dentures

35 Heartwell Charles M Syllabus Of Complete Dentures

55

36 Allen Finbarr P Complete Dentures From Planning Toproblem Solving

37 Hine Maynard K Review Of Dentistry Questions & Answers

38 Zarb George A Boucher's Prosthodontics Treatmentfor Edentulous Patients

39 Soratur Sh Viva In Prothodontics

40 Zarb George A Boucher's Prosthodontics Treatmentfor Edentulous Patients

41 Winkler Sheldon Essentials Of Complete Denture Prosthokontics

42 Ram Sabita M Prosthodontics At A Glance

43 Mccord Fraser J Treatment Of Edentulous Patients

44 Castleberry Mcgivney Mccracken's Removable Partialprosthodontics

45 Misch Carl E Contemporary Implant Dentijstry

46 Binu George Text Book Of Complete Denture Prosthodontics

47 Ranjit Sen Fractures Of Mandible

48 Dawson Peter E Functional Occlusion

49 Ferracane Jack L Materials In Dentistry

50 O'brien William J Dental Materials & Their Selection

51 Rosenstiel Contemporary Fixed Prosthodontics

52 Sheldon Winkler Essentials Of Complete Denture Prosthodontics

53 Denissen H Atlas Of Porcelain Restorations

54 Zarb A .George Prosthodontic Treatment For Edentulous Patients

55 Shillingburg Herbert T Guide To Occlusal Waxing

56 Yadav NS Review Of Fixed Partial Dentures

57 Mount Graham J An Atlas Of Glass-Ionomer Cements

58 John Joy Manappallil Complete Denture Prosthodontics

59 Zarb A .George Prosthodontics Treatment For Edentulous Patients

60 Grhsmmount Atals Of Glass Inomer Cement

61 Freilich Martin A Fiber Reinforced Composites

62 Tylman Theory & Practice Of Fixed Prosthodontics

63 Smith Planning & Making Gronens & Bridges

64 CW Barclay, AD Walmsley Fixed & Removable Prosthodontics

65 Heartwell,Rahn Textbook Of Complete Denture

66 Keith F Thomas Prosthetic Rehafilitation

67 Ruidd Dental Lab Procdunc

68 Graber Color Atlas Of Dental Medicine- RPD

69 Carl A Misch Dental Implant Prosthetics

70 Jose Dos Santos Occlusion Principle & Concepts

71 Gent Advances In Clinical Prosthodontics

72 Thomas Clinical Maxillofacial Prosthetics

73 Wonkler Essentials Of Complete Denture Prosthodontics

74 H.R.B Fenn Clinical Dental Prosthetics

75 Pradeep Kumar C Review Of Fixed Partial Dentures

76 Luis Jose Design Of The Partial Removable Denture Step Step By Step

77 Basker R M Prosthetic Treatment Of The Edentulous Patient

56

57

BRANCH II PERIODONTOLOGY AND ORAL IMPLANTOLOGY

MDS SYLLABUS

Periodontology and Oral Implantology is the clinical science that deals with the

Periodontium in health and disease, the practice of which is called Periodontics.

1. AIM

1.1 To train dental graduates as to ensure higher competence in both general

and special areas of Periodontics

1.2 To prepare a candidate for teaching, research and clinical abilities,

including prevention and after care in Periodontics including periodontal

surgical therapy and Oral Implantology.

1.3 To prepare the candidate to practice Evidence Based Periodontics

2. GENERAL OBJECTIVES OF THE COURSE

2.1 Training programme in the Periodontology including periodontal surgical

therapy. Implantology is structured to achieve knowledge and skill in

theoretical and clinical, attitude, communicative skills and ability to

research with understanding of social, cultural, educational and

environmental background of the society.

2.2 Have acquired adequate knowledge and understanding of applied basic

and systemic medical science, knowledge in general and particularly of

head and neck.

2.3 The postgraduates will be able to provide Periodontal therapy for patients

with competence and working knowledge with understanding of applied

medical, behavioural and clinical science that are beyond the treatment

skills of the general BDS graduate and MDS graduate of other specialities,

to demonstrate evaluative and judgment skills in making appropriate

decisions regarding prevention, treatment, after care and referral to deliver

comprehensive care to patients

58

2.4 Upon completion of the evidence based Periodontal education, the trainee

should be able to:

2.4.1 Demonstrate significance of Evidence Based Periodontics

2.4.2 Demonstrate awareness of epidemiologically-based needs

assessments through research and systematic reviews of research

evidence.

2.4.3 Contribute to the appraisal process.

2.4.4 Understand quality assurance in the delivery of Periodontal care.

Course 2: Periodontology (Theory & Practical)

Outcomes: The candidate should be able to

Examine the patients requiring periodontal therapy, investigate the patient

systemically, analyze the investigation results, radiology, diagnose the ailment, plan

a treatment, communicate it with the patient and execute it. Understand the

prevalence and prevention of diseases related to periodontal origin. Perform both

non-surgical & surgical procedures independently. By understanding biological,

biomedical, bioengineering principles and systemic condition of the patient to provide

a quality health care of the periodontal diseases.

3. KNOWLEDGE

3.1 The candidate should possess knowledge of applied basic and systemic

medical sciences on human anatomy, embryology, histology, applied in

general and particularly to head and neck, Physiology & Biochemistry,

Pathology and Microbiology, Virology, Health and Disease, Nutrition,

Behavioural science, age changes, genetics, Immunology, Congenital defects

and syndrome and Anthropology, Bioengineering, Bio-medical and Biological

Principle and applications to regenerative therapy.

3.2 Ability to diagnose and planned treatment for patients requiring a

Periodontology therapy.

59

3.3 Ability to read and interpret a radiograph and other investigations for the

purpose of diagnosis and treatment plan.

3.4 Non surgical periodontal therapy, surgical periodontal therapy, mucogingival

surgery, bone grafts and biomaterials, periodontal regenerative and resective

periodontal therapy, oral implants.

3.5 Age changes and periodontal therapy for the aged.

3.6 Ability to diagnose periodontal disease, provide periodontal therapy and

supportive periodontal therapy.

3.7 Should have essential knowledge on ethics, laws and Jurisprudence in

Periodontology.

3.8 General health conditions and emergency as related to Periodontal treatment.

3.9 Identify cases, which are outside the area of his speciality / competence and

refer those appropriate specialists.

3.10 Advice regarding case management involving surgical, interim treatment etc.

3.11 To have acquired adequate knowledge and understanding of applied basic

and systematic medical science knowledge in general and particular to head

and neck.

3.12 Should attend continuing education programs, seminars and conferences

related to Periodontology, thus updating himself.

3.13 Teach and guide his/her team, colleague and other students should be able to

use information technology tools and carry out research both basic clinical,

with the aims of publishing his/her work and presenting his/her work at various

scientific forums.

3.14 Should have essential knowledge of personal hygiene, infection control,

prevention of cross infection and safe disposal waste, keeping in view the

risks of transmission of Hepatitis and HIV.

3.15 Should have an abi9lity to plan to establish periodontal clinic/hospital teaching

department and practice management.

3.16 Should have a sound knowledge for application of pharmacology. Effects of

drugs on oral tissue and systems of body and for medically compromised

patients.

3.17 The postgraduates will be able to provide Periodontal therapy for patients with

competence and working knowledge with understanding of applied medical,

behavioural and clinical science that are beyond the treatment skills of the

60

general BDS graduate and MDS graduate of other specialties, to demonstrate

evaluative and judgment skills in making appropriate decisions regarding

prevention, treatment, maintenance and referral to deliver comprehensive

care to patients.

3.18 Upon completion of Evidence based Peridontal education the trainee should

be able to describe:

3.18.1 Evidence based clinical practice including cost effectiveness.

3.18.2 The development and application of clinical guidelines and

standards.

3.18.3 The process of risk assessment as relevant to clinical practice

3.18.4 Multi-disciplinary clinical care pathways and appropriate

integration of Periodontics.

4. SKILLS:

4.1 The candidate should be able to examine the patients requiring periodontal

therapy, investigate the patient systemically, analyze the investigation results,

radiology, diagnose the ailment, plan a treatment, communicate it with the

patient and execute it.

4.2 Understand the prevalence and prevention of diseases related to periodontal

origin.

4.3 The candidate should be able to perform both non-surgical & surgical

procedures independently. By understanding biological, biomedical,

bioengineering principles and systemic condition of the patient to provide a

quality health care of the periodontal diseases.

4.4 Upon completion of the subject of Periodontics, the trainee should be able to:

4.4.1 Utilize appropriate communication / presentation skills

4.4.2 Utilize critical appraisal skills and be able to apply to research evidence

4.4.3 Produce and update patient information material.

4.4.4 Construct, analyze and use patient surveys.

4.4.5 Use procedures to ensure consumer involvement and consultation

5. ATTITUDES:

61

5.1 Adopt ethical principles in all Periodontal practice. Professional honesty and

integrity are to be fostered. Treatment to be delivered irrespective of social

status, caste, creed or region of patient.

5.2 Willing to share knowledge and clinical experience with professional

colleagues.

5.3 Willing to adopt new methods and technique4s in periodontal from time to

time based on scientific research, this is in patient’s best interest.

5.4 Respect patient’s rights and privileges including patient’s right to information

and right to seek second opinion.

5.5 Upon completion of the subject of Periodontics, the trainee should be able to

recognize:

5.5.1 Importance of maintaining professional standards by EBD.

5.5.2 The need to constantly appraise and evaluate clinical practice and

procedures.

6. COMMUNICATIVE ABILITIES:

6.1 Develop communication skills, in particular, to explain treatment option

available in management and to make patient partner in evidence based

decision making

6.2 Provide leadership and get the best out of his group in a congenital working

atmosphere.

6.3 Should be able to communicate in simple understandable language with the

patient to explain the principles of Periodontics to the patient. He should be

able to guide and counsel the patient with regard to various treatment

modalities available.

6.4 Develop the ability to communicate with professional colleagues through

various media like Internet, e-mail, videoconference, and etc. to render the

best possible treatment.

7. COURSE CONTENTS:

62

The candidates shall undergo training for 3 academic years with satisfactory

attendance above 80% for each year.

7.1 The course includes epidemiology and demographic studies, research and

teaching skills.

7.2 Ability to prevent, diagnose and treat with after care for all patients for control

of diseases and / or treatment related periodontal diseases with patient

satisfaction for restoring periodontal health by periodontal therapy.

7.3 The program outline addresses the knowledge, procedural and operative

skills needed in Masters Degree in Periodontics. A minimum of 3 years of

formal training through a graded system of education as specified will enable

the trainee to achieve Masters Degree in Periodontics including Oral

Implantology, competently and have the necessary skills / knowledge to

update themselves with advancements in the field. The course content has

been identified and categorized as Essential knowledge as given below.

8. SYLLABUS DISTRIBUTION:

Paper I: Applied Anatomy, Physiology, Biochemistry, Pathology,

Microbiology, Pharmacology, Biostatistics and research

methodology, Evidence Based Periodontics

Paper II: Etiopathogenesis

Paper III: Clinical and Therapeutic Periodontology, Oral Implantology and

Management of Emergencies

Paper IV: Essay

8.1 PAPER-I: APPLIED BASIC SCIENCES:

A thorough knowledge on the applied aspects of Anatomy, Embryology,

Histology particularly to head and neck, Physiology, Biochemistry,

Pathology, Microbiology, Virology, Pharmacology, health and systemic

diseases and principles in surgery medicine and anaesthesia, Nutrition,

Behavioural sciences, age changes, genetics, Bio-engineering and bio-

63

medical,Evidence Based Periodontics and research Methodology as related

to masters degree Periodontics and Oral Implantology. It is desirable to

have adequate knowledge in bio-statics, research methodology and use of

computers.

8.1.1 APPLIED ANATOMY OF HEAD AND NECK:

8.1.1.1 General human anatomy – gross anatomy, anatomy of head

neck.

8.1.1.2 Cranial and facial bones

8.1.1.3 TMJ and function

8.1.1.4 Muscles of mastication and facial expression,

8.1.1.5 Muscles of neck and back including muscles of deglutition &

tongue

8.1.1.6 Arterial supply and venous drainage of the head and neck

8.1.1.7 Anatomy of the paranasal sinuses

8.1.1.8 General consideration of the structure and function of the brain

8.1.1.9 V, VII, XI, XII, cranial nerves and autonomic nervous system

8.1.1.10 Salivary glands, pharynx, larynx, Trachea, Esophagus

8.1.1.11 Functional anatomy of mastication

8.1.1.12 Deglutition, speech, respiration and circulation

8.1.1.13 Teeth eruption, morphology, occlusion and function

8.1.1.14 Anatomy of TMJ its movements and myofacial pain

dysfunction syndrome

8.1.2 EMBRYOLOGY:

8.1.2.1 Development of the face tongue, jaws, TMJ

8.1.2.2 Development of Paranasal sinuses, pharynx, larynx trachea,

esophagus

8.1.2.3 Development of Salivary glands

8.1.2.4 Development of oral and para oral tissue including detailed

aspects of tooth and dental hard tissue formation.

64

8.1.3 GROWTH & DEVELOPMENT:

8.1.3.1 Facial form and Facial growth and development

8.1.3.2 Dentofacial growth process

8.1.3.3 Physiology from fetal period to maturity and old age

8.1.3.4 Comprehensive study of craniofacial biology General physical

growth

8.1.3.5 Functional and anatomical aspects of the head

8.1.3.6 Changes in craniofacial skeletal

8.1.3.7 Relationship between developments of the dentition and facial

growth

8.1.4 DENTAL ANATOMY:

8.1.4.1 Anatomy of primary and secondary dentition

8.1.4.2 Concept of occlusion

8.1.4.3 Mechanism of articulation

8.1.4.4 Masticatory function

8.1.4.5 Detailed structural and functional study of the oral dental and

para oral tissues

8.1.4.6 Normal occlusion development of occlusion

8.1.4.7 Deciduous missed and permanent dentitions

8.1.4.8 Root length, root configuration, tooth-numbering system

8.1.5 DENTAL HISTOLOGY:

8.1.5.1 Histology of enamel, dentin, cementum, periodontal ligament

and alveolar bone

8.1.5.2 Pulpal anatomy, histology and biological consideration

8.1.5.3 Salivary glands and histology of epithelial tissues including

glands

8.1.5.4 Histology of general and specific connective tissue including

bone hematopoieticsystem, lymphoid etc.

8.1.5.5 Muscle and neural tissues

65

8.1.5.6 Endocrinal system including thyroid

8.1.5.7 Salivary glands, histology of skin, oral mucosa, respiratory

mucosa,connective tissue, bone, cartilage, cellular elements

of blood vessels,blood lymphatic, nerves, muscles, tongue

8.1.5.8 Tooth and its surrounding structures

8.1.6 ANTHROPOLOGY & EVOLUTION:

8.1.6.1 Comparative study of tooth, joints, jaws, muscles of

mastication and facial expression, tongue palate facial profile

and facial skeletal system.

8.1.6.2 Comparative anatomy of skull, bone, brain, musculo skeletal

system

8.1.6.3 Neuromuscular coordination

8.1.6.4 Posture and gait – plantigrade and otho grade posture

8.1.7 APPLED GENETICS AND HEREDITY:

8.1.7.1 Principles of orofacial genetics

8.1.7.2 Molecular basis of genetics

8.1.7.3 8.1.7.3Genetic risks

8.1.7.4 Counseling, bioethics and relationship to orthodontic

management

8.1.7.5 Dentofacial anomalies

8.1.7.6 Anatomical psychological and pathological characteristics of

major groups of developmental defects of orofacial structures.

8.1.8 CELL BIOLOGY:

8.1.8.1 Structure and function of the mammalian cell with special

emphasis on ultra structure features and molecular aspects.

8.1.8.2 Detailed consideration of inter cellular junctions

8.1.8.3 Cell cycle and division

8.1.8.4 Cell-to-cell and cell-extra cellular matrix interactions

66

8.1.9 APPLIED PHYSIOLOGY AND NUTRITION

8.1.9.1 Introduction, mastication, deglutition, digestion and

assimilation

8.1.9.2 Homeostasis, fluid and electrolyte balance. Blood composition

8.1.9.3 Volume, function, blood groups and hemorrhage

8.1.9.4 Blood transfusion, circulation, heart, pulse, blood pressure,

capillary and lymphatic circulation

8.1.9.5 Shock, respiration control, anoxia, hypoxia, asphyxia, artificial

respiration

8.1.9.6 Endocrine glands in growth and development of teeth, bone

and jaws

8.1.9.7 Role of Vitamin A, C and B complex in oral mucosal and

periodontal health

8.1.9.8 Physiology and function of the masticatory system

8.1.9.9 Speech mechanism, mastication, swallowing and deglutition

mechanism

8.1.9.10 salivary glands and saliva

8.1.10 ENDOCRINE

8.1.10.1 General principle of endocrine activity and disorders relating

to pituitary

8.1.10.2 Thyroid, pancreas, parathyroid, adrenals, gonads, including

pregnancy and lactation

8.1.10.3 Physiology of saliva

8.1.10.4 Urine formation, normal and abnormal constituents

8.1.10.5 Physiology of pain, sympathetic and parasympathetic nervous

system

8.1.10.6 Neuromuscular co-ordination of the stomatogenic system

8.1.11 APPLIED NUTRITION:

8.1.11.1 General principles, balanced diet, effect of dietary deficiencies

67

8.1.11.2 Starvation, diet, digestion, absorption, transportation and

utilization

8.1.11.3 Diet for elderly patients

8.1.12 APPLIED BIOCHEMISTRY:

8.1.12.1 General principles governing the various biological activities

of the body

8.1.12.2 Osmotic pressure, electrolytic dissociation, oxidation-

reductions

8.1.12.3 General composition of the body

8.1.12.4 Intermediary metabolism, carbohydrates, proteins, liquids and

their metabolism

8.1.12.5 Enzymes

8.1.12.6 Vitamins, and minerals, hormones

8.1.12.7 Blood and together body fluids

8.1.12.8 Metabolism of inorganic elements

8.1.12.9 Detoxication in the body, anti metabolites.

8.1.13 APPLIED PHARMACOLOBY AND THERAPEUTICS:

8.1.13.1 Definition of terminologies used – dosage and mode of

administration of drugs

8.1.13.2 Action and fate of the drugs in the body

8.1.13.3 Drug addiction, tolerance and hypersensitive reactions

8.1.13.4 Drugs acting on CNS, general anesthetics, hypnotics

8.1.13.5 Analeptics and tranquilizers

8.1.13.6 Local anesthetics

8.1.13.7 Chemotherapeutics and antibiotics, anti tubercular and anti

syphilitic drugs

8.1.13.8 Analgesics and antipyretics

8.1.13.9 Antiseptics, styptics

8.1.13.10 Sialogogues and antisialogogues

68

8.1.13.11 Haematinics, cortisone, ACTH, insulin and other

antidiabetics

8.1.13.12 Vitamins: A, D, B complex, C and K etc.

8.1.13.13 Chemotherapy and radiotherapy.

8.1.14 APPLIED PATHOLOGY:

8.1.14.1 Inflammation

8.1.14.2 Repair and degeneration

8.1.14.3 Necrosis and gangrene

8.1.14.4 Circulatory disturbances

8.1.14.5 Ischemia, hyperemia, chronic venous congestion, edema,

thrombosis, embolism and infarction

8.1.14.6 Infection and infective granulomas

8.1.14.7 Allergy and hypersensitive and reaction

8.1.14.8 Neoplasm, classification of tumors, carcinogenesis,

characteristics of benign and malignant tumor, spread of

tumors

8.1.14.9 Applied histopathology and clinical pathology

8.1.15 APPLIED MICROBIOLOGY

8.1.15.1 Immunity

8.1.15.2 Knowledge of organisms commonly associated with diseases

of the oral cavity (morphology cultural characteristics etc)

Staphylo, pneumo,gono and meningococci, clostridia group of

organlismis etc. Virology

8.1.15.3 Cross infections, spirochetes, organisms of tuberculosis,

leprosy, diphtheria, actinomycosis and moniliasis etc.

Virology,

8.1.15.4 Cross infection control, sterilization and hospital waste

management

8.1.16 APPLIED ORAL PATHOLOGY:

69

8.1.16.1 Developmental disturbances of oral and para oral structures

8.1.16.2 Regressive changes of teeth, bacterial, viral and mycotic

infections of oral cavity, dental caries, diseases of pulp and

periapical tissues

8.1.16.3 Physical and chemical injuries of the oral cavity

8.1.16.4 Oral manifestations of metabolic and endocrine disturbances

8.1.16.5 Diseases of the blood and blood forming organism in relation

to the oral cavity

8.1.16.6 Periodontal diseases, diseases of the skin, nerves and

muscles inrelation to oral cavity

8.1.17 LABORATORY DETERMINANTS:

8.1.17.1 Blood groups, blood matching

8.1.17.2 RBC and WBC COUNT, bleeding and clotting time

8.1.17.3 Smear and cultures – urine analysis and culture

8.1.18 BIOSTATISTICS:

8.1.18.1 Study of biostatistics as applied to dentistry and research

8.1.18.2 Definition, aim characteristics and limitations of statics

8.1.18.3 Planning of statistical experiments, sampling, collection,

classification& presentation of data (tables, graphs,

pictograms etc) Analysis of data

8.1.19 INTRODUCTION TO BIOSTATISTICS:

8.1.19.1 Scope and need for statistical application to biological data

8.1.19.2 Definition of selected terms-Scale of measurements related to

statistics

8.1.19.3 Methods of collecting data, presentation of the statistical

diagramsand graphs

70

8.1.19.4 Frequency curves, mean, mode of median, standard

deviationand co- efficient of variation, correlation - co-efficient

and its significance

8.1.19.5 Binominal distributions normal distribution and position

distribution

8.1.19.6 Tests of significance.

8.1.20 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY:

8.1.20.1 Understanding and evaluating dental research

8.1.20.2 Scientific method and the behavior of scientists

8.1.20.3 Understanding to logic-inductive logic-analogy

8.1.20.4 Models, authority, hypothesis and causation, quacks, cranks,

abuses of logic, measurement and errors of measurement,

presentation of observation

8.1.20.5 Experimentation and experimental design

8.1.20.6 Logic of statistical interference balance judgments,

judgmentunder uncertainty, clinical vs. scientific judgment,

problem with analysis as a means of literature evaluation,

influencing judgments

8.1.20.7 The problem of contradictory evidence, citation analysis as a

means of literature evaluation

8.1.20.8 Influencing judgment: Lower forms of rhetorical life, denigration,

terminal, inexactitude.

8.1.21 APPLIED RADIOLOGY

8.1.21.1 Introduction, radiation, background of radiation, sources

8.1.21.2 Radiation biology, somatic damage, genetic damage

8.1.21.3 Protection from primary and secondary radiation

8.1.21.4 Principals of x-ray production applied principles of radio

therapy and after care

8.1.22 ROENTGENOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUES:

71

8.1.22.1 Intra oral & extra oral radiography

8.1.22.2 Methods of localization digital radiology and ultra sound

8.1.22.3 Normal anatomical landmarks of teeth and jaws in radiograms

8.1.22.4 Temporomandibular joint radiograms, neck radiograms.

8.1.23 APPLIED MEDICINE:

8.1.23.1 Systemic diseases and its influence on general health and oral

and dental health

8.1.23.2 Medical emergencies in the dental offices-prevention,

preparation

8.1.23.3 Medico legal consideration

8.1.23.4 Unconsciousness, respiratory distress, altered consciousness,

seizures,drug related emergencies, chest pain, cardiacarrest,

8.1.23.5 Premedication, and management of ambulatory patients,

resuscitation

8.1.23.6 Applied psychiatry, child, adult and senior citizens

8.1.23.7 Assessment of case, premeditation, inhibition, monitoring,

extubation

8.1.23.8 Complication assists in O.T. for anesthesia.

8.1.24 APPLIED SURGERY & ANESTHESIA:

8.1.24.1 General principles of surgery, wound healing, incision wound

care

8.1.24.2 Hospital care, control of hemorrhage, electrolyte balance

8.1.24.3 Common bandages, sutures splints, shifting of critically ill

Patients

8.1.24.4 Prophylactic therapy, bone surgeries, grafts, etc, surgical

techniques

8.1.24.5 Nursing assistance, anesthetic assistance

72

8.1.25 EVIDENCE BASED PERIODONTICS

8.1.25.1 Introduction to evidence-based decision making

8.1.25.2 Assessing Evidence

8.1.25.3 Implementing Evidence- Based Decision in Clinical Practice

8.2 PAPER-II: ETIOPATHOGENESIS

8.2.1 Classification of periodontal diseases & conditions

8.2.2 Epidermeology of gingival & periodontal diseases

8.2.3 Microbiology of periodontal diseases etiology & predisposing

factors for periodontal diseases

8.2.4 Microbiological interactions with host in periodontal diseases

8.2.5 Role of dental calculus & other predisposing factors

8.2.6 Pathogenesis of plaque associated periodontal diseases

8.2.7 Genetic factors associated with periodontal diseases

8.2.8 Smoking and periodontal diseases

8.2.9 Host modulation

8.2.10 Effects of systemic disorders and stress on the periodontium

8.2.11 Periodontal medicine

8.2.12 Oral malodour

8.2.13 Occlusion and periodontal diseases

8.2.14 Aids and periodontium

8.2.15 Dental hypersensitivity

8.2.16 Interdisciplilnary Periodontics

8.2.17 Gingival diseases

8.2.18 Periodontal diseases

8.2.19 Diognosis, prognosis, radiology and other lab aids

8.3 PAPER-III:Clinical and Therapeutic Periodontology, Oral Implantology and

Management of Emergencies

8.3.1 History, diagnosis and treatment plan

8.3.1.1 clinical diagnosis

73

8.3.1.2 Advanced diagnostic techniques

8.3.1.3 Risk assessment and levels of clinical significance

8.3.1.4 Prognosis

8.3.1.5 Rationale for periodontal disease

8.3.1.6 General principles of anti-infective therapy with special

emphasis on infection control

8.3.1.7 Bruxism and its treatment

8.3.2 Periodontal instrumentation-sonic and ultra-sonics

8.3.3 Periodontal therapy

8.3.3.1 Scaling and rootplaning

8.3.3.2 Plaque control

8.3.3.3 Treatment of medically compromised patients

8.3.3.4 Treatment of female patients and older adults

8.3.3.5 Treatment of aggressive and atypical forms of Periodontitis

8.3.3.6 Treatment of acute gingival diseases

8.3.3.7 Treatment of periodontal abscess

8.3.3.8 Periodontal splints

8.3.3.9 Periodontal management of HIV patients

8.3.3.10 Management of dental hypersensitivity

8.3.3.11 Role of orthodontics in adjunct to periodontal therapy

8.3.3.12 Preparation of Periodontium for restorative dentistry

8.3.4 Non surgical periodontal therapy

8.3.5 Periodontal surgical phase

8.3.5.1 General principles of periodontal surgeries

8.3.5.2 Surgical anatomy of periodontal related structures

8.3.5.3 Gingival curettage

8.3.5.4 Gingivectomy techniques

8.3.5.5 Treatment of gingival enlargement

8.3.5.6 The periodontal flap

8.3.5.7 Osseous surgery (i) Resective and (ii) Regenerative

8.3.5.8 Furcation involvement and treatment

8.3.5.9 Periodontic – endodontic continuation

74

8.3.5.10 Perio – esthetics

8.3.5.11 Electro surgery and lasers

8.3.5.12 Recent advances in surgical techniques

8.3.5.13 Future directions in regenerative therapy

8.3.5.14 Future directions in measurement of periodontal diseases

8.3.5.15 Periodontal Maintenance phase (i) Supportive periodontal

treatment (ii) Results of periodontal treatment

8.3.6 Oral Implantology

8.3.6.1 Introduction and historical review

8.3.6.2 biological, clinical and surgical aspects of dental implants

8.3.6.3 Diagnosis and treatment planning

8.3.6.4 Implant surgery

8.3.6.5 Prosthetic aspects of dental implants

8.3.6.6 Localized bone augmentation and implant site development

8.3.6.7 Diagnosis and treatment of peri- implant complications

8.3.6.8 Special emphasis on plaque control measures

8.3.6.9 Maintenance phase

8.3.6.10 Recent advances in implant surgical technology

8.3.7 Dental ethics

8.4 PAPER-IV: ESSAYS: Any contents from 8.1 to 8.3 can be included in

essay

9. YEARLY PRACTICAL/CLINICAL SCHEDULE:

9.1 FIRST YEAR- EXERCISES

9.1.1 Pre-clinical work

9.1.1.1 Dental

9.1.1.1.1 Practice of incisions and suturing techniques on the

typhodont models.

9.1.1.1.2 Fabrication of bite guards and splints.

9.1.1.1.3 X-Ray techniques and interpretation.

9.1.1.1.4 Local anaesthetic techniques.

75

9.1.1.2 Medical

9.1.1.2.1 Basic diagnostic microbiology and immunology, collection

and handling of sample, culture techniques

9.1.1.2.2 Basic understanding of immunological diseases.

9.1.1.2.3 Interpretation of various biochemical investigation

9.1.1.2.4 Practical training and handling medical emergencies and

basic life support devices.

9.1.1.2.5 Basic biostatistics-surveying and data analysis.

9.1.2 Clinical work (diagnosis/treatment plan to be supported with higher level of

evidences as per the department treatment protocol)

9.1.2.1 Long case-history with Applied periodontal indices 10

Cases

9.1.2.2 Scaling and root planning (SRP)

9.1.2.3 Hand (50 cases)

9.1.2.4 Ultrasonic(50 cases)

9.1.2.5 Curettage (25cases)

9.1.2.6 Gingivectomy (20 cases)

9.1.2.7 Gingivoplasty (10 cases)

9.2 SECOND YEAR- EXERCISES

9.2.1 Case history and treatment techniques 25

Cases

9.2.2 Local drug Delivery techniques 10 Case

9.2.3 Periodontal surgical procedures

9.2.3.1 Pocket therapy 50-70 cases

9.2.3.2 Muco-gingival surgeries & periodontal plastic surgery

20 Cases

9.2.3.3 Management of Perio-endo problems 10 Cases

9.2.3.4 Occlusal adjustments 10 Cases 10 Cases

9.2.3.5 Periodontal splints 10 Cases

76

9.3 THIRD YEAR- EXERCISES

9.3.1 Regenerative technique Using various graft and barrier

membranes

9.3.2 Ridge augmentation, sinus lift technique if any

9.3.3 Implant case if any.

9.3.4 Record, maintenance & follow up of all treated cases including

implants.

10. Academic work quota in three years

10.1 Seminars-15 (Incorporation of recent evidences as per the hierarchy of

evidences in seminar)

10.2 Journal club-25 (Formulation of clinical question to critical appraisal of

evidence and decision making as per the principles of Evidence Based

Decision Making in journal club)

10.3 Case presentation-5 (diagnosis/treatment plan to be supported with higher

level of evidences)

10.4 Interdisciplinary case presentation-2 (diagnosis/treatment plan to be

supported with higher level of evidences)

10.5 Poster/paper presentation in speciality conference-2

10.6 Short research-2

10.7 Publication in peer review journal-2

77

REFERENCE BOOKS

SR.NO AUTHOR TITLE EDITION

1 KENNEY E.BARRIE

THE HISTORICAL BACKGROUND OF PERIODONTOLOGY

1ST

2 CARRANZA FERMIN A

CLINICAL PERIODONTOLOGY 7TH

3 CARRANZA GLICKMAN'S CLINICAL PERIODONTOLOGY 7TH

4 VARMA B.R.R CURRENT CONCEPTS IN PERIODONTICS 1ST

5 PANDIT NYMPHEA

CONCISE PERIODONTOLOGY 1ST

6 KARLSTAD,SWEDEN

DIAGNOSIS & RISK PREDICTION OF PERIODONTAL DISEASES

1ST

7 CLEREHUGH VALERIE

PERIODONTAL MANAGEMENT OF CHILDREN

ADOLESCENTS & YOUNG ADULTS

1ST

8 SERIO FRANCIS G

MANUAL OF CLINICAL PERIODONTICS 1ST

9 GURURAJA RAO TEXTBOOK OF PERIODONTOLOGY 2ND

10 NEWMAN MICHAEL G

CLINICAL PERIODONTOLOGY 9TH

11 WILSON THOMS G

FUNDAMENTALS OF PERIODONTICS 2ND

12 MANSON J D OUTLINE OF PERIODONTICS 4TH

13 ELEY B M PERIODONTICS 5TH

14 PERRY DOROTHY A

PERIODONTOLOGY FOR THE DENTAL HYGIENIST

3RD

15 CARRANZA FERMIN A

CLINICAL PERIODONTOLOGY 9TH

78

16 NEWMAN MICHALE G

CLINICAL PERIODONTOLOGY 8TH

17 CARRANZA FERMIN A

CLINICAL PERIODONTOLOGY 8TH

18 ROSE LOUIS F PERIODONTAL MEDICINE 1ST

19 HALL WALTER B DECISION MAKING IN PERIODONTOLOGY 3RD

20 REDDY SHANTIPRIYA

ESSENTIALS OF CLINICAL PERIODONTOLOGY AND PERIODONTICS

2ND

21 LAIN, CHAPPLE UNDERSTANDING PERIODONTAL DISEASES 1ST

22 VARMA B.R.R. CLINICAL PERIODONTOLOGY 1ST

23 GURURAJA RAO PERIODONTOLOGY 2ND

24 ROSE LOUIS F PERIODONTICS MEDICINE,SURGERY&IMPLANTS

1ST

25 SUZANNE L NOBLE

DECISION-MAKING FOR THE PERIODONTAL TEAM

1ST

26 LINDHE JAN CLINICAL PERIDONTOLOGY AND IMPLANT DENTISTRY

4TH

27 KRISHNA KUMAR REVIEW OF CLINIAL PERIODONTOLOGY 1ST

28 VERNINO ARTHUR R

PERIODONTICS SYLLABUS 5TH

29 ORALBIOFILMS & PLAQUECONTRO

L BUSSCHER H J

30 ROSE LOUIS F PERODONTAL MEDICINE 1ST

31 FERMIN CARRANZA

HISTORY OF PERIODONTOLOGY 1ST

32 RAMFIORD SIGURD P

PERIODONTOLOGY & PERIODONTICS 1ST

33 COCHRAN DAVID L

BIOMIMETICS IN PERIODONTAL REGENERATION

1ST

34 ARUN KV MOLECULAR BIOLOGY OF PERIODONTIUM 1ST

35 DARBY MICHELE L.

MOSBY'S COMPREHENSIVE REVIEW OF DENTAL HYGIENE

6TH

36 BUSSCHER H J ORAL BIOFILMS & PLAQUECONTROL 1ST

37 PAWLAK ELIZABETH A

ESSENTIALS OF PERIODONTICS 3RD

38 NIELD GEHRIG JILL S

FUNDAMENTALS OF PERIODONTAL INSTRUMENTATION

6TH

39 NEWMANN, MICHAEL G.

CARRANZA'S CLINICAL PERIODONTOLOGY 10TH

79

40 TERUO ITO COLOR ATLAS OF PERIODONTAL SURIGERY 1ST

41 COHEN STEPHEN

EDWARD S

ATLAS OF COSMETIC & RECONSTRUCTIVE PERIODONTAL SURGERY

2ND

42 WOLF HERBERT F

COLOR ATLAS OF DENTAL MEDICINE PERIODONTOLOGY

3RD

43 WAITE I M A COLOUR ATLAS OF PARIODONTOLOGY 2ND

44 MANSON J D OUTLINE OF PERIODONTICS 1ST

45 WALTER B. HALL CRITICAL DECISIONS IN PERIODONTOLOGY 4TH

46 VERNIO THE PERIODONTIC SYLLABUS 1ST

47 CARRANZA CLINICAL PERIODONTOLOGY 1ST

48 GURURAJA RAO T B OF PERIODONTOLOGY 1ST

49 ORBANS PERIODONTICS 1ST

50 LOUIS ROSE PERIODONTICS MEDICINE,SURGERY & IMPLANTS

1ST

51 MYRON NEVINS PERIODONTAL THERAPY 1ST

52 CARRANZA CLINICAL PERIODONTOLOGY FOR THE DENTAL HYGIENIST

1ST

53 MARK BARTOLD BIOLOGY OF PERIODONTAL CONNECTIVE TISSUES

1ST

54 ROSEN PERIODONTAL MEDICINE 1ST

55 WATTS PERIODONTICS IN PRACTICE 1ST

56 THOMAS FUNDAMENTAL OF PARIODONTICS 1ST

57 THOMAS DENTAL MAINTENANCE FOR PATIENTS WITH PARIODONTAL DISEASES

1ST

58 CARRANZA CLINICAL PERIODONTOLOGY 10TH

59 VALERIE PERIODONTAL MANAGEMENT OF CHILDREN,SDOLESCEN

TS & YOUNG ADULTS

1ST

60 ROBERT IRELAND

CLINICAL TEXTBOOK OF DENTAL HYGIENE & THERAPY

1ST

61 DILIP NAYAK TEXTBOOK OF PERIODONTOLOGY AND ORAL IMPLANTOLOGY

1ST

62 DIBART SERGE PRACTICAL PERIODONTAL PLASTIC SURGERY

1ST

63 WILKINS ESTHER M

CLINICAL PRACTICE OF THE DENTAL HYGIENIST

10TH

64 VANDERSALL DAVID C

CONCISE ENCYCLOPEDIA OF PERIODONTOLOGY

1ST

65 STEGEMAN CYNTHIA A

THE DENTAL HYGIENIST'S GUIDE TO NUTRITIONAL CARE

2ND

80

66 VERNINO ARTHUR R

THE PERIODONTIC SYLLABUS 5TH

67 AXELSSON PER DIAGNOSIS & RISK PREDICTION OF PERIODONTAL DISEASES

1ST

68 MILLAR DIANE REINFORCED PERIODONTAL INSTRUMENTATION AND ERGONOMICS FOR

THE DENTAL CARE PROVIDER

1ST

69 MANSON J D OUTLINE OF PERIODONTICS 5TH

70 REDDY SHANTIPRIYA

ESSENTIALS OF CLINICAL PERIODONTOLOGY AND PERIODONTICS

3RD

71 BIMSTEIN, ENRIQUE

PERIODONTAL AND GINGIVAL HEALTH AND DISEASES

1ST

72 SERGE DIBERT PRACTICAL PERIODONTAL DIAGNOSIS AND TREATMENT PLANNING

1ST

73 LINDHE,JAN CLINICAL PERIDONTOLOGY AND IMPLANT DENTISTRY

5TH

74 TARQUILL MACPHEE

ESSENTIALS OF PERIODONTOLOGY AND PERIODONTICS

3RD

75 CHANDRA MADHAVI K

CLINICAL PERIDONTICS 1ST

76 PANDIT, NYMPHEA

CONCISE PERIODONTICS 1ST

77 B.R.R.VARMA CLINICAL PERIODONTOLOGY 2ND

78 BATHLA SHALU TIPS & TRICKS IN PERIODONTOLOGY 1ST

79 CLEREHUGH VALERIE

PERIODONTOLOGY AT A GLANCE 1ST

80 MICHAEL G. NEWMAN

CARRANZA'S CLINICAL PERIODONTOLOGY 11TH

81 LINDHE, JAN CLINICAL PERIODONTOLOGY AND IMPLANT DENTISTRY

5TH

82 SATO,NAOSHI PERIODONTAL SURGERY 1ST

83 WILSON,THOMAS G

ADVANCES IN PERIODONTICS 1ST

SCHEME OF EXAMINATION

THEORY:

Written examination shall consist of four question papers each of three hours

duration. Total marks for each paper will be 75. Paper I, II, III shall consist of two

long questions carrying 20 marks each and 5 short essay questions each carrying 7

marks. Paper IV will be on essay.

81

Paper Contents Marks

Paper I Applied basic sciences: Applied Anatomy, Physiology and

Pathology, Microbiology, Pharmacology,

Research Methodology & Biostatistics. Evidence

Based Periodontics

75

Paper II Normal Periodontal structure. Etiology & Pathogenesis of

Periodontal diseases, Epidemiology as related

to Periodontics.

75

Paper III Periodontal diagnosis, Therapy and Oral Implant 75

Paper IV Essay 75

Total 300

PRACTICAL / CLINICAL EXAMINATION: 300 Marks

Sr. No. Procedure Marks

Day 1

1. Case discussion

Long case history - 1 50

Short case histories - 2 50

2. Periodontal surgery- Periodontal flap surgery on

a previously prepared case in one

quadrant of the mouth after getting

approval from the examiners.

75

Day 2

3. Post surgical review & discussion of the case

treated on the first day supported by

high level critically appraised

evidences)

25

4. Grand Viva 80

5. Evidence based Pedagogy 20

Total 300

82

OBJECTIVELY STRUCTURED EXAM PATTERN

• Long case history 50 marks

Recording the history 10 marks

Diagnosis 05 marks

Treatment plan 10 marks

Presentation 05 marks

Discussion 20 marks

• 2 Short case histories 25+25=50 marks

Recording of history 05 marks

Diagnosis 05 marks

Treatment plan 05 marks

Presentation 05 marks

Discussion 05 marks

• Periodontal flap procedure 75 marks

Selection of case 05 marks

Asepsis 05 marks

Local anesthesia 05 marks

Incision 10 marks

Reflection 10 marks

Debridement and root planing 10 marks

Suturing 05 marks

Discussion 25 marks

• Post operative evaluation 25 marks

Findings on the post surgery visit 05 marks

Recording of the findings 05 marks

Medicines 05 marks

Evidence based Discussion 10 marks

• Pedagogy 20 marks

Completeness of the topic 05 marks

Presentation 05 marks

83

Incorporation of recent evidence with justification and appraisal

10 marks

• Viva voce (as per the university rules) 80 marks

84

BRANCH - III

ORAL AND MAXILLOFACIAL SURGERY AND ORAL IMPLANTOLOGY

Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery and Oral Implantology deals with the diagnosis, surgical

& adjunctive treatment of diseases, injuries and defects of the human jaws& associated

oral and facial structures.

1.AIM

1.1 To train dental graduates as to ensure higher competence in both general and

special areas of oral and maxillofacial surgery.

1.2 To prepare a candidate for teaching, research and clinical abilities including

diagnosis and treatment of various disorders, deficiencies, defects and trauma of the

oral and maxillofacial region.

Incorporating EBES training schedules in their Curriculum so that they can follow EBP

(evidence based practice)

2.OBJECTIVES

2.1Training programme in Oral and Maxillofacial surgery is structured to achieve

knowledge and proficiency in theoretical and surgical skills, attitude, communicative

skills and ability to research with understanding of social, cultural, educational and

environmental background of the society.

2.2Have a thorough understanding and applicable knowledge of basic and systemic

medical science, with special focus on the head and neck region.

The training program in Oral and maxillofacial Surgery is structured to achieve the

following four objectives – .Knowledge .Skills .Attitude .Communicative skills and ability

85

Course 3: Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery (Theory &Practical)

Outcomes: The student should be able to

1. Obtain proper clinical history, methodical examination of the patient, perform

essential diagnostic procedures and order relevant laboratory tests and interpret them

and to arrive at a reasonable diagnosis about the surgical condition. Perform with

competence minor oral surgical procedures and common maxillofacial surgery. To treat

both surgically and medically (or by other means) problems of the oral and maxillofacial

and the related area). Provide care of maxillofacial surgery patients both on a out-

patient and in-patient basis. Critically analyze of scientific literature and to incorporate

evidence based knowledge in the practice of oral and maxillofacial surgery.

3.KNOWLEDGE

3.1 To have acquired adequate knowledge and understanding of the etiology and of

patho-physiology and diagnosis, treatment planning of various common oral and

maxillofacial surgical problems both minor and major in nature.

3.2 To have understood the general surgical principles like pre and post surgical

management, particularly of evaluation, post surgical care, fluid and electrolyte

management, blood transfusion and post surgical pain-management.

3.3 Understanding of basic sciences relevant to practice or oral and maxillofacial

surgery.

3.4 Able to identify special, cultural, economic, genetic and environmental factors and

their relevance to disease process management in the oral and Maxillo-facial region.

3.5 Essential knowledge of personal hygiene and infection control, prevention of cross

infection and safe disposal of hospital waste keeping in view the high prevalence to

hepatitis and HIV.

4.SKILLS

86

4.1To obtain proper clinical history, methodical examination of the patient, perform

essential diagnostic procedures and order relevant laboratory tests and interpret them

and to arrive at a reasonable diagnosis about the surgical condition.

4.2 To perform with competence minor oral surgical procedures and common

maxillofacial surgery. To treat both

surgically and medically (or by other means) problems of the oral and Maxillofacial and

the related area).

4.3 Capable of providing care of maxillofacial surgery patients both on out-patient and

in-patient basis.

4.4 To develop skills for critical analysis of scientific literature and to incorporate

evidence based knowledge in the practice of oral and maxillofacial surgery.

The student should be able to identify the problem search literature related to the

problem critically evaluate and apply and share knowledge with the patient and involve

him in decision making

5.ATTITUDE

5.1 Develop attitude to adopt ethical principles in all aspect of surgical practice,

professional honesty and integrity are to fostered. Surgical care is to be delivering

irrespective of the social status, caste, creed or religion of the patient.

5.2 Willing to share the knowledge and clinical experience with professional colleagues.

5.3 Willing to adopt new and techniques of surgical management developed from time

to time based on scientific research which are in the best interest of the patient.

5.4 Respect patient right and privileges, including patients right to information and right

to seek a second opinion.

87

5.5 Develop attitude to seek opinion from an allied medical and dental specialists as

and when required.

A student should develop an attitude towards embracing new research keeping abreast

with the new developments in the field and must be able to critically evaluate the results

before and after the application of knowledge and present it to the scientific community.

6. COMMUNICATION SKILLS

6.1Develop adequate communication skills particularly with the patients giving them the

various options available to manage a particular surgical problem and obtain a true

informed consent from them for the most appropriate treatment available at that point of

time.

6.2Develop the ability to communicate with professional colleagues.

6.3 Develop ability to teach undergraduates.

The student should be able to take discuss the patient condition with the patient and

patient relatives and should achieve expertise in taking true informed consent.

7. COURSE CONTENT The program outline addresses both the knowledge needed in

Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery and allied medical specialties in its scope. A minimum of

three years of formal training through a graded system of education as specified will

equip the trainee with skill and knowledge at its completion to be able to practice basic

oral and Maxillofacial surgeon compliantly and have the ability to intelligently pursue

further apprenticeship towards advance Maxillofacial surgery.

8. SYLLABUS DISTRIBUTION:

Paper I : Applied Basic Sciences -Applied Anatomy, Physiology, Biochemistry, General

and Oral Pathology & Microbiology, Pharmacology and Therapeutics,

Computer Science, Research methodology.

Paper II : Minor Oral Surgery and Trauma

88

Paper III : Maxillofacial surgery

Paper IV : Essay

8.1 Paper-I: Applied Basic Sciences

8.1.1 Applied Anatomy

8.1.1.1 Surgical anatomy of the scalp, temple and face (M)

8.1.1.2 Anatomy of the triangles of neck and deep structures of the neck (M)

8.1.1.3 Cranial and facial bones and its surrounding soft issues with its applied

aspects in maxillofacial injuries (M)

8.1.1.4 Muscles of head and neck (M)

8.1.1.5 Arterial supply, venous drainage and lymphatic of head and neck (M)

8.1.1.6 Congenital abnormalities of the head and neck (M)

8.1.1.7 Surgical anatomy of the cranial nerves (M)

8.1.1.8 Anatomy of the tongue and its applied aspects (M)

8.1.1.9 Surgical anatomy of the temporal and infratemporal regions (M)

8.1.1.10 Anatomy and its applied aspects of salivary glands, pharynx, thyroid and

parathyroid gland, larynx, trachea esophagus (M)

8.1.1.11 Tooth eruption, morphology, and occlusion (M)

8.1.1.12 Surgical anatomy of the nose (M)

8.1.1.13 The structure and function of the brain including surgical anatomy of

intra cranial venous sinuses(M)

8.1.1.14 Antonomous nervous system of head and neck (M)

89

8.1.1.15 Functional anatomy of mastication, deglutition, speech, respiration and

circulation (M)

8.1.1.16 Development of face, paranasal sinuses and associated structures and

their anomalies (M)

8.1.1.17 Cadveric dissection of different anatomical regions to maxillofacial

surgery(M)

8.1.2 Applied Physiology

8.1.2.1. Nervous system (M)

8.1.2.1.1 Physiology of nerve conduction (M)

8.1.2.1.2 Pain pathway (M)

8.1.2.1.3 Sympathetic and parasympathetic nervous system, hypothalamus and

mechanism of controlling body temperature (M)

8.1.2.2. Blood

8.1.2.2.1 Composition and Haemostasis 8.1.2.2.2Various blood

dyscrasias and its management of patients with the same(M)

8.1.2.2.3 Hemorrhage and its control (M)

8.1.2.2.4 Capillary and lymphatic circulation 8.1.2.2.5Blood grouping

and transfusing procedures (M)

8.1.2.3. Digestive system

8.1.2.3.1 Saliva – composition and function of saliva, Mastication,

deglutition, digestion, assimilation (M)

8.1.2.3.2 Urine formation, normal and abnormal constituents (M)

8.1.2.4. Respiration

90

8.1.2.4.1Control of ventilation,anoxia, asphyxia, artificial respiration

8.1.2.4.1Hypoxia – types and management(M)

8.1.2.5. Cardio Vascular System

8.1.2.5.1Cardiac cycle (M)

8.1.2.5.2 Shock (M)

8.1.2.5.3 Heart sounds (M)

8.1.2.5.4 Blood pressure and its regulation (M)

8.1.2.5.5 Hypertension (M)

8.1.2.6. Endocrinology

8.1.2.6.1 General endocrinal activity and disorder relating to

thyroid gland, Parathyroid gland, adrenal gland, pituitary gland,

pancreas and gonads (M)

8.1.2.6.2 Metabolism of calcium.(M)

8.1.2.7. Nutrition

8.1.2.7.1 General Principles balanced diet (M)

8.1.2.7.2 Effect of dietary deficiency (M)

8.1.2.7.3 Protein energy malnutrition (M)

8.1.2.7.4 Kwashiokor and Marasmus (M)

8.1.2.7.5 Fluid and Electrolytic balance in maintaining haemostasis

and significance in minor and major surgical procedures (M)

8.1.3 Biochemistry

91

8.1.3.1 General principles governing the various biological activities of the

body, such as osmotic pressure, electrolytes, dissociation, oxidation,

reduction etc (M)

8.1.3.2 General composition of the body (M)

8.1.3.3 Intemediary metabolism (M)

8.1.3.4 Enzymes (M)

8.1.3.5 Vitamins and minerals (M)

8.1.3.6 Hormones (M)

8.1.3.7 Body and other fluids (D)

8.1.3.8 Metabolism of inorganic elements(D)

8.1.3.9 Detoxification in the body (G)

8.1.3.10 Anitmetabolites. (G)

8.1.4 General Pathology

8.1.4.1.Inflammation

8.1.4.1.1 Repair and regeneration (M)

8.1.4.1.2 Necrosis and Gangrene (M)

8.1.4.1.3 Role of component system in acute inflammation (D)

8.1.4.1.4 Role of arachidonic acid and its metabolites in acute inflammation

(D)

8.1.4.1.5 Role molecular events in cell growth and intercellular signaling (G)

8.1.4.1.6 Cell surface receptors (G)

8.1.4.1.7 Role of NSAIDs in inflammation (M)

92

8.1.4.1.8 Cellular changes in radiation injury and its manifestation; (M)

8.1.4.2.Haemostasis (M)

8.1.4.2.1 Role of endothelium in thromobogenesis (M)

8.1.4.2.2 Arterial and venous thrombi (M)

8.1.4.2.3 Disseminated Intravascular coagulation (M)

8.1.4.3.Shock

8.1.4.3.1 Pathogenesis of hemorrhagic, neurogenic, septic, cardiogenic shock

(M)

8.1.4.3.2Circulatorydisturbances,ischemiahyperemia, venouscongestion,

edema, infarction (M)

8.1.4.4. Chromosomal abnormalities (D)

8.1.4.4.1 Marfans Syndrome (D)

8.1.4.4.2 Ehler’s Danlos Syndrome (G)

8.1.4.4.3 Fragile X-Syndrome (G)

8.1.4.5.Hypersensitivity

8.1.4.5.1 Anaphylaxis, type 2 hypersensitivity, type 3 sensitivity and cell

mediated reaction, and its clinical importance(M

8.1.4.5.2 Systemic lupus erythematosus (M)

8.1.4.5.3 Infection and infective granulomas (M)

8.1.4.6. Neoplasia

8.1.4.6.1 Classification of tumors (M)

8.1.4.6.2 Carcinogenesis and carcinogen – chemical, viral and microbial (M)

93

8.1.4.6.3 Grading and staging of cancers (M)

8.1.4.6.4 Ttumor Angiogenesis (M)

8.1.4.6.5 Paraneoplastic syndrome (D)

8.1.4.6.6 Spread of tumors (M)

8.1.4.6.7 Characteristics of benign and malignant tumors (M)

8.1.4.7 Others

8.1.4.7.1 Sex linked agamma globulinemia (G)

8.1.4.7.2 AIDS

8.1.4.7.3 Management of immune deficiency patients requiring surgical

procedures

8.1.4.7.4 De George Syndrome (G)

8.1.4.7.5 Ghons complex, post primary pulmonary tuberculosis –

pathology and pathogenesis (M)

8.1.5 Oral Pathology

8.1.5.1 Developmental disturbances of oral and Para oral structures (M)

8.1.5.2 Regressive changes of teeth (M)

8.1.5.3 Bacterial, viral and mycotic infections of oral cavity (M)

8.1.5.4 Dental caries, diseases of pulp and per apical tissues (M)

8.1.5.5 Physical and chemical injuries of the oral cavity (M)

8.1.5.6 Oral manifestations of metabolic and endocrinal disturbances (M)

8.1.5.7 Diseases of jawbones and TMJ (M)

8.1.5.8 Disease of blood and blood forming organs in relation of oral cavity (D)

94

8.1.5.9 Cysts of the oral cavity (M)

8.1.5.10 Salivary gland diseases (M)

8.1.5.11 Role of laboratory investigations in oral surgery( M)

8.1.6. Microbiology

8.1.6.1 Immunity(M)

8.1.6.2Knowledge of organisms commonly associated with disease of oral

cavity (D)

8.1.6.3 Morphology cultural characteristics of streptococcus, staphylococcus,

pneumococcus, gonococcus, meningococcus, clostridium group of organisms,

spirochetes, organisms of TB, leprosy, diphtheria, actinomycosis and

moniliasis (G)

8.1.6.4 Hepatitis B and its prophylaxis, Culture and sensitivity test, Laboratory

determinations (M)

8.1.6.5 Blood groups and blood matching (M)

8.1.6.6 RBC and WBC count (M)

8.1.6.8 Smears and cultures (D)

8.1.6.9 Urine analysis and cultures (D)

8.1.7 Applied Pharmacology and Therapeutics

8.1.7.1 Definition of terminologies used (D)

8.1.7.2 Dosage and mode of administration drugs(M)

8.1.7.3 Action and fate of drugs in the body (M)

8.1.7.4 Drug addiction, tolerance and hypersensitive reactions (M)

8.1.7.5 Drugs acting on the CNS (M)

95

8.1.7.6 General and local anesthetics (M)

8.1.7.7 Hpnotics, analeptics, and tranquilizers (M)

8.1.7.8 Chemo therapeutics and antibiotics (M)

8.1.7.9 Analgesics and antipyretics (M)

8.1.7.10 Antitubercular and antisiphylitic drugs (M)

8.1.7.11 Antiseptics (M)

8.1.7.12 Sialogogues and antisialogogues (M)

8.1.7.13 Haematinics (M)

8.1.7.14 Antidiabetics (M)

8.1.7.15 Vitamins A, B-complex, vitamins C,D,E,K(D)

8.2 Paper-II: Minor Oral Surgery and Trauma

8.2.1 Principles of Surgery

8.2.1.1 Developing a surgical diagnosis (M)

8.2.1.2 Basic necessities for Surgery (M)

8.2.1.3 Aseptic technique (M)

8.2.1.4 Incisions, Flap Design Tissue handling (M)

8.2.1.5 Haemostasis (M)

8.2.1.6 Dead space management (M)

8.2.1.7 Decontamination and debridement (M)

8.2.1.8 Suturing (M)

8.2.1.9 Oedema control (M)

96

8.2.1.10 Patient general health and nutrition (M)

8.2.2 Medical Emergencies

8.2.2.1 Prevention and management of altered consciousness (syncope,

orthostatic hypotension, seizures, diabetes mellitus adrenal insufficiency (M)

8.2.2.2 Hypersensitivity reactions (M)

8.2.2.3 Chest discomfort and respiratory difficulty (M)

8.2.3 Examination and Diagnosis

8.2.3.1Clinical history (M)

8.2.3.2 Physical and radiographic (M)

8.2.3.3 Clinical and laboratory diagnosis (M)

8.2.3.4 Oral manifestations of systemic diseases (M)

8.2.3.5 Implications of systemic diseases in surgical patients (M)

8.2.4 Haemorrhage and Shock

8.2.4.1 Applied physiology (D)

8.2.4.2 Clinical abnormalities of coagulation, extra vascular hemorrhage, and

hemorrhagic lesions (M)

8.2.4.3 Management of secondary hemorrhage and shock(M)

8.2.5 Exodontia

8.2.5.1 Principles of extraction, indications and contraindications, types of

extraction, complication and their management (M)

8.2.5.2 Principles of elevators and elevators used in oral surgery(M)

8.2.6 Impaction

97

8.2.6.1Surgical anatomy (M)

8.2.6.2 Classification, indications and contraindications (M)

8.2.6.3 Diagnosis and radiographic interpretations (M)

8.2.6.4 Procedures, complications and their management (M)

8.2.7 Surgical Aids to Eruption of Teeth

8.2.7.1 Surgical exposure of unerupted teeth (M)

8.2.7.2 Surgical repositioning of partially erupted teeth (M)

8.2.8 Transplantation of Teeth (D)

8.2.9 Surgical Endodontics

8.2.9.1Indications and contraindications

8.2.9.2Diagnosis

8.2.9.3Pprocedures of periradicular surgery (M)

8.2.10 Procedures To Improve Alveolar soft tissues

8.1.10.1 Requirements and types (alveloplasty, tuberosity reduction, mylohyoid

ridge reduction, general reduction removal of exostosis vestibuloplasty)(M)

8.2.11 Procedures to Improve Alveolar soft tissues

8.2.11.1 Hhypermobile tissues - operative/ scleorsing method, epulis fissuratum

(M)

8.2.11.2 Frenectomy and frenotomy (M)

8.2.12 Infection of Head and Neck

8.2.12.1 Odontogenic and non Odontogenic infections (M)

8.2.12.2 Factors affecting spread of infection (M)

98

8.2.12.3 Diagnosis and differential diagnosis(M)

8.2.12.4 Management of facial space infections (M)

8.2.12.5 Ludwigs angina (M)

8.2.12.6 Cavernous sinus thrombosis (M)

8.2.12.7 Complication of space infection(M)

8.2.13 Chronic Infection

8.2.13.1 Osteomyelitis (types, etiology, pathogenesis, management) M)

8.2.13.2 Osteoradionecrosis (M)

8.2.14 Maxillary Sinus

8.2.14.1 Maxillary sinusitis – etiology, types, diagnosis, management and

complications(M)

8.2.14.2 Caldwell- luc operation (M)

8.2.14.3 Closure of oro antral fistula(M)

8.2.15 Cysts of the Orofacial region

8.2.15.1 Etiology, diagnosis , radiographic features and management of cystic lesions

(M)

8.2.15.2 Odontogenic cysts (M)

8.2.15.3 Non odontogenic cysts (M)

8.2.15.4 Cysts of the maxillofacial region (M)

8.2.15.5 Complications and management (M)

8.2.16 Neurological Disorders of the maxillofacial region

8.2.16.1 Diagnosis and management of trigeminal neuralgia (M)

99

8.2.16.2 MPDS (M)

8.2.16.2 Bell ’s palsy (M)

8.2.16.3 Frey’s syndrome (D)

8.2.16.4 Nerve injuries (D)

8.2.17 Implantology

8.2.17.1Definition, classification, indications and contraindications (D)

8.2.17.2 Advantages and disadvantages (D)

8.2.17.3 Surgical procedure (D)

8.2.17.4 Prosthesis considerations of implant procedure (D)

8.2.17.5 Prosthesis considerations in treatment planning (D)

8.2.17.6 Advance surgical possibility in implantoly(D)

8.2.17.7 Advanced surgical position in implantology(D)

8.2.18 Anesthesia

8.2.18.1 Local Anesthesia

8.2.18.1.1 Classification of local anesthetic drugs (

8.2.18.1.2 Modes of action indications and contra indications

8.2.18.1.3 Advantages and disadvantages

8.2.18.1.4 Techniques

8.2.18.1.5 Complications and their management

8.2.18.2 General Anesthesia

8.2.18.2.1 Classification

100

8.2.18.2.2 Stages of GA

8.2.18.2.3 Mechanism of action

8.2.18.2.3 Indications and contra indications

8.2.18.2.4 Advantages and disadvantages

8.2.18.2.5 Post anesthetic complications and emergencies

8.2.18.2.6 Anesthesia for dental procedures in children

8.2.18.2.7 Pre medication

8.2.18.2.8 Conscious sedation

8.2.18.2.9 Legal aspects for GA.

8.2.19 Dento-alveolar Trauma

8.2.20 Surgical Anatomy of head and Neck

8.2.21 Etiology of maxillofacial injuries

8.2.22 Basic Principles of Treatment of trauma

8.2.23 Primary Care

8.2.23.1 Resuscitation

8.2.23.2 Establishment of airway 8.2.23.3Management of hemorrhage

8.2.23.4 Management of head injuries and admission to hospital

8.2.24 Diagnosis – clinical and radiological

8.2.25 Soft Tissue Injury of Face and Scalp

8.2.25.1 Classification and management of soft tissue wounds

8.2.25.2 Injuries to structures requiring special treatment

101

8.2.26 Dento Alveolar Fractures

8.2.26.1 Examination and diagnosis

8.2.26.2 General principles of treatment

8.2.26.3 Complications and their management

8.2.27 Mandibular Fractures

8.2.27.1Classification, examination and diagnosis

8.2.27.2 General principles of treatment

8.2.27.3 Complications and their management.

8.2.28 Fracture of Zygomatic Complex

8.2.28.1 Classification, examination and diagnosis

8.2.28.2 General principles of treatment

8.2.28.3 Complications and their management

8.2.29 Orbital Fractures - blow out fractures 8.2.30Nasal Fractures 8.2.31Fractures of

Middle third of the Facial Skeleton

8.2.31.1 Emergency care

8.2.31.2 Fracture of maxilla, and treatment of le fort I, II, III

8.2.31.3 Fractures of Naso orbito ethmoidal region

8.2.32Ophthalmic Injuries

8.2.32.1 Minor injuries

8.2.32.2 Non-performing injuries and perforating injuries

8.2.32.3 Retro bulbar hemorrhage and traumatic optic neuropathy

102

8.2.33 Traumatic Injuries to Frontal sinus - Diagnosis, classification and treatment

8.2.34 Maxillofacial injuries in Geriatiric and pediatric Patients

8.2.35 Gunshot wounds and War Injuries

8.2.36 Osseointegration in maxillofacial Reconstruction

8.2.37 Metabolic response to Trauma

8.2.37.1 Neurological and endocrinal responses

8.2.37.2 Inflammatory mediators

8.2.37.3 Clinical implications

8.2.38 Healing of Traumatic injuries

8.2.38.1 Soft tissues, bone, cartilage

8.2.38.2 Response of peripheral nerve to injury

8.2.39 Nutritional Consideration following Trauma

8.2.40 Tracheotomy

8.2.40.1 Indications and contraindications

8.2.40.2 Procedure, complications and their management

8.3 PAPER-III: Maxillofacial surgery

8.3.1 Salivary gland

8.3.1.1 Sialography

8.3.1.2 Salivary fistula and management

8.3.1.3 Diseases of salivary gland – developmental disturbances, cysts, inflammation

and sialolithiasis,

103

mucocele and Ranula, 8.3.1.4Tumors of salivary gland – staging and their

management

8.3.1.5 Parotidectomy

8.3.2 Temporomandibular Joint

8.3.2.1 Etiology, history, signs, symptoms, examination and diagnosis of

Temporomandibular joint disorders

8.3.2.2 Ankylosis and management of the same with different treatment modalities

8.3.2.3 MPDS and management

8.3.2.4 Condylectomy – different procedures 8.3.2.5Various approaches to TMJ

8.3.2.6 Recurrent dislocations – Etiology and Management

8.3.3 Oncology

8.3.3.1 Biopsy

8.3.3.2 Management of pre-malignant tumors of head and neck region 8.3.3.3Benign

and Malignant tumors of Head and Neck region

8.3.3.4 Staging of oral cancer and tumor markers

8.3.3.4 Management of oral cancer 8.3.3.5Modes of spread of tumors 8.3.3.6Diagnosis

and management of tumors of nasal, paranasal, neck, tongue, cheek, maxilla and

mandible

8.3.3.7 Radiation therapy in maxillofacial regions Lateral neck swellings

8.3.4Orthognathic surgery

8.3.4.1 Diagnosis and treatment planning

8.3.4.2 Cephalometric analysis and Model surgery

8.3.4.3 Maxillary and mandibular repositioning procedures

104

8.3.4.4 Segmental osteotomies

8.3.4.5 Management of apertognathia

8.3.4.6 Genioplasty

8.3.4.7 Distraction osteogenesis

8.3.5Maxillofacial pathology 8.3.5.1Cysts and tumor of oro facial region

8.3.5.2 Odontogenic and non-Odontogenic tumors and their management

8.3.5.3 Giant lesions of jawbone

8.3.5.4 Fibro osseous lesions of jawbone

8.3.6 Laser surgery

8.3.6.1The application of laser technology in surgical treatment of lesions

8.3.6.2 Cryosurgery- Principles, applications in surgical management

8.3.7 Cleft lip and palate surgery

8.3.7.1 Detailed knowledge of the development of cleft lip and palate deformity

8.3.7.2 Knowledge of Nasal endoscopy and other diagnostic techniques in the

evaluation of speech and hearing

8.3.7.3 Concept of multidisciplinary team management.

8.3.8 Aesthetic facial surgery

8.3.8.1 Detailed knowledge of the structures of the face and neck including skin

8.3.8.2 Diagnosis and treatment planning of deformities and conditions affecting facial

skin, Underlying facial muscles, bone, Eyelids and external ear

8.3.8.3 Surgical management of post acne scarring

8.3.8.4 Facelift

105

8.3.8.5 Blepharoplasty

8.3.8.6 Otoplasty

8.3.8.7 Facial bone recontouring, etc.

8.3.8.8 Hair transplant

8.3.8.9 Botox & fillers

8.3.8.10 Dermabrasion

8.3.9 Craniofacial surgery

8.3.9.1 Basic knowledge of developmental anomalies of the face, head and neck

8.3.9.2 Basic concepts in the diagnosis and planning of various head and neck

anomalies including cleft lip and palate

8.3.9.3 Cranio synostosis, syndromes etc.

8.3.9.4 Current concept in the management of Craniofacial anomalies

8.3.10 Maxillofacial Implant

8.4 PAPER-IV: Essay

Any content from 8.1 to 8.3 can b included in the essay

9. ACADEMIC CLINICAL PROGRAME (APPLICABLE FOR ALL THREE YEARS):

Seminars to be presented twice in a week. All seminars to be attended by each student

. Each candidate has to give at least 5 seminars in a year . Total of 5 journal clubs to

be presented in 1 year by each student . Departmental discussions to be held once in

a week . Minimum 3 scientific presentation should be presented and must attend three

specialty level conferences in a period of three years. At least one scientific publication

Every candidate shall maintain a logbook to record his/hers work or participation in all

activities such as journal clubs, seminars, CDE programs etc. This work shall be

106

scrutinized and certified by the head of the department and presented to the university

every year.

Seminars

All seminars presented should be according to the EBES format .The student should be

able to critically justify his presentation on the latest evidence. At least two articles

should be quoted .Appropriate level of evidence should be quoted in the seminar.

Journal clubs

All the Journal clubs have to be presented in an EBM format. Articles have to be

critically appraised and then presented . The minutes of the meeting are maintained and

any changes in the existing protocols are implemented. the students are evaluated and

are given grades according to their performance. The article selection is also based

upon the evidence based pyramid and more of the systematic reviews and meta-

analysis are incorporated as a part of discussion whenever possible

Case Discussions

The cases are selected according to their relative importance and all the post graduate

students and interns are involved in the discussions. students are advised to present

their own views on treatment modalities depending upon current evidence whose pros

and cons are later discussed.

9.1 FIRST YEAR PROGRAMME

9.1.1 Dissection and basic sciences

9.1.2 Basic computer sciences

9.1.3 Exodontias

9.1.4 Seminars on basic topics

9.1.5 Selection of dissertation topic

107

9.1.6 Library assignment topic

9.1.7 Attending O.T. and ward rounds

9.1.8 Preparation of synopses and its submission within the six months after admission

to university as per calendar of events

9.1.9 Submission of library thesis at the end of the first year.

9.1.10 Pre – clinical exercises

9.1.10.1 Wiring techniques on cast models including direct interdental, essigs, ivy loops,

stouts, loop wiring, arch bar fixation and inter maxillary fixation

9.1.10.2 Suturing techniques on pillow models

9.1.10.3 Cephalometric tracing and model surgeries

9.1.10.4 Osteotomy techniques including le fort 1 and bilateral sagittal split osteotomies

on bone models

9.1.10.5 Dental implant placement in models and introduction to dentascan analysis.

9.1.10.6 Rotation and postings in other departments Casualty -1 months General

medicine -15 days General Surgery -15 days Ophthalmology -15 days Neurosurgery -

15 days ENT -15 days Radiology anaesthesia-15 days orthopedics-15 days implant

postings as per schedule decided by the university.

9.1.10.7 research methodology and evidence based practice.

9.2 SECOND YEAR PROGRAMME

9.2.1 Rotation and postings in other departments Onco surgery -2 months in second

half Examination of basic sciences – one paper of three hours duration to be

conducted by the college.

9.2.2 Minor oral surgery and higher surgical training

9.2.3 Periodic submission of progress report on dissertation

108

9.2.4 Examination on minor oral surgical procedures – one internal assessment will be

conducted.

9.2.5 two short research studies synopsis should be submitted and IEC approval should

be obtained

9.3 THIRD YEAR PROGRAMME

9.3.1 Maxillofacial surgery, submission of dissertation in the first term, i.e. six months

before the final examination to the university.

9.3.2 Submission of two short research studies three months before final exams.

9.3.3 Mock exam before the final examination to be conducted by the Department

following university protocol.

9.3.4 It is desirable to enter general surgical skills and operative procedure that are

observed, assisted or performed in the log book in the format as given by KMSDCH in

the revised ordinance governing MDS degree course.

(P - performed, PA – performed and assisted, O –operated, A – assisted)

SR

NO. Procedure Category Year

Numb

er

1. Injection I.M. and I.V. P I, II 50,

20

2. Minor suturing and removal

of sutures P I N.A.

3. Incision & drainage of an

abscess P i 10

4. Surgical extraction P I 15

109

5. Impacted teeth P, PA I, II 20,

10

6 Pr prosthetic surgery P

a. corrective procedures P I 15

b. ridge extension PA I, II 3

c. ridge reconstruction A II, III 3

7. OAF closure P, PA I, II 3,2

8 Cyst enucleation P,PA I, II 5,5

9 Mandibular fractures P, PA I, II 10,10

10 Peri-apical surgery P,PA I 5

11 Infection management P, PA I, II N,A

12 Biopsy procedures P I, II N,A

13 Removal of salivary calculi PA I, II 3,5

14 Benign tumors PA,A II, III 3,3

15 mid face fractures PA, A II,. III 3,5

16 Implants PA,A II, III 5,5

17 Tracheotomy PA,A II, III 2,2

18 Skin grafts PA III 3,5

19 Orthognathic Surgery PA,A II, III 3

20 Harvesting bone & cartilage

110

grafts

a) lliac crest PA III

b) Rib A III 3

c) Calvarial A III 2

d) Fibula A,O III 2

21. T.M. Joint Surgery PA,A II, I, 1

22 Jaw resections PA,A III, II 3,3

23 Onco surgery A,O IIII, III 3,3

24 Micro vascular anastomosis A,O III 5,10

25 Cleft lip & palate PA, A II, III 10,15

26 Distraction osteogenesis A,O II, III 2,3

27. Rhinoplasty A,.O III 3,5

28. Access osteotomies and

base of skull surgeries

A,O III 1,3

10. UNIVERSITY EXAMINATION SCHEME

10.1 Theory : 300 Marks written +100 marks viva voce

Written examination shall consist of four question papers each of three hours duration.

Total marks for each paper will be 75. Paper I, II, and III shall consist of two long

questions carrying 20 marks each and 5 short essay question each carrying 7 marks.

Paper IV will be on Essay of 75 marks. Questions on recent advances may be asked in

any or all the papers. Distribution of each paper will be as follows:

111

Paper I : Applied Basic Sciences – 75 marks. Applied Anatomy, Physiology,

Biochemistry, General and oral

Pathology and Microbiology and Pharmacology (topics from section 8.1 of course

content) Paper II : Minor Oral Surgery and Trauma – 75 marks (topics under

relevant areas from section 8.2) Paper III: Maxillofacial Surgery 75 marks (topics

under relevant areas from section 8. 2 and section 8.3) Paper IV: Essay 75 marks

(any topic from section 8.1 to section 8.3 can be included)

Note - The topics assigned to the different papers are generally evaluated under those

sections. However a strict division of the subject may not be possible and some

overlapping of topics is inevitable. Students should be prepared to answer overlapping

topics.

20 percent question will be asked depending upon evidence based Practice.

10.2. Practical / Clinical examination : 200 Marks

10.2.1 Minor Oral Surgery – 100 marks

Each candidate is required to perform the minor oral surgical procedures under local

anesthesia. The minor surgical cases may include removal of impacted lower third

molar, cyst enucleation, any similar procedure where students can exhibit their

professional skill in raising the flap, removing the bone and suturing the wound.

10.2.2 Case discussion – 100 marks

1. (a) One long case -60 marks

2. (b) Two short cases -20 marks each

10.3 Viva Voce: 100 marks: The Viva voce includes Viva and Pedagogy exercises

which shall be of 100 marks. The Viva-voce examination shall be aimed at assessing

depth of knowledge, logical reasoning, confidence and verbal communication skills.

112

10.3.1 Viva voce examination: 80 marks

As per the university rules

10.3.2 Pedagogy exercise: 20 marks

Pedagogy exercise is reviewed jointly by all 4 examiners. 20 Marks for Pedagogy

exercise shall be awarded individually by each examiner. A topic shall be allotted to

each candidate on the first day of the Practical/Clinical examination. He/she shall be

asked to make a presentation on the allotted topic for 8 minutes and 2 minutes for

discussion.

Articles related to pedagogy should be critically appraised before their presentation

11 BOOKS RECOMMENDED

SR AUTHOR TITLE

1. S.K. Bhattacharya Short cases in surgery 5th edi

2. S.Amil Samarnayake Infection control in dental practice

3. Peter bank's Killey's fracture of the mandible

4. Laskin Oral & Maxillofacial surgery, Vol – 2

5. Das A Concise Textbook of surgery

6. S.C Basu Handbook of surgery

7. Stanley F Malamed Medical Emergencies 5th Edi.

8. Neelima Anil malik Textbook of Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery

9. Kaban truolis Pediatric oral & Maxillofacial surgery

10. Fonseca Oral & Maxillofacial trauma Vol - 2 3rd Edi.

11. Fonseca Oral & Maxillofacial trauma Vol -1 3rd Edi.

113

12. Kapoor Oral & Maxillofacial surgery, 2nd Edi.

13. Linda R Bartolmuciboyd Dental Instruments

14. Seward harries mcgowan Killey's & Kay's outline of oral surgery part – one

15. Killey/seward/kay An outline of oral surgery part – two

16. Malamed Handbook of local anesthesia 5th Edi.

17. Malamed Medical Emergencies in the dental office 5th Edi.

18. U.Satyanarayana Biochemistry

19. Peterson,ellis,hupp,Tucker Contemporary oral & Maxillofacial surgery 4th Edi.

20. Fonseca Oral & Maxillofacial trauma Vol 3

21. Fonseca

Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery Vol 7,Reconstructive &

Emplant surgery

22. Fonseca

Oral & Maxillofacial surgery Vol 4 temporomandibular

Disorder

23. Fonseca Oral & Maxillofacial surgery Vol 5 Surgical pathology

24. Fonseca Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery Vol 2 Orthodontic surgery

25. Topazian,Goldbery hupp Oral & Maxillofacial infection 4th Edi.

26. Susan standring Gray's anatomy standring 39th Edi.

27. Das Textbook of surgical short case 2nd Edi.

28. T.N Patel A System of surgical diagnosis 2nd Edi.

29. Das A manual of clinical surgery 4th Edi.

30. P chakraborty A Textbook of microbiology 2nd Edi.

114

31.

Zard,Lekhoin,Alberktsson,

Tenebaum Aging,osteoporosis & dental Implantology

32. Rosen Aesthetic perspectives in jaw surgery

33. K.D.Tripathi Essentials of pharmacology for dentistry

34. Geoffrey I howe Minor oral surgery

35. Pramila Bajaj Anesthesia & analgesia in dentistry

36. Bennet

Monheim's local anesthesia & pain control in dental

practice 7th Edi.

37. Bank's

Killey's fracture of the middle third of the facial skelection

5th Edi.

38. David craig & meg Skelly Practical conscious sedation

39. S.ch.girod

Tumor suppressor genes & cell proliferation control in

the carcinogenesisof the oral cavity

40. Srinivasa Textbook of Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery

41. Willoam,b.liby,D.D.S, M.S Current advances in oral surgery Vol – 3

42. By Reynelce Essential of orthognathic surgery

43. Richard l Drake Gray's anatomy for students

44. Okeson,Jeffrey p Bell's orofacial pains

45. S.Das A manual of clinical surgery

46. ROBINSON PAUL TOOTH EXTRACTION

47. Guyton & Hall Textbook of Medical Physiology

48. Kurger Textbook of Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery

115

49.50. Fonseca Yogesh P Upadhya vol.6 Ward Procedures 4th Edi

116

BRANCH IV

CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY AND ENDODONTICS

Operative dentistry- is the art and science of the diagnosis, treatment, and prognosis of

defects of teeth that do not require full coverage restorations for correction. Such

treatment should result in the restoration of proper tooth form, function and esthetics

while maintaining the physiologic integrity of the teeth in harmonious relationship with

the adjacent hard and soft tissues, all of which should enhance the general health and

welfare of the patient.

Endodontics - is defined as that branch of dentistry concern with the morphology,

physiology and pathology of the human dental pulp and peri-radicular tissues. It is a

study and practice encompasses the basics and clinical science including biology of

normal pulp, etiology, diagnosis, prevention and treatment of disease and injuries of

pulp and associated peri-radicular tissues.

Aesthetic Dentistry- is defined as appreciative of, responsive to or zealous about the

beautiful having sense of beauty or fine culture.

1. OBJECTIVES:

The following objectives are laid out to achieve the goals of the course. These are

to be achieved by the time the candidate completes the course. The objectives may

be considered under the following subtitles

1.1 Knowledge:

1.1.1 Describe aetiology, pathophysiology, periapical diagnosis and

management of common restorative situations, endodontic situation that

will include contemporary management of dental caries, management of trauma

and pulpal patois including periodontal situations.

1.1.3 Demonstrate understanding of basic sciences as relevant to

conservative/restorative dentistry and endodontic.

1.1.4 Identify social economic environmental and emotional determinants in a

given case or community and take them into account for planning and

execution at individual community level.

1.1.5 Ability to master differential diagnosis and recognize that may require multi

disciplinary approach or clinical situation outside the realm of the specialty

which he or she should be able to recognize and refer to appropriate

specialist.

117

1.1.6 Update himself by self study and by attending basic and advanced

courses conferences seminars and workshops in the speciality of

conservative dentistry-endodontics-dental materials and restorartive

dentistry.

1.1.7 Ability to tech/guide, colleagues and other students.

1.1.8 Use information technology tools and carry out research both basic and

clinical with the aim of his publishing his work and presenting the same

at scientific platform.

1.1.9 Acquiring knowledge to evidence based decision making, appraising

evidence, implementing evidence based decision in clinical practice.

Course 4: Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics (Theory & Practical)

Outcomes: The student should be able to

Taking proper chair side history, examine the patient and perform medical and dental

diagnostic procedures and order as well as perform relevant tests and interpret to them.

To come to a reasonable diagnosis about the dental condition in general and

conservative dentistry-endodontics in particular and undertake complete patient

monitoring including pre-operative as well as post operative care of the patients.Perform

all levels of restorative work and surgical and non surgical endodontics including part of

multidisciplinary approach to clinical condition.Provide basic life support in emergency

situations. Manage acute pulpal and pulpo- periodontal situations.Knowledge of

infection control measures in the dental clinical environment and laboratories. After

completion of this course the students will come to know about the advanced

knowledge and skills required to learn the concept of generic drug and their

development, various regulatory filings in different countries, different phase of clinical

trials and submitting regulatory documents in filing process of IND, NDA and ANDA.

1.2 Skills:

1.2.1 Take proper chair side history, examine the patient and perform medical

and dental diagnostic procedures and order as well as perform relevant

tests and interpret to them. To come to a reasonable diagnosis about the

dental condition in general and conservative dentistry-endodontics in

particular and undertake complete patient monitoring including pre-

operative as well as post operative care of the patients.

118

1.2.2 Perform all levels of restorative work and surgical and non surgical

Endodontics including part of multidisciplinary approach to clinical

condition.

1.2.3 Provide basic life support in emergency situations.

1.2.4 Manage acute pulpal and pulpo- periodontal situations.

1.2.5 Have a thorough knowledge of infection control measures in the dental

clinical environment and laboratories.

1.2.6 Student should be able to identify clinical problem, acquired the most suitable

evidence and critically appraise the same along with application of result as per

patient’s need and preference.

1.3 Human Values Ethical practice and Communication Abilities.

1.3.1 Adopt, Ethical principals in all aspects of restorative and

contemporary endodontic including non surgical and surgical

Endodontic.

1.3.2 Professional honesty and integrity should be the top

priority.

1.3.3 Dental care has to be provided regardless of social status, caste,

creed or religion of the patient.

1.3.4 Develop communication skills in particular to explain various options

available management and to obtain true informed consent from the

patient.

1.3.5 He/She shall not carry out any heroic procedure and must know his

limitation in performing all aspects of restorative dentistry including

Endodontics ask for help from the colleagues or senior when required

without hesitation.

1.3.6 Respect patients Rights and Privileges including patient’s right to information.

1.3.7 Develop a communication skill in particular, to explain the treatment

options available in management and to involve the patient in evidence

based decision making.

EVIDANCE BASED TEACHING IN THOERY

EBES is routinely practiced in post graduate curriculum. Evidence based seminars,

clinical case discussions and interdisciplinary seminars are conducted by incorporation

119

of recent evidences as per the hierarchy of evidences. Formulation of clinical question

to critically appraise the evidence and decision making as per the principles of

evidence based journal clubs are practiced. Use of interactive learning objects, visual

aids, charts, graphs, animated videos, demonstration videos etc are routinely

incorporated in the presentations.

2. COURSE

PAPER-I: Applied Basic sciences: Applied anatomy, physiology, pathology

including oral microbiology, pharmacology, biostatistics and research

methodology and applied dental materials, Evidence based dentistry

PAPER-II: Conservative Dentistry

PAPER- III: Endodontics

PAPER-IV: Essay

2.1 PAPER I: APPLIED BASIC SCIENCES

2.1.1 APPLIED ANATOMY OF HEAD AND NECK

2.1.1.1 Development of face.

2.1.1.2 Paranasal sinuses and the associated

structures and their anomalies.

2.1.1.3 Cranial and facial bones.

2.1.1.4 TMJ anatomy and functions.

2.1.1.5 Arterial and venous drainage of head and neck.

2.1.1.6 Muscles of face and neck including muscles of mastication and

deglutition.

2.1.1.7 Brief consideration of structure and functions of brain.

2.1.1.8 Brief consideration of all cranial nerves and autonomic nervous

system of head and neck.

2.1.1.9 Salivary glands.

2.1.1.10 Functional anatomy of mastication, deglutition and speech.

2.1.1.11 Detailed anatomy of deciduous and permanent teeth.

120

2.1.1.12 General Consideration in physiology of permanent dentition,

form, function, alignment, contact, occlusion.

2.1.1.13 Internal anatomy of permanent teeth and its significance.

2.1.1.14 Histology of skin, Oral mucosa, Connective tissue, Bone,

cartilage, Blood vessels, Lymphatics, Nerves, Muscles and

Tongue.

2.1.2 Applied anatomy of dental and paradental structures:

2.1.2.1 Enamel-Development and composition. Physical

characteristics, Chemical properties & Structure

2.1.2.2 Age changes – enamel, dentin and pulp.

2.1.2.3 Dentin-Development, Physical and chemical properties, Structure

type of Dentin, Innervations, age & functional changes.

.

2.1.2.4 Pulp-Development, Histological structures, Innervations,

Functions, Regressive changes and Clinical considerations.

2.1.2.5 Cementum-Composition, Structure, Function, Cementogenesis

and Clinical considerations.

2.1.2.6 Periodontal ligament development, Structure, Function and

Clinical consideration.

2.1.2.7 Salivary glands-Structure, Function, Clinical considerations.

2.1.2.8 Eruption of teeth.

2.1.3 APPLIED PHYSIOLOGY

2.1.3.1 Digestive system- Mastication and Deglutition, Digestion&

assimilation, Fluid electrolyte balance.

2.1.3.2 Circulatory system- Blood composition, volume, function, Blood

groups, Haemostasis, Coagulation, Blood transfusion,

Circulation, Heart, Pulse, Blood pressure, Shock.

121

2.1.3.3 Respiratory system- Respiration, control, Anoxia, Hypoxia,

Asphyxia, and Artificial respiration.

2.1.3.4 Endocrine system

2.1.3.4.1 General principles of endocrine activity and

disorders.

2.1.3.4.2 Pituitary, Thyroid, Parathyroid and Adrenals including

pregnancy and lactation.

2.1.3.5 Physiology of saliva-Composition, Function

andClinical significance.

2.1.3.6 Clinical significance of vitamins, Diet and nutrition,

Balanced diet.

2.1.3.7 Physiology of pain.

2.1.3.7.1 Sympathetic and para sympathetic nervous system.

2.1.3.7.2 Pain pathway.

2.1.3.7.3 Physiology of pulpal pain.

2.1.3.7.2 Odontogenic and non odontogenic pain.

2.1.3.7.3 Pain disorders –typical and atypical.

2.1.3.8 Biochemistry such as Osmotic pressure, Electrolytic

dissociation, Oxidation, Reduction.

2.1.3.9 Carbohydrates, proteins, lipids, and their metabolism,

Nucleoproteins, nucleic acids and their metabolism.

2.1.3.10 Enzymes, Vitamins and minerals.

2.1.3.11 Metabolism of inorganic elements.

2.1.3.12 Detoxification in the body.

2.1.3.13 Anti metabolites.

2.1.3.14 Chemistry of blood lymph and urine.

2.1.4. PATHOLOGY:

122

2.1.4.1 Inflammation, Repair, Degeneration, Necrosis and Gangrene.

2.1.4.2 Circulatory disturbances- Ischemia, Hyperaemia, Oedema,

Thrombosis, Embolism, Infarction, Allergy, and hypersensitivity

reaction.

2.1.4.3 Neoplasms- Classifications of tumours, Characteristics of

benign and malignant Tumors, Spread of tumors.

2.1.4.4 Blood dyscrasias.

2.1.4.5 Developmental disturbances of oral and para-oral structures.

2.1.4.6 Dental caries, Regressive changes of teeth & Pulp, Periapical

pathology.

2.1.4.7 Pulp reaction to dental caries and dental procedures

2.1.4.8 Infections of the oral cavity-Bacterial, Viral and Mycotic.

2.1.5. MICROBIOLOGY:

2.1.5.1 Pathway of pulpal infection.

2.1.5.2 Oral flora and micro organism associated with endodontic

disease.

2.1.5.3 Pathogenesis.

2.1.5.4 Host defense.

2.1.5.5 Bacterial virulence factors.

2.1.5.6 Healing.

2.1.5.7 Theory of focal infection.

2.1.5.8 Microbes relevance to dentistry

2.1.5.8.1 Streptococcus

2.1.5.8.2 Staphylococci

2.1.5.8.3 Lactobacilli

2.1.5.8.4 Corny bacterium

123

2.1.5.8.5 Actinomycetes

2.1.5.8.6 Clostridium

2.1.5.8.7 Neisseria

2.1.5.8.8 Vibrio

2.1.5.8.9 Bacteroides

2.1.5.8.10 Fusobacteria

2.1.5.8.11 Spirochetes

2.1.5.8.12 Mycobacterium

2.1.5.8.13 Virus and Fungi.

2.1.5.9 Cross infection, Infection control, Infection control procedure,

Sterilization and disinfection.

2.1.5.10 Immunology – Antigen antibody reactions, Allergy,

Hypersensitivity and anaphylaxis, Auto immunity, Grafts, Viral

hepatitis, HIV infections and AIDS.

2.1.5.11 Identification and isolation of microorganisms from infected root

canals.

2.1.5.12 Culture medium and culturing technique (Aerobic and anaerobic

interpretation and antibiotics, sensitivity test).

2.1.6. PHARMACOLOGY

2.1.6.1. Dosage and route of administration of the drugs

2.1.6.2 Action and fate of drug in body

2.1.6.3. Drug addiction

2.1.6.4. Tolerance of hypersensitivity reactions.

2.1.6.5. Local anaesthesia

2.1.6.5.1 Agents and chemistry

2.1.6.5.2 Pharmacological actions

124

2.1.6.5.3 Fate and metabolism of anaesthetic

2.1.6.5.4 Ideal properties

2.1.6.5.5 Technique and complications

2.1.6.6. General anaesthesia

2.1.6.6.1 Pre medications

2.1.6.6.2 Neuro muscular blocking agents

2.1.6.6.3 Induction agents

2.1.6.6.4 Inhalation anaesthesia and agents used

2.1.6.6.5 Assessment of anaesthetic problems in medically

compromised patients.

2.1.6.7 Anaesthetic Emergencies.

2.1.6.8 Antihistamines

2.1.6.9 Corticosteroids

2.1.6.10 Chemotherapeutic and antibiotics

2.1.6.11 Drug resistance

2.1.6.12 Haemostasis and haemostatic agents

2.1.6.13 Anticoagulants

2.1.6.14 Sympathomimitic drugs

2.1.6.15 Vitamins and minerals (A, B, C, D, E, K, IRON)

2.1.6.16 anti sialogogue

2.1.6.17 Immunosuppressant’s

2.1.6.18 Drug interactions

2.1.6.19 Antiseptics

2.1.6.20 Disinfectants

2.1.6.21 Anti viral agents

125

2.1.6.22 Drugs acting on CNS.

2.1.7. BIOSTATISTICS:

2.1.7.1 Introduction

2.1.7.2 Basic concepts

2.1.7.3 Sampling

2.1.7.4 Health information system

2.1.7.4.1 Collection

2.1.7.4.2 Compilation

2.1.7.4.3 Presentation of data.

2.1.7.5 Elementary statistical methods

2.1.7.5.1 Presentation of statistical data

2.1.7.5.2 Statistical averages

2.1.7.5.2.1 Measures of central tendency

2.1.7.5.2.2 Measure of dispersion

2.1.7.5.2.3 Normal distribution

2.1.7.6 Tests of significance

2.1.7.6.1 Parametric and non – parametric tests

2.1.7.6.1.1 Fisher extract test

2.1.7.6.1.2 Sign test

2.1.7.6.1.3 Median test

2.1.7.6.1.4 Mann Whitney test

2.1.7.6.1.5 KrusKal Wallis one way analysis

2.1.7.6.1.6 Friedman two way analysis

2.1.7.6.1.7 Regression analysis.

2.1.7.7 Correlation and regression

126

2.1.7.8 Use of computers.

2.1.9. APPLIED DENTAL MATERIALS:

2.1.9.1 Physical and mechanical properties of dental materials

2.1.8. RESEARCH METHODOLOGY:

2.1.8.1 Essential features of a protocol for research in humans.

2.1.8.2 Experimental and non-experimental study designs

2.1.8.3 Ethical consideration of research.

2.1.9.2 Biocompatibility.

2.1.9.3 Impression materials.

2.1.9.4 Detailed study of various restorative materials.

2.1.9.5 Restorative resins and recent advances in composite resins.

2.1.9.6 Bonding& recent developments.

2.1.9.7 Tarnish and corrosion

2.1.9.8 Dental amalgam

2.1.9.9 Direct filling gold,

2.1.9.10 Casting alloys,

2.1.9.11 Inlay wax,

2.1.9.12 Die materials,

2.1.9.13 Investments,

2.1.9.14 Casting procedures,

2.1.9.15 Casting defects

2.1.9.16 Dental cements for restoration and pulp protection (luting, liners,

bases)

2.1.9.17 Cavity varnishes.

127

2.1.9.18 Dental ceramics-recent advances,

2.1.9.19 Finishing and polishing materials,

2.1.9.20 Porcelain fused to metal,

2.1.9.21 Ceramic furnace,

2.1.9.22 Firing procedures.

2.1.9.23 Dental burs,

2.1.9.23.1 Design and mechanics of cutting

2.1.9.24 Methods of testing biocompatibility of materials used.

2.1.10 EVIDENCE BASED CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY

2.1.10.1 Introduction to evidence-based decision making

2.1.10.2 Assessing Evidence

2.1.10.3 Implementing Evidence- Based Decision in Clinical Practice

2.2 PAPER II: CONSERVATIVE & ESTHETIC DENTISTRY

2.2.1 CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY

2.2.1.1 Examination, diagnosis and treatment plan.

2.2.1.2 Occlusion as related to conservative dentistry,

2.2.1.2.1 Contact & contour, its significance.

2.2.1.2.2 Separation of teeth,

2.2.1.2.3 Matrices used in conservative dentistry.

2.2.1.3 Dental caries- epidemiology,

2.2.1.3.1 Recent concept of etiological factors,

2.2.1.3.2 Pathophysiology,

128

2.2.1.3.3 Histopathology,

2.2.1.3.4 Diagnosis,

2.2.1.3.5 Caries activity tests,

2.1.1.3.6 Prevention on dental caries and management –recent methods.

2.2.1.4 Hand and rotary cutting instruments,

2.2.1.4.1Development of rotary equipments,

2.2.1.4.2 Speed ranges,

2.2.1.4.3 Hazards.

2.2.1.5 Dental burs and other modalities of tooth reparation- recent developments

(air abrasions, lasers etc)

2.2.1.6 Infection control procedure in conservative dentistry,

2.2.1.7 Isolation equipments etc.

2.2.1.8 Direct concepts in tooth preparation

2.2.1.8.1 Amalgam,

2.2.1.8.2 Composite,

2.2.1.8.3 GIC

2.2.1.9 Restorative techniques, failures and management.

2.2.1.10 Infection control procedure in conservative dentistry,

2.2.1.11 Isolation equipment etc.

2.2.1.12 Recent developments [air abrasions, lasers etc.]

2.2.1.13 Direct and indirect composite restorations.

2.2.1.14 indirect tooth coloured restoration

2.2.1.14.1 Ceramics,

2.2.1.14.2 Inlays & onlays

2.2.1.14.3 Veneers,

129

2.2.1.14.4 Crowns.

2.2.1.15 Recent advances in fabrication & materials.

2.2.1.16 Impression procedures used in indirect restorations.

2.2.1.17 Cast metal restorations

2.2.1.17.1 Indications.

2.2.1.17.2 Contraindications,

2.2.1.17.3 Tooth preparation for class II inlay,

2.2.1.17.4 Onlays,

2.2.1.17.5 Full crown restorations.

2.2.1.17.6 Restorative techniques – direct & indirect methods of fabrication

2.2.1.17.7 Materials used for fabrication like inlay wax,

2.2.1.17.8 Investment materials.

2.2.1.18 Direct gold restorations.

2.2.1.19 Recent advances in restorative materials & procedures.

2.2.1.20 Management of non carious lesions.

2.2.1.21 Advance knowledge of minimal intervention dentistry.

2.2.1.22 Recent advances in restoration of endodontically treated teeth & grossly

mutilated teeth.

2.2.1.23 Hypersensitivity – theories, causes & management.

2.2.1.24 Lasers in conservative dentistry.

2.2.1.25 CAD-CAM & CAD-CIM in dentistry

2.2.1.26 Dental imaging & its application in restorative dentistry. [clinical

photography]

2.2.2 AESTHETIC DENTISTRY

2.2.2.1 Colour,

130

2.2.2.2 Facial analysis

2.2.2.3 Smile design.

2.2.2.4 Principles of aesthetic integration.

2.2.2.5 Treatment planning in aesthetic dentistry

2.2.2.6 Evolution of tooth restoration from an Aesthetic dentistry

2.2.2.7 Basic principles of Aesthetic dentistry

2.2.2.8 Various Aesthetics restoration and its application

2.2.2.9 Protocols for predictable Aesthetics Dental Restoration

2.2.2.10 Various important factors to be considered in Smile Designing.

2.2.2.11 Aesthetic qualities of various restorative materials.

2.2.2.12 Composite inlay procedures and techniques.

2.2.2.13Correlation of facial features with the dentition and aesthetic restorative

procedures.

2.2.2.14 Role of CAD/CAM in Aesthetic Dentistry.

2.2.2.15 Future of Aesthetic Dentistry.

2.3 PAPER III: ENDODONTICS

2.3.1 Rationale of endodontics.

2.3.2 Knowledge of internal anatomy of permanent teeth,

2.3.3 Anatomy of root apex and its implications in endodontic treatment.

2.3.4 Dentin and pulp complex.

2.3.5 Pulp and Periapical pathology.

2.3.6 Pathology of periapex.

2.3.7 Diagnosis procedure – recent advances and various aids used for diagnosis.

2.3.8 Orofacial dental pain emergencies: endodontic diagnosis and management.

131

2.3.9 Case selection and treatment planning.

2.3.10 Infection control procedure used in Endodontics (aseptic technique such as

rubber dam, sterilization of instruments etc).

2.3.11 Access cavity preparation – objectives and principles.

2.3.12 Endodontic instruments and instrumentation – recent development, detailed

description of hand, rotary, sonic, ultra sonic, etc.

2.3.13 Working length determination

2.3.14 Cleaning and shaping of root canal system

2.3.15 Recent development in techniques of canal preparation.

2.3.16 Root canal irrigation

2.3.17 Intra canal medicaments used including non-surgical Endodontics by calcium

hydroxide.

2.3.18 Endodontic microbiology.

2.3.19 Local anaesthesia in Endodontics.

2.3.20 Endodontic radiology- digital technology in Endodontics practice.

2.3.21 Obturating materials,

2.3.22 Various obturating techniques

2.3.23 Recent advances in Obturation of root canal.

2.3.24 Traumatic injuries and management.

2.3.25 Endodontic treatment for young permanent teeth,

2.3.26 Paediatric endodontic treatment of immature apex.

2.3.27 Endodontic surgeries.

2.3.28 Endodontics Implants-biology of bone and wound healing.

2.3.29 Endo-perio interrelationship.

2.3.30 Drugs and chemicals used in Endodontics.

2.3.31 Endodontic emergencies and management.

132

2.3.32 Restoration of endodontically treated teeth,

2.3.33 Recent advances in techniques of restoration of endodontically treated teeth.

2.3.34 Geriatric Endodontic.

2.3.35 Biology response of pulp to various restorative materials and operative

procedures.

2.3.36 Multidisciplinary approach to Endodontics and their management.

2.3.37 Success and failures in Endodontics and Re treatment procedures.

2.3.38 Endoscope in Endodontics.

2.3.39 Resorption_ External and internal resorption and their management.

2.3.40 Microscope in Endodontics.

2.3.41 Single visit Endodontics-Current concepts and controversies.

2.3.42 Endodontics Flare ups.

2.4 PAPER IV ESSAYS:

Any contents from 2.1 to 2.3 can be included in essay

EVIDENCE BASED TEACHING IN PRACTICAL

In practical, discussions of different variety of cases are done with problem based

learning by class meeting task structure. Two research projects other than dissertation

are incorporated in the PG curriculum. Continous Dental Education programmes and

work shops are conducted by the department to upgrade knowledge of students.

3. Clinical Quota for MDS

3.1 First Year MDS

3.1.1 PRECLINICAL WORK EXERCISES

133

3.1.1.1 Wax carving: All 32 permanent teeth.

3.1.1.2 sectioning of all permanent teeth &deciduous molars (Second upper molar &

second lower molar).

3.1.1.3 Class II Amalgam cavities.

TYPE CONSERVATIVE CONVENTIONAL

TYPHODONT 3 3

EXTRACTED TEETH 2 2

3.1.1.4 Inlay Cavities (MO, MOD, DO)

TYPE CAVITY

PREPRATION

WAX PATTERN CASTING

TYPHODONT 10 6 4

EXTRACTED

TEETH

8 2 2

3.1.1.5 Onlay cavity

TYPE CAVITY PREPRATION CASTING

TYPHODONT 2 1

EXTRACTED TEETH 3 1

134

3.1.1.6 Full Crown Preparation

TYPE ANTERIOR

CROWN CUTTING

POSTERIOR

CROWN CUTTING

CASTING

TYPHODONT 5 5 2-2

EXTRACTED

TEETH

6 4 3-2

3.1.1.7 7/8TH Crown Preparation

TYPE CROWN CUTTING CASTING

TYPHODONT 2 1

3.1.1.8 3/4TH Crown Preparation

TYPE CROWN CUTTING CASTING

TYPHODONT 2 On Premolar 1

3.1.1.9 Pin Retained Amalgam Restoration

Extracted teeth 2 cavities

3.1.1.10 Post and Core Built up

On Extracted teeth

10 Anterior

5 Posterior

3.1.1.11 Veneer Preparation

On Extracted teeth

2 Anterior by Indirect Method

135

3.1.1.12 Composite Inlay

On Extracted teeth

3 Class II Preparation

1 Casting

3.1.1.13 Access Cavity Preparation

TYPE MAXILLARY

TEETH

MANDIBULAR

TEETH

OBTURATION

CONVENTIONAL 1

1

1

1

1

1

3 STEP BACK

CROWN DOWN

PREMOLAR 3 3 1-1

MOLAR 2 -1ST MOLAR ,

1-2ND MOLAR

2-1ST MOLAR,

1-2ND MOLAR

1-1

3.1.1.14 Removable Dies 4 Nos.

3.1.1.15 Incisions used for periapical surgery like triangular, trapezoid,

rectangular,semilunar etc

3.1.1.16 Sutures like intermittent,figure 8,horizontal mattress,sling sutures etc.

Note: technical work to be completed in 1st four months.

Minimum Requirement of Academic & Clinical Work to be carried out by the Postgraduate

(MDS) Student of Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics in Each Year:

Sr. No.

Particulars FIRST YEAR

SECOND YEAR

THIRD YEAR

136

1. Seminar 05 05 05

2. Case Presentation 02 05 05

3. Journal Article Presentation 05 05 05

4. Research Project / Study 01 01 00

5. Pedagogy 05 05 05

6. Library Dissertation 01 - -

7. Composite restorations 30 05 -

8. GIC 30 - -

9. Complex amalgam restorations 05 - -

10. Composite inlay/veneers (direct/indirect)

05 - -

11. Post and core anterior 05 10 10

12. Post and core posterior - 05 10

13. Bleaching (Vital/Nonvital) 05 - -

14. RCT Anterior 20 20 -

15. Posterior RCT - 30 50

16. Endodontic surgery 05 (Assisted)

05 (performed independently)

05 (performed independently)

17. Ceramic jacket crowns - 10 -

18. Full crown posterior - 15 -

19. Cast gold inlays /onlay - 05 10

20. Special work like splinting, reattachment,crown lengthening, bicuspidization, reimplantation etc.

- 05 10

21. Endo-perio lesions - 05 -

22. Poster presentation 01 - -

23. Other Conferences/ Symposium/ Update (Optional)

01 01 01

137

4.SCHEME OF EXAMINATION

4.1 THEORY PAPER -300 MARKS

PAPER- I: APPLIED BASIC SCIENCES;

Applied Anatomy Of Head And Neck, Applied anatomy of dental and

paradental structures, Applied physiology, Pathology, Microbiology,

pharmacology, Biostatistics, Research methodology, Applied Dental

materials , Evidence based Dentistry -75

marks

PAPER II : CONSERVATIVE AND ESTHETIC DENTISTRY -75 marks

PAPER III: ENDODONTICS -75 marks

PAPER IV: ESSAY 75 marks

4.2 Clinical /practical Exercise

200 marks

DAY 1

Exercise 1: Inlay 50 marks

- Tooth preparation-for class II gold inlay 25 marks

- Direct impression – 25 marks

Exercise 2 :Post and Core- 50 marks

- Post space preparation - 10 marks

- Direct wax pattern- 10 marks

24. Paper Presentation in national PG conferences/convention

- 01 01

25. Article Publication in National / International Journal

- 01 01

26. UG TEACHING 01 01 01

138

- Casting - 10 marks

- Cementation - 10 marks

- Retraction and Elastomeric impression -10 marks;

DAY 2

Exercise 3: Molar Endodontics – 100 marks

- Local anaesthesia and rubber dam application – 20 marks

- Access Cavity preparation- 20 marks

- Working length determination- 20 marks

- Biomechanical Preparation 20 marks

Master cone selection- 20 marks

4.3 Viva- voce & pedagogy 100 marks

4.3.1 Viva-Voce Examination: 80 marks

As per the university rules

4.3.2 Evidence based Pedagogy exercise: 20 marks

Topic to be given to each candidate in the beginning of clinical examination. He/ she is

asked to make a presentation on the topic for 8 to 10 minutes.

DAY 3

Continued if more than 4 students are undergoing examination or due to shortage of

time on second day.

LIST OF BOOKS RECOMMENDED

SR.NO TITLE AUTHOR EDITION

DENTAL MATERIALS

1 Text book of dental materials science Phillips 11 Edition

2 Text book of dental materials Hattrik

139

3 Restorative dental materials Craig

4 Dental materials Craig 8 Edition

Grahm mount

5 Atlas of glass ionomer cement

OPERATIVE DENTISTRY

1 Art & science of op.dentistry Clifford sturdvent 5th edition

2 Textbook of operative dentistry Charbenau 3rd edition

3 Textbook of operative dentistry Marzouk

4 Textbook of operative dentistry macghee

5 Textbook of operative dentistry Gillmore 4th edition

6 Textbook of operative dentistry Vimal sikri 2nd edition

7 Mannual of opereative dentistry Kidd Smith

8 Pickard's mannual of opratve dentistry Kidd Smith

9 Fundamentals of operative dentistry James Summit 3rd edition

10 Tooth coloured restorative techniques Harry Albers 9th edition

ENDODONTICS

1 Pathways of pulp Cohen 9th

2 Endodontics Gulabiwala/stock 9th

3 color atlas of endo

4 Problem solving in endodontics Guttmann

5 surgical Endodontics Guttmann

6 why root canal therapy Burns

7 The dental pulp seltzer

8 Endodontic therapy Franklin weine

140

9 Endodontics Ingle 6th

BASIC SCLENCES

1 Human Anatomy vol 1 Chaurasia

2 Human Anatomy vol 2 Chaurasia

3 Human Anatomy vol 3 Chaurasiy

4 Human Physiology Guyton

5 Human physiology Datta

6 Pharmacology Tripathi

7 Oral pathology Shafer

8 Dental Anatomy Wheelers

9 Oral Histology Orbans

10 General Medicine Davidson

11 General Surgery Das

12 Human Embryology Inderbersingh

13 Microbiology Ananthnarayan

OTHERS

1 The science of porcelain laminate veneers Gureel

2 Contemporary esthetic dentistry Bruice cripson

3 Fibre reinforced composites

4 Complete dental bleaching Goldstein

5 Dental instruments pocket guide

Branch – V

ORTHODONTICS & DENTOFACIAL ORTHOPEDICS

Objectives:

141

The training programme in Orthodontics is to structure and achieve the following

four objectives.

Course 5: Orthodontics and Dentofacial Orthopedics

Outcomes: The student should be able to:

Obtain proper clinical history, methodical examination of the patient, perform essential

diagnostic procedures, and interpret them and arrive at reasonable diagnosis about the

dentofacial deformities. Competent to fabricate and manage the most appropriate

appliance – intra or extra oral, removable or fixed, mechanical or functional, and active

or passive – for the treatment of any orthodontic problem to be treated singly or as a

part of multidisciplinary treatment of oro-facial deformities.After completion of this

course the students will come to know about the advanced techniques to the analyze

the Pharmacopoeial compound and their formulations by UV-Visible spectrophotometer,

simultaneous estimation of multi component formulation, quantitative experiments

based on HPLC, GC, fluorimetry and flame photometry. The students also learn about

the various practical aspects of formulation and estimation of CR/SR formulation,

sustained release matrix tablets, osmotically controlled DDS, Floating DDS,

Mucoadhesive tablets, transdermal patches and all the parameters affecting the

formulation of tablets like; compressional force, particle size, effect of binders etc.

Knowledge of:

1. Evidence-based decision making. 2. The dynamic interaction of biological processes and mechanical forces acting on

the stomatognathic system during orthodontic treatment.

3. The etiology, pathophysiology, diagnosis and treatment planning of various

common orthodontic problems.

4. Various treatment modalities in preventive, interceptive and corrective

Orthodontics.

5. Basic sciences relevant to the practice of Orthodontics.

142

6. Interaction of social, cultural economic, genetic and environmental factors and

their relevance to management of oro – facial deformities.

7. Factors affecting the long-range stability of orthodontic correction and their

management.

8. Personal hygiene and infection control, prevention of cross infection and safe

disposal of hospital waste, keeping in view the high prevalence of Hepatitis B,

HIV and other highly contagious diseases.

Skills:

• To obtain proper clinical history, methodical examination of the patient, perform

essential diagnostic procedures, and interpret them and arrive at resonable

diagnosis about the Dentofacial deformaties.

• To identify clinical problem and acquire most suitable evidence for critical

appraisal of the literature to formulate appropriate evidence based treatment

protocol..

• To be competent to fabricate and manage the most appropriate appliance – intra

or extra oral, removable or fixed, mechanical or functional, and active or passive

– for the treatment of any orthodontic problem to be treated singly or as a part of

multidisciplinary treatment of orofacial deformities as per the patient’s need and

preference.

Attitudes:

1. Develop an attitude to adopt ethical principles in all aspects of Orthodontic

practice.

2. Professional honesty and integrity are to be fostered.

3. Treatment care is to be delivered irrespective of the social Status, cast, creed or

colleagues.

4. Willingness to share the knowledge and clinical experience with professional

colleagues.

143

5. Willingness to adopt, after a critical assessment, new methods and techniques of

orthodontic management developed from time to time based on scientific

research, which are in the best interest of the patient.

6. Respect patient’s rights and privileges, including patient’s right to information and

right to seek a second opinion.

7. Develop attitude to seek opinion from allied medical and dental specialists as

and when required.

Communication skills:

Develop communication skills, in particular, to explain treatment option available in

management and to make patient partner in evidence based decision making to

manage a particular dentofacial problem and to obtain a true informed consent from

them for the most appropriate treatment available at that point of time.

Develop the ability to communicate with the professional colleagues, in orthodontics or

other specialities through various media like correspondence, Internet, e-video,

conference etc. to render the best possible treatment.

Course Content:

The program outlined, addresses both the knowledge needed in orthodontics and allied

Medical specialities in its scope. A minimum of three years of formal training through a

graded system of education as specialities, will equip the trainee with skill and

knowledge at its completion to be able to practise basic orthodontics and have the

ability to intelligently pursue further apprenticeship towards advanced orthodontics.

Spread of the Curriculum:

Six months learning of basic subjects and completion of pre – clinical exercises. Two

and a half years of coverage of all the relevant topics in Orthodontics, clinical training

involving treatment of patients and submission of dissertation.

BASIC SUBJECTS

1. Applied Anatomy

144

1.1 Prenatal growth of head

1.1.1 Stages of embryonic development

1.1.2. Origin of head

1.1.3. Origin of face

1.1.4. Origin of teeth

1.2 Postnantal growth of head :

1.2.1. Bones of skull

1.2.2. The oral cavity

1.2.3. Development of chin

1.2.4. The hyoid bone

1.2.5. General growth of head

1.2.6. Face growth.

1.3 Bone growth

1.3.1 Origin of bone

1.3.2 Composition of bone

1.3.3 Units of bone structure

1.3.4 Schedule of Ossification

1.3.5. Mechanichal properties of bone

1.3.6. Oentgeno graphic apperance of bone.

1.4 Assessment of growth and development :

1.4.1. Growth prediction

1.4.2. Growth spurts

1.4.3. The concept of normality and growth increments of growth

1.4.4. Differential growth

1.4.5. Gradient of growth

1.4.6. Methods of gathering growth data

145

1.4.7. Theories of growth and recent advances

1.4.8. Factors affecting physical growth.

1.5. Muscles of mastication:

1.5.1. Development of muscles

1.5.2. Muscle change during growth

1.5.3. Muscle function and facial development

1.5.4. Muscle function and malocclusion.

1.6. Development of dentition and occlusion:

1.6.1. Dental development periods

1.6.2. Order of tooth eruption

1.6.3. Chronology of permanent tooth formation

1.6.4. Periods of occlusal development

1.6.5. Pattern of occlusion.

1.7 Assessment of skeletal age

1.7.1. The carpal bones X – rays and carpal index

1.7.2. Cervical vertebrae in cephalogram and CVMS index

1.7.3. Maturation status of developing permanent teeth and CCS

Index

2. Applied Physiology

2.1 Endocrinology and it disorders

2.1.1. Pituitary gland hormones,

2.2.2. Thyroid gland hormones,

2.2.3. Parathyroid gland hormones

2.2 Calcium and its metabolism

2.3 Nutrition-metabolism and their disorders

146

2.3.1. Proteins

2.3.2. Carbohydrates

2.3.3. Fats

2.3.4. Vitamins

2.3.5. Minerals

2.4 Muscle physiology

2.5 Craniofacial Biology

2.5.1. Cell adhesion molecules and mechanism of adhesion

2.6 Bleeding disorders in orthodontics

2.6.1. Hemophilia

3. Dental materials :

3.1. Gypsum products

3.1.1. Dental plaster

3.1.2. Dental stone and their proprties, setting reaction etc.

3.2. Impression materials

3.2.1. Impression materials in general and particularly of alginate

impression material.

3.3. Acrylics

3.3.1. Chemistry, composition physical properties.

3.4. Composites

3.4.1. Composition, types properties, setting reaction

147

3.5. Banding and bonding cements

3.5.1. Zn (PO4)2, zinc silicophosphate

3.5.2. Zinc polycarboxylate

3.5.3. resin cements

3.5.4.glass lonomer cements

3.6 Wrought metal alloys

3.6.1. Deformation, strain hardening

3.6.2. Annealing recovery

3.6.3. Recrystallization

3.6.4. Grain growth properties of metal alloys.

3.7 Elastics

3.7.1. Latex and non-latex elastics.

3.8. Applied physics, Bioengineering and metallurgy.

3.8.1. Specification and tests methods used for materials used in

Orthodontics

3.8.2. Survey of all contemporary literature

3.8.3. Recent advances in above – mentioned materials.

4. Genetics :

4.1. Cell structure, DNA, RNA, protein synthesis, cell division

4.2. Chromosomal abnormalities.

4.3. Principles of orofacial genetics

4.4. Genetics in malocclusion

4.5. Molecular basis of genetics.

4.6. Studies related to malocclusion

4.7. Recent advances in genetics related to malocclusion

4.8. Genetic counselling

4.9. Bioethics and relationship to Orthodontic management of patients.

148

5. Physical Anthropology:

5.1. Evolutionary development of dentition

5.2. Evolutionary development of jaws.

6. Pathology :

6.1. Inflamation

6.2. Necrosis

7. Biostastics:

7.1. Stastical principles

7.2. Data Collection

7.3. Method of Summarizing

7.4. Methods of analysis – different tests – errors

7.5. Sampling and Sampling technique

7.8. Experimental models, design and interpretation.

7.7. Development of skills for preparing clear concise and cognent scientific

abstracts and publication.

8. Applied research methodology in Orthodontics

8.1. Experimental design

8.2. Animal experimental protocol

8.3. Principles in the development, execution and interpretation of methodologies in

Orthodontics

8.4. Critical Scientific appraisal of literature.

ORTHODONTICS PROPER

9. Orthodontic history :

9.1 Historical perspective,

9.2 Evolution of orthodontic appliances,

9.3 Pencil sketch history of Orthodontic peers.

9.4 History of Orthodontics in India.

149

10. Concepts of occlusion and esthetics:

10.1 Structure and function of all anatomic components of occlusion,

10.2 Mechanics of articulation,

10.3 Recording of masticatory function,

10.4 Diagnosis of Occlusal dysfunction

10.5 Relationship of TMJ anatomy and pathology and related neuromuscular

physiology.

11. Etiology and Classification of malocclusion:

11.1 A comprehensive review of the local and systemic factors in the causation

of malocclusion

11.2 Various classifications of malocclusion

12. Dentofacial Anomalies :

12.1 Anatomical

12.2. Physiological and Pathological development defects of the orofacial

structures.and the characteristics of major groups.

13. Child and Adult Psychology:

13.1 Stages of child development

13.2 Theories of psychological development

13.3 Management of child in orthodontic treatment.

13.4 Management of handicapped child.

13.5 Motivation and Psychological problems related to malocclusion / orthodontics

13.6 Adolescent psychology

13.7 Behavioral psychology and communication

14. Diagnostic procedures and treatment planning in orthodontics

14.1 Emphasis on the process of data gathering, synthesis and translating it into a

treatment plan.

14.2 Problem cases – analysis of cases and its management.

150

14.3 Adult cases

14.4 Handicapped and mentally retarded cases and their special problems

14.5 Critique of treated cases.

15. Cephalometrics

15.1 Instrumentation

15.2 Image processing

15.3 Tracing and analysis of errors and applications

15.4 Radiation hazards

15.5 Advanced Cephalometrics techniques.

15.6 Comprehensive review of literature.

15.7 Video imaging principles and application.

16. Practice management in Orthodontics

16.1 Economics and dynamics of solo and group practices

16.2 Personal management

16.3 Materials management

16.4 Public relations

16.5 Professional relationship

16.6 Dental ethics and jurisprudence

16.7 Office sterilization procedures

16.8 Community based Orthodontics

17. Clinical Orthodontics

17.1 Myofunctional Orthodontics :

17.1.1 Basic principles

17.1.2 Contemporary appliances – their design and manipulation

17.1.3 Case selection and evaluation of the treatment results.

17.1.4 Review of the current literature

17.2 Dentofacial Orthopedics

17.2.1 Principles

17.2.2 Biomechanics

151

17.2.3 Appliance design and manipulation

17.2.4 Case selection and evaluation of the treatment results.

17.2.5 Review of the current literature.

17.3 Cleft lip and palate rehabilitation

17.3.1 Diagnosis and treatment planning

17.3.2 Mechanotherapy

17.3.3 Special growth problems of cleft cases

17.3.4 Speech physiology, pathology and elements of therapy as applied to

orthodontics

17.3.5 Team rehabilitative procedures.

17.4 Biology of tooth movement :

17.4.1 Principles of tooth movement-review

17.4.2 Review of contemporary literature

17.4.3 Applied histophysiology of bone, periodontal ligament

17.4.4 Molecular and ultra cellular consideration in tooth movement

17.5 Orthodontic / Orthognathic surgery:

17.5.1 Orthodontist’ role in conjoint diagnosis and treatment planning

17.5.2 Pre and post-surgical Orthodontics

17.5.3 Participation in actual clinical cases, progress evaluation and post

retention study

17.5.4 Review of current literature

17.6 Ortho / Perio / Prostho inter relationship

17.6.1 Principles of interdiscliplinary patient treatment.

17.6.2 Common problems and their management

17.7 Basic principles of Mechanotherapy includes Removable appliances and fixed

appliances

17.7.1 Design

17.7.2 Construction

17.7.3 Fabrication

17.7.4 Management

152

17.7.5 Review of current literature on treatment methods and results.

17.8 Applied preventive aspects in Orthodontics

17.8.1 Caries and periodontal disease prevention

17.8.2 Oral hygiene measures

17.8.3 Clinical procedures

17.9 Interceptive preventive aspects in Orthodontics

17.9.1 Principles

17.9.2 Growth guidance

17.9.3 Diagnosis and treatment planning

17.9.4 Therapy emphasis on

17.9.4.1 Dento-facial problems

17.9.4.2 Tooth material discrepancies

17.9.4 3 Minor surgery for Orthodontics

17.10 Retention and relapse

17.10.1 Mechanotherapy – special reference to stability of results with various

procedures

17.10 2 Post retention analysis

17.10.3 Review of contemporary literature

17.11 .Recent advances like :

17.11.1 Use of implants

17.11.2 Lasers

17.11.3 Application of F.E.M.

17.11.4 Distratcion Osteogenesis

17.11.5 Lingual Orthodontics

17.11.6 Thermoplstic vacuum formed sequential removable appliances

Skills

Pre – Clinical Exercises

A general outline of the type of exercises is given here.

1. General Wire bending exercises to develop the manual dexterity.

2. Clasps, Bows and springs used in the removable appliances.

153

3. Soldering and welding exercises.

4. Fabrication of removable habit breaking, mechanical and functional appliances, also

all types of space maintainers and space regainers.

5. Bonwill Hawley Ideal arch preparation.

6. Construction of orthodontic study models.

7. Cephalometric tracing and various Analysis and superimposition methods.

8. Fixed appliance typhodont exercises.

a. Training shall be imparted in Begg technique.

b. Typhodont exercise

i. Band making

ii. Bracket positioning and placement

iii. Different stages of treatment

9. Clinical Photography

10. Computerized imaging

11. Preparation of surgical splints, and splints for TMJ problems

12. Handling of equipments like vacuum forming appliances and hydro solder etc.

First Year

I. Basic Pre-Clinical Exercise Work for the MDS Students:

First 6 Months

1. Non-appliance exercises

Sl.

No.

Exercise No.

1 Straightening of wire 6” long 1

2. Square 1

3. Rectangle 1

4 Traingle of 2” side 1

5. Circle of 2” side 1

6. Bending of U’s and V’s 1

2. Clasps

154

1. ¾ Clasps 2

2. Full clasps 2

3. Triangular Clasps 2

4. Adam’s clasps – upper molar 2

5 Adams Clasp – lower molar 2

6 Adam’s Clasp – Pre-molar 2

7. Adam’s Clasp – Incisor 2

8 Modification of Adam’s – With Helix 2

9. Modification of Adam’s – With distal extension 2

10. Modification of Adam’s – With soldered tube 2

3. LABIAL BOWS

1. Short labial bow (upper & lower) 1

2. Long labial bow (upper & lower) 1

3. Robert’s retractor 1

4. High Labial bow-with apron spring’s 1

5 Reverse loop labial bow 1

6. Retention labial bow soldered to Adam’s clasp 1

7. Retention labial bow extending distal to second molar 1

8. Fitted labial bow 1

9. Split high labial bow 1

4. SPRINGS

1. Finger spring – mesial movement 2

2. Finger spring-distal movement 2

3. Double cantilever spring 2

4. Coffin spring 2

5. T spring 2

5. CANINE RETRACTORS

1. U loop canine retractor 2

155

2. Helical canine retractor 2

3. Palatal canine retractor 2

6. APPLIANCES

1. Hawely’s retention appliance with anterior bite plane

2. Upper Hawely’s appliance with posterior bite plane

3. Upper expansion appliance with coffin spring

4. Upper expansion appliance with expansion screw

5. Habit breaking appliance with tongue crib

6. Oral screen

7. Lip bumper

8. Splint for Bruxism

9. Catalans appliance

10. Activator

11. Bionator

12 Frankel – FR 2 appliance

13. Twin block

14. Lingual arch

15. TPA

16. Quad helix

17 Utility arches

18 Pendulum appliance

7. Soldering exercise

1. Star 1

2. Comb 1

3. Christmas tree 1

4. Soldering buccal tube on molar bands 1

8. Welding exercises

1. Pinching and welding of molar, premolar, canine and Incisor bands

2. Welding of buccal tubes and brackets on molar bands and incisor bands

156

9. Impression of upper and lower arches in alginate

10. Study model preparation

11. Model analysis

Sl No Exercise

1. Impression of upper and lower dental arches

2. PREPARATION OF STUDY MODEL – 1 And all the permanent dentition

analysis to be done.

3. PREPARATION OF STUDY MODEL – 2And all the permanent dentition

analyses to be done.

4. PREPARATION OF STUDY MODEL – 3And all the mixed dentition

analyses to be done

12. Cephalometrics

1. Lateral cephalogram to be traced in five different colors and super

imposed to see the accuracy of tracing

2. Steiner’s analysis

3. Down’s analysis

4. Tweed analysis

5. Rickett’s analysis

6. Witt’s Appraisal

6. Mc namara analysis

7. Bjork analysis

8. Cephalometrics for Orthognathic surgical cases

9. Soft tissue analysis

13. Basic of Clinical Photography including Digital Photography

14. Light wire bending exercise for the Begg technique.

Sl.

No.

Exercise

157

1. Wire bending techniques on 0.016’ wire

2. Bonwill-Hawley ideal arch

3. Making a standard arch wire

4. Inter maxillary hooks – Boot leg and Inter maxillary type

5. Upper and Lower arch wire Stage-I

6. Bending a double back arch wire

7. Bayonet bends (vertical and horizontal offsets)

8. Stage – III arch wires

9. Torquing auxillary (upper)

10. Reverse Torquing (lower)

11. Uprighting and rotating Spring

15. Typhodont exercises: (Begg’s Tech.)

Sl.

No

Exercise

1. Teeth setting in Class II division I malocclusion with maxillary anterior

Proclination and mandibular anterior crowding.

2. band pinching, welding brackets and buccal tubes to the bands

3. Stage – I

4. Stage – II

5. Pre Stage – III

6. Stage – III

OR

Typhodont exercises: (Edgewise Tech.) Optional

Sl.

No

Exercise

1. Teeth setting in Class II division I malocclusion with maxillary anterior

Proclination and mandibular anterior crowding.

2. band pinching, welding brackets and buccal tubes to the bands

158

3. Levelling

4. Anchorage Prepration

5. Canine Retraction

6. Consolidation

7. Detailing and finishing

CLINICAL WORK:

Once the basic pre-clinical work is completed, the students can take up clinical cases

and the clinical training is for the two and half years.

Each postgraduate student should start with a minimum of 50 cases of his / her own

Additional he / she should handle a minimum of 20 transferred cases.

i. Removable active appliances

ii. Class-I malocclusion with Crowding

iii. Class-I malocclusion with bi-maxillary protrusion

iv. Class-II division - 1

v. Class – II division – 2.

vi. Class-III (Orthopedic, Surgical Orthodontic cases).

vii. Inter disciplinary cases

viii. Removable functional appliances cases like activator, Bionator, functional regulator,

twin block and new developments.

ix. Fixed functional appliances –

x. Dento-facial orthopedic appliances like head gears, rapid maxillary expansion.

xi. Appliance for arch development such as molar distalization.

xii. Fixed mechano therapy cases (Begg, PEA)

Retention procedures of above treated cases.

Academic work to be done during FIRST YEAR:

1. Seminars: A minimum of five seminars should be presented by each student

each year. Amongst 5 seminars atleast 3 seminars will be evidence based with

159

incorporation of most recent evidences as per the hierarchy of evidences is done

in seminar.

2. Journal club: A minimum of five journal club presentations should be done by

each student each year. Amongst 5 journal clubs atleast 3 journal clubs will be

evidence based. Critical appraisal of evidence presented and decision making as

per the principles of Evidence Based Decision Making is done in journal clubs.

3. Synopsis of dissertation: To be submitted on or before the end of six months

from the date of admission. Pilot study should be completed by the end of one

year. The dissertation should not be just a repetition of a previously undretaken

study but it should try to explore some new aspects.

4. Pre-Clinical Exercises: To be completed within the six months. On completion of

these exercises, student can start taking patients.

5. Inter-departmental meetings: Should be held once in a month.

6. Case discussions: Ten to twelve clinical case presentations should be done by

each student each year.

7. Field visits: To attend dental camps and to educate the masses.

8. Library Thesis: To be submitted by the completion of 1st year.

9. Part-I Examination: Theory paper I (Applied Basic Sciences) is conducted at the

end of 1st year.

Second Year:

1. Seminars: A minimum of five seminars should be presented by each student

each year. Amongst 5 seminars atleast 3 seminars will be evidence based with

incorporation of most recent evidences as per the hierarchy of evidences is done

in seminar.

2. Journal club: A minimum of five journal club presentations should be done by

each student each year. . Amongst 5 journal clubs atleast 3 journal clubs will be

evidence based. Critical appraisal of evidence presented and decision making as

per the principles of Evidence Based Decision Making is done with journal clubs.

160

3. Dissertation work: On getting the approval from the unviersity work for the

dissertation to be started.

4. Inter-departmental meetings: Should be held once in a month.

5. Case discussions: Ten to twelve clinical case presentations should be done by

each student each year.

6. Field visits: To attend dental camps and to educate the masses.

7. Undergraduate classes: Each post-graduate student should handle around 4-5

classes.

8. The clinical cases taken up should be followed under the guidance. More case

discussions and cases to be taken up. Formulation of clinical question to critical

appraisal of evidence and decision making as per the principles of Evidence

Based Decision Making in patient management.

Third Year:

1. Seminars: A minimum of 5 seminars should be presented by each student each

year. Amongst 5 seminars atleast 3 seminars will be evidence based with

incorporation of most recent evidences as per the hierarchy of evidences is done

in seminar.

2. Journal club: A minimum of five journal club presentations should be done by

each student each year. . Amongst 5 journal clubs atleast 3 journal clubs will be

evidence based. Critical appraisal of evidence presented and decision making as

per the principles of Evidence Based Decision Making is done with journal clubs.

3. Dissertation work: The completed dissertation should be submitted six months

before the final examination. Approval of dissertation is essential before a

candidate appears for the University examination.

4. Inter-departmental meetings: Should be held once in a month.

5. Case discussions: Ten to twelve clinical case presentations should be done by

each student each year.

6. Field visits: To attend dental camps and to educate the masses.

161

7. Undergraduate classes: Each post-graduate student should handle around 4-5

classes.

8. The clinical cases taken up should be followed under the guidance. More case

discussions and cases to be taken up. Formulation of clinical question to critical

appraisal of evidence and decision making as per the principles of Evidence

Based Decision Making in patient management.

9. Finishing and presenting the cases taken up.

10. Preparation of finished cases and presenting the cases (to be presented for the

examination).

Monitoring Learning Progress

It is essential to monitor the learning progress of each candidate through continuous

appraisal and regular assessment. It not only helps teachers to evaluate students, but

also students to evaluate themselves. The monitoring to be done by the staff of the

department based on participation of students in various teaching / learning activities. It

may be structured and assessment be done using checklists.

162

Scheme of Examination

A. Theory : 300 Marks

Written examination shall consist of four question papers each of three hours

duration. Total marks for each paper will be 75. Paper IV will be on Essay. Questions on

recent advances may be asked in any or all the papers. Distribution of topics for each

paper will be as follows:

Paper I : Applied Basic Sciences : Applied Anatomy, Applied Physiology, Applied

Pathology, Dental materials, Genetics, , Physical Anthropology with most

appropriate evidence, Applied Research methodology, Bio-Statistic, and

applied basics of evidence based orthodontics

Paper II : Orthodontic diagnosis and treatment planning.

Paper III: Clinical Orthodontics and mechanotherapy

Paper IV: Essay

The topics assigned to the different papers are generally evaluated under those

sections. However a strict division of the subject may not be possible and some

overlapping of topics is inevitable. Students should be prepared to answer overlapping

topics.

B. Practical / clinical Examination: 200 Marks

Exercise No: 1

Functional Case: 50 Marks

Recording of construction bite for functional appliance and Fabrication and

delivery of the appliance

Exercise No. :2

Multiband exercise: 50 Marks

1. III stage with auxillary springs

OR

2. Bonding of SWA brackets and construction of suitable arch wire.

163

Exercise No. 3

Display of records of the treated cases (minimum of 5 cases) with suitable supporting

evidences.

5 cases X 15 marks = 75 Marks

Exercise No: 4

Long case discussions: 25 Marks

No Exercise Marks allotted Approximate time

1. Functional appliance 50 1 hour (Bite)

1 hour (Delivery)

2. III stage mechanics / Bonding

and arch wire fabrication

50 1 hr 30 min

3. Display of case records

(assessment of minimum of 5

cases treated by the candidate

during the course)

75 1 hour

4. Long case (Clinical case for

diagnosis and treatment

planning)

25 2 hour

C. Viva-voce: (80 Oral Examination + 20 Pedagogy)

Viva voce: as per the university rules

Pedagogy: should be presented incorporating suitable supporting evidence

164

Books Recommended:

Title Author Publisher

1 An introduction to orthodontics Laura Mitchel Oxford Uni.Press

2

Begg orthodontic theory and

technique Begg, Kesling Saunders

3

Biomechanical&Esthetic

Stategies in cli.ortho Ravindra Nanda Saunders

4

Biomechanics in clinical

Orthodontics Nanda Saunders

5 Contemporary Orthodontics William Proffit Mosby

6

Contemporary treat. Of

dentofacial deformity Profit,white,sarver Mosby

7

Craniofacial Distraction

Osteogenesis Mikhail,Jason Mosby

8 Dental Instruments pocket guide Linda Boyd Elsevier

9 Dentofacial deformity Epker, Wolford Mosby

10

Esthetic orthodontia & orthodontic

surgery Sarver Mosby

11

Facial & Dental planning for

ortho.& oral surg. Arnett,McLaugh. Mosby

12 Invisible Orthodontics ScuzzoTakemoto Quintessence

13

Management of TMJ disorder &

Occlusion Okeson Mosby

14 Microimplant in orthodontics Jae-Hyun sung Dentos

15

Ortho.mngt.of dentition with

preadjusted appli. Bennet,Mclaugh. Mosby

16 Ortho.mngt.of uncrowded Cl-II

John C. bennett Mosby

165

Div.1in children

17

Orthodontic concepts and

stratragies Van der Luiden Quintessence

18

Orthodontic principles and

practice T.M.Graber A.I.T.B.S

19

Orthodontic:Current principles

and tech. Graber,Vanarsdal Mosby

20 Orthodontics,The art and science S.I.Bhalaji Arya pub.house

21 Problem solving in orthodontia Burstone,Marcote Quintessence

22 Radiographic Cephalometry Alexander,Jacob Quintessence

23

Removable Orthodontic

appliances Isaacon,muir Elsevier

24 Risk Management in Orthodontics Graber,Athana. Quintessence

25

Systemised ortho. Treatment

mechanics M.B.T. Mosby

26 Textbook of Orthodontics Bishara Saunders

27 Textbook of Orthodontics GurkeeratSingh Jaypee Bro.

28 Twin Block functional therapy Clark, Graber Mosby

Title Author Publisher

29

The design, construction and use

of removable ortho.appl.( 6Th

Edition) Philip Adams varghese

30 Textbook of Orthodontics - AIPD M.S.Rani AIPD

31

Oral health for orthodontic

patients

Heintze,

Brinkmann quintessence

32 Clinical Orthodontics Fisher Saunders

166

33

Removable Orthodontic

appliances Graber, Neumann Saunders

34 The Alexander discipline Wick Alexander Ormco

35 Atlas of advance orthodontics Anthony D Viazia Saunders

36 The Tip edge orthodontics

Richard

Parkhouse elsevier mosby

37

The orthodontic treatment of

impacted teeth Adrian Becker

informa health

care

38

Orthodontic materials thieme

stuttgart Brantley Elides Thieme

39 Refined Beggs for modern times V.P jayde

40

Textbook of anatomy with colour

atlas I.B.singh Jaypee Bro.

41 Human anatomy vol 3 B D chaurasia CBS

42

Essentials of preventive and

community dentistry Soben peter Arya( medi)

43

essential pathology for dental

students Harsh mohan jaypee Bro.

44 Human embrylogy I.B.singh Macmillan

45 Biochemistry

U. Sathya

narayan Books and Allied

46 Anatomy for dental students Zargar CBSPD

47

Textbook of human physiology for

dental students Indukhurana Elsevier

48 Dental materials Philip Adams Anusavice

49 Orthodontic prep. Mannual Prem kumar Elsevier

167

BRANCH VI

ORAL AND MAXILLOFACIAL PATHOLOGY, MICROBIOLOGY AND FORENSIC

ODONTOLOGY

Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology, Microbiology and Forensic Odontology branch deals

with the nature of oral diseases, their causes, processes and effects. It relates the

clinical manifestation of oral disease to the physiologic and anatomic changes

associated with these diseases.

1. AIM :

1.1 To prepare and train dental graduates for teaching and to ensure higher

competence in both general and special areas of Oral Pathology and Microbiology.

They are trained to prepare their presentations by searching and incorporating

related highest level of evidences

1.2 To prepare a candidate for research and clinical abilities including prevention of

various oral and maxillofacial lesions. This is undertaken through problem based

learning. The students are trained to search for gaps in research,formulate a

research hypothesis and conduct research. They are also formulate a clinical

problem and search for related high level of evidences and come to diagnosis.

2. OBJECTIVES:

2.1 To train a post graduate dental surgeon so as to ensure higher competence in both

general and special pathology dealing with the nature of oral diseases, their causes,

processes and effects.

2.2 An oral pathologist is expected to perform routine histopathological evaluation of

specimens relating to oral and peri-oral tissues. To carry out routine diagnostic

procedures including hematological, cytological, microbiological, immunological and

ultra structural investigations.

2.3 He/she is expected to have an understanding of current research methodology,

collection and interpretation of data, ability to carry out research projects on clinical

and / or epidemiological aspects, a working knowledge on current databases,

automated data retrieval systems, referencing and skill in writing scientific papers,

incorporating different levels of evidences as required.

168

2.4 He/she is expected to present scientific data pertaining to the field, in conferences

both as poster and verbal presentations and or take part in group discussions and

be able to critically appraise the literature evidences and discuss its merit and

demerits.

Course 6: Oral Pathology-(Theory & Practical)

Outcomes: The student should be able to

Examine the patients, investigate the patient systemically, analyze the investigation

results, radiology, diagnose the ailment, plan a treatment, communicate it with the

patient and execute it. Understand the prevalence and prevention of diseases of cranio-

mandibular system.Restore lost functions of stomatognathic system namely

mastication, speech, appearance and psychological comforts. By understanding

biological, biomedical, bioengineering principles and systemic condition of the patient to

provide a quality health care of the craniofacial region.Interact with other speciality

including medical speciality congenital defects, temporo-mandibular joint syndromes,

esthetics, implant supported prosthetics and problems of psychogenic origin.Carry out

appropriate treatment at higher level of knowledge, training and practice skills currently

available in the specialty Identify target diseases and awareness amongst the

population. Three important skills need to be imparted -

a. Diagnostic skill in recognition of oral lesions and their management.

b. Research skills in handling scientific problems pertaining to oral treatment.

c. Clinical and didactic skills in encouraging younger doctors to attain learning

objectives.

3. KNOWLEDGE

• Evidence base knowledge is incorporated in routine diagnostic and

Histopathological studies of general and oral pathology by means of standard

searching strategy.

3.1 The candidate should possess knowledge of applied basic sciences including

human anatomy, embryology, particularly of

head and neck, Physiology & Biochemistry, Pathology and Microbiology,

169

Virology, Health and Diseases Nutrition, Behavioral science, age changes,

genetics, Immunology, Congenital defects and syndrome and Anthropology, Bio-

medical and Biological Principle.

3.2 Ability to diagnose and plan treatment incorporating relevant available evidences

before coming to final diagnosis.

3.3 Ability to read and interpret and discuss a histopathological slide using currently

available best evidences

3.4 Should have updated essential knowledge o applying ethics, laws and

Jurisprudence in forensic odontology.

3.5 Identify cases, which are outside the area of speciality / competence and refer those

to appropriate speciality.

3.6 Should attend continuing education programs, seminars and conferences related to

Speciality, thus updating himself.

3.7 should be competent enough to guide his/her team, colleagues and other students.

3.8 Should be able to use information technology tools and carry out research both

basic clinical, with the aims of publishing his/her work and presenting his/her work

at various scientific forums.

3.9 Should have essential knowledge of personal hygiene, infection control, prevention

of cross infection and safe disposal waste, keeping in view the risks of

transmission of Hepatitis and HIV.

3.10 Should have a sound knowledge for application of pharmacology. Effects of drugs

on oral tissue and systems of body and for medically compromised patients.

3.11 Theoretical, Clinical and practical knowledge of all oro-facial lesions, diagnostic

procedures pertaining to them and latest information of imaging modules and

recent advances in treatment modalities along with the ability to relate and

incorporate appropriate. levels of evidences in all settings

4. SKILLS:

4.1 The candidate should be able to examine the patients thoroughly,record history according to prescribed protocols and after appraising evidences of highest

170

levels, be able to suggest necessary investigations keeping in consideration patients needs.

4.2 should be able to understand and critically appraise the prevalence and prevention of diseases of oral and maxillofacial region.

4.3 The candidate should be able to interact and discuss the relevant cases with other specialists quoting appropriate literature.

4.4 Should be able to demonstrate the preclinical and clinical competence necessary using prescribed protocols and apply relevant evidences wherever necessary.

4.5 Identify target diseases and be able to create awareness amongst the population, using demonstration tools and different levels of evidences

4.7 Three important skills need to be imparted-- 4.7.1 Diagnostic skill in recognition of oral and maxillofacial lesions and their

management as per protocols.

4.7.2 Research skills including critically appraisals in handling scientific problems

pertaining to oral treatment.

4.7.3 Clinical skill with problem based learning and Didactic skills along with

incorporating evidences in encouraging younger doctors to attain

learning objectives.

5. ATTITUDES :

5.1 Adopt ethical principles in Oral Pathology Practice. Professional honesty and

integrity are to be fostered. Patient centric Treatment to be delivered irrespective

of social status, caste, creed or region of patient.

5.2 Willing to share knowledge and clinical experience with professional colleagues.

5.3 Willing to adopt new methods and techniques from time to time based on scientific

research, which is in patient’s best interest.

5.4 Respect patient’s rights and privileges including patient’s right to information and

right to seek second opinion.

5.5 The positive mental attitude and the persistence of continued learning need to be

inculcated.

6. COMMUNICATIVE ABILITIES :

6.1 Develop communication skills, in particular, to explain treatment option with relevant

available evidences in management.

6.2 Provide leadership and get the best out of his group in a congenial working

atmosphere.

171

6.3 Should be able to communicate in simple understandable language with the patient

to explain the principles of Oral Medicine to the patient. He should be able to guide and

counsel the patient with regard to various treatment modalities available.

6.4 Develop the ability to communicate with professional colleagues through various

media like Internet, e-mail, video conference and etc. to render the best possible

treatment.

7. COURSE CONTENTS:

The candidates shall under go training for Three academic years with satisfactory

attendance above 80 % for each year.

7.1 The course includes epidemiology and demographic studies, research and teaching

skills.

7.2 Ability to prevent, diagnose and treat with after care for all patients for control of

diseases and / or treatment related syndromes with patient satisfaction for restoring

functions of stomatognathic system.

7.3 The program outline addresses the knowledge, procedural and operative skills

needed in Masters Degree in Oral Pathology and Microbiology. A minimum of Three

years of formal training through a graded system of education as specified will enable

the trainee to achieve Masters Degree, competently and have the necessary skills /

knowledge to update themselves with advancements in the field.

The course content has been identified and categorized as Essential knowledge as

given below-

8. SYLLABUS DISTRIBUTION:

Paper I - Applied Basic Sciences

Paper II - Oral Pathology, Oral Microbiology & Oncology

Paper III - Laboratory techniques and Diagnosis

Paper IV – Essay

8.2 PAPER-I - APPLIED BASIC SCIENCES :

172

8.2.1 Bio-Statistics & Research Methodology

8.2.1.1 Introduction to Bio-Statistics:

8.2.1.1.1 Scope and need for statistical application to biological data.

8.2.1.1.2 Definition of selected terms

8.2.1.1.3 Methods of collection data.

8.2.1.1.4 Research methodology74

8.1.2. Applied Gross Anatomy of Head & Neck including Histology

8.1.2.1 Temporo-mandibular Joint

8.1.2.2 Muscles of mastication

8.1.2.3 Tongue |

8.1.2.4 Salivary glands

8.1.2.5 Maxillary sinus

8.1.2.6 Jaw muscles & facial muscles

8.1.2.7 Nerve-supply, blood supply, lymphatic & venous drainage

8.1.2.8 Trigeminal & facial nerve

8.1.2.9 Embryology: Development of face, palate, mandible, maxilla & tongue.

8.1.3 Cell Biology

8.1.3.1 Detailed study of structure and function of the mammalian cell

8.1.3.2 Detailed consideration of intercellular junction

8.1.3.3 Cell cycle and cell division

8.1.3.4 Cell cycle regulators

8.1.3.5 Cell to cell and

8.1.3.6 Cell-extra cellular matrix interactions.

8.1.4 General Histology

8.1.4.1 Light microscopic and electron microscopic considerations

8.1.4.2 Histology of epithelial cells including glands

8.1.4.3 Histology of general and specific connective tissue including

8.1.4.3.1 Bone

8.1.4.3.2 Hematopoietic system

8.1.4.3.3 Lymphatic system

8.1.4.3.4 Muscle and Nerve tissue

173

8.1.4.3.5 Digestive system with special reference to

8.1.4.3.6 Stomach, Intestine, Liver, Pancreas

8.1.4.3.7 Urinary system including kidney etc.

8.1.4.3.8 Endocrinal system including thyroid.

8.1.5 Applied Physiology (General & Oral)

8.1.5.1 Saliva

8.1.5.2 Mastication, Deglutition, Taste

8.1.5.3 Wound healing

8.1.5.4 Vitamins

8.1.5.5 Hormones

8.1.5.6 Blood & its constituents

8.1.5.7 Biochemistry (General)

8.1.5.8 Chemistry & Metabolism of carbohydrates

8.1.5.9 Lipids and Proteins.

8.1.5.10 Lipids and Proteins- Biological oxidation

8.1.5.11 Various techniques applied including - cell filtration, centrifugation,

electrophoresis, spectrophotometer and radioactive techniques.

8.1.6 Applied General Pathology

8.1.6.1 Pathogenic mechanism at molecular level

8.1.6.2.1 Cellular changes following injury- Degeneration, Necrosis & Repair

8.1.6.3 Inflammation & Chemical mediators

8.1.6.4 Oedema, thrombosis & embolism

8.1.6.5 Hemorrhage & shock

8.1.6.6 Blood dyscrasias

8.1.6.7 Carcinogenesis & Neoplasia

8.1.7 General Microbiology

8.1.7.1 Definition of various types of infections

8.1.7.2 Routes of infection and spread

8.1.7.3 Sterilization

8.1.7.4 Disinfection & Antiseptics

174

8.1.7.5 Bacteriology of Staphylococci, Streptococci, Corynebacterium diphtheria,

Mycobacteria, Clostridia, Bacteroides & Fusobacteria, Actinomycetes &

Spirochetes

8.1.7.6 Mycology

8.1.7.6.1 General properties of fungi

8.1.7.6.2 Classification based on disease

8.1.7.6.3 Superficial, subcutaneous & deep opportunistic infections

8.1.7.6.4 General principles of fungal infections

8.1.7.6.5 Rapid diagnosis

8.1.7.6.6 Method of collection of sample and examination of fungi

8.1.7.7 Virology

8.1.7.7.1 General properties

8.1.7.7.2 Broad classification of viruses

8.1.7.7.3 Pathogenesis

8.1.7.7.4 Pathology of viral infections-

8.1.7.7.4.1 Herpes virus

8.1.7.7.4.2 Hepatitis Virus

8.1.7.7.4.3 Human Immunodeficiency Virus (H.I.V)

8.1.7.8 Parasitology

8.1.7.9 Basic Immunology in details

8.1.7.9.1 Cell mediated and Humoral

8.1.7.9.2 Antigen- antibody reactions

8.1.7.9.3 Graft versus host reaction, Auto immunity.

8.1.8 Study of the oral, dental and Para-oral tissues

8.1.8.1 Ultrastructural, molecular and biochemical aspects

8.1.8.2 Development of oral and Para-oral tissues including detailed aspects of

tooth

8.1.8.2.1 Dental hard tissues formation

8.1.8.2.2 Study of morphology of permanent and deciduous teeth.

8.1.8.2.3 Applied aspects - influence of hormones, nutrients etc on growth,

development and structure of oral soft and hard tissues and Para- oral tissues.

175

8.1.9 Basic Molecular Biology and Genetics

8.1.9.1 Detailed molecular aspects of DNA, RNA, Golgi apparatus, endoplasmic

reticulum and other intracellular organelles, transcription and transplantation,

plasmids and molecular biology techniques.

8.1.9.1 Experimental aspects include: DNA extraction, PCR, Western blotting

8.1.10 Nutrition & Dietetics

8.1.10.1 General principles,

8.1.10.2 Balanced diet,

8.1.10.3 Effect of dietary deficiency,

8.1.10.4 Protein energy malnutrition,

8.1.10.5 Recommended dietary allowance

8.1.10.6 Fluid and electrolyte balance in maintaining homeostasis.

8.1.11 Basic Histopathology techniques and Microscopy

8.1.11.1 Theoretical aspects of microscopy light and various other types including

microscopy.

8.1.11.2 Methods of tissue preparation for -

8.1.11.2.1 Ground and decalcified sections,

8.1.11.2.2 Light microscopy and

8.1.11.2.3 Electron microscopy.

8.1.11.3 Routine staining procedures and Theory of staining

8.2 PAPER II- ORAL PATHOLOGY, ORAL MICROBIOLOGY & ONCOLOGY

8.2.1 Basic Oral Pathology

8.2.1.1 Development Disturbances of Oral and Para oral Structures

8.2.1.2 Dental Caries

8.2.1.3 Pulp & Periapical Pathology & Osteomyelitis

8.2.1.4 Periodontal Diseases

8.2.1.5 Salivary Gland Diseases

8.2.1.6 Cysts of the Oral & Para oral Region

176

8.2.1.7 Traumatic, Reactive & Regressive lesions of Oral Cavity.

8.2.1.8 Pigmentation of Oral & Para oral region & Discoloration of teeth.

8.2.1.9 Microbial infections of Oral Soft tissues.

8.2.1.10 Diseases of the Bone and TMJ Joint

8.2.1.11 Systemic Diseases involving Oral Cavity

8.2.1.12 Mucocutaneous Lesions.

8.2.1.13 Diseases of the Nerves.

8.2.1.14 Diseases of Maxillary sinus.

8.2.2 Oral Oncology:

8.2.2.1 Precancerous Lesions and Conditions.

8.2.2.2 Benign and Malignant Tumors of the Oral Cavity.

8.2.3 Biopsy: Types of Biopsy

8.2.4 Principles of Basic Forensic Odontology

8.2.4.1 Introduction, definition, aims & scope.

8.2.4.2 Sex and Ethnic differences in both morphology and histological age

estimation. Determination of sex and race groups from buccal mucosa/saliva.

Denial DNA methods

8.2.4.3 Legal procedures like inquest medico-legal evidences, and post-mortem

examinations of violence around mouth and neck.

8.2.4.4 Identification of deceased individual- Mass disaster. Bite marks, rugae

pattern and lip prints.

8.2.4.5 Dental importance of poisons and corrosives, overview of Forensic

Medicine and Toxicology.

8.2.4.6 Sex determination by the use of skull and mandible.

8.2.4.7 Identification of person by rugae patterning, bite mark analysis (Bite

marks recording swabbing techniques and various types of overlays production

and comparison)

8.2.4.8 Lip prints recording and analysis

8.2.4.9 Age estimation: Schour arc Maisler's method,

8.2.4.10 Demerjian's method

8.2.4.11Gustafson'smethod

177

8.2.4.12 Dentin translucency, Cemental incremental lines, Kvaal and associates

radiographic method.

8.2.5 Oral Microbiology and Immunology

8.2.5.1 Detailed structure of Oral bacteria with molecular and biochemical

considerations,

8.2.5.2 Microbial genetics and

8.2.5.3 Immunologic mechanisms.

8.2.5.4 Detailed study of infections of Oral and Para-Oral regions with emphasis

on tropical diseases

8.3 PAPER III - LABORATORY TECHNIQUES & DIAGNOSIS:

8.3.1 Routine hematological tests and clinical significance of the same.

8.3.2 Biopsy procedures for oral lesions.

8.3.3 Processing of tissues for paraffin sections.

8.3.4 Microtome and principles of microtomy.

8.3.5 Routine stains, principles and theories of staining techniques

8.3.6 Microscope principles and theories of microscopy

8.3.7 Light microscopy and various other types including electron microscopy

8.3.8 Methods of tissue preparation for ground sections, decalcified sections.

8.3.9 Special stains and staining techniques for different tissues

8.3.10 Immunohistochemistry

8.3.11 Preparation of frozen sections and cytological smears.

8.1.4 PAPER IV - ESSAY

Any contents from 8.1 to 8.3 can be included in essay

9 YEARLY PRACTICAL/CLINICAL SCHEDULES:

9.1 FIRST YEAR

9.1.1 MODULE A

178

9.1.1.1 PRE-CLINICAL EXERCISES

9.1.1.1.1 Carvings of permanent teeth in wax

9.1.1.1.2 Identification of Deciduous and Permanent teeth

9.1.1.1.3 Age estimations by pattern of teeth eruption from plaster casts of different age

groups.

9.1.1.1.4 Maintaining Record book & Log book

9.1.1.2 ACADEMIC ACTIVITIES

9.1.1.2.1 Seminars (General Topics)

9.1.1.2.1.1 Tooth morphology

9.1.1.2.1.2 Microbiology

9.1.1.2.1.3 Research Methodology

9.1.1.2.1.4 Gen. Histology

9.1.1.2.1.5 Applied Physiology

9.1.1.2.1.6 Applied Pathology

9.1.1.2.1.7 Metabolism

9.1.1.2.1.8 Immunology

9.1.1.2.2 Slide Discussions: General Histology & General Pathology

9.1.1.2.3 Maintaining Record Books & Log book

9.1.1.2.4 Clinical postings ( dept of histology, biochemistry, microbiology)

9.1.1.2.5 Synopsis for main dissertation

9.1.1.2.6 Selection of topic for library thesis

9.1.2 MODULE B

9.1.2.1 PRECLINICAL EXERCISES

9.1.2.1.1 Ground Sections & Decalcified Sections

9.1.2.1.2 Tissue processing & Staining, Sectioning

9.1.2.2 Seminars

9.1.2.2.1 Oral & Dental Histology

9.1.2.2.2 Oral Embryology & Physiology

9.1.2.2.3 Molecular Biology

9.1.2.2.4 Genetics

179

9.1.2.2.5 Nutrition

9.1.2.2.6 Basic Histology Techniques

9.1.2.2.7 Microscopy

9.1.2.3 Clinical postings: molecular biology

9.1.2.4 Slide discussions: oral & dental histology

9.1.2.5 Maintaining Record book & Log Book

9.2 SECOND YEAR

9.2.1 MODULE A

9.2.1.1 Evaluation & completion of library thesis (end of 1st 3 months)

9.2.1.2 Seminars (general topic)

9.2.1.2.1 Oral pathology (basic)

9.2.1.2.2 Oral oncology

9.2.1.2.3 Biopsy

9.2.1.2.4 Forensic odontology

9.2.1.2.5 Oral microbiology and immunology

9.2.1.3 Postings: dermatology, forensic odontology, oral diagnosis, clinical pathology

demonstration

9.2.1.4 Clinical pathology

9.2.1.4.1 Laboratory investigations, hematology, microbiology, Urine analysis

9.2.1.4.2 Specialized histopathology techniques and special stains training

9.2.1.4.3 Commencement of disease

9.2.1.4.4 Slide discussions (oral Pathology)

9.2.1.4.5 Journal clubs

9.2.1.4.6 Case history

• Presentation of evidence base seminars: in the seminars the students not only

write references but critically evaluate articles pertaining to their topics and attach

this checklist to the seminar.

• Evidence based Journal club: an evidence based journal club article is choosen

either based on clinical community relevant question for which the P.G. seeks

answer or allotted as an appraisal exercise to the post graduate student. Based

180

on study design, different appraisal check list are used for evidence based critical

appraisal.

• A question is formulated according to the subject matter, each P.G student

critical evaluates the articles pertaining to the formulated question and tries to

find the answer with the evidence present or further research studies are

promoted

• Evidence based Pedagogues: the post graduates are guided to teach through

evidence. Providing U.G. student with knowledge supported by evidence of best

available quality /order is encouraged.

• Evidence based Case presentation: case history discussions for P.G. student

also includes evidence based dentistry. This is done to evidence based

pathological diagnosis. In the evidence based case discussions the P.G students

evaluates the articles and do a brief write up of them.

• Slide Discussions: evidence based slide discussions are included in the

curriculum of P.G. will discuss the slides as to improve the quality of pathological

diagnostic work. P.G. students. And as support into that discussion students will

submit evidences in support of that.

9.2.2 MODULE B

9.2.2.1 Discussions

9.2.2.2 Case histories and clinico-pathology discussions

9.2.2.3 Postings in oral surgery and oral diagnosis (GCRI)

9.2.2.4 Slide discussions

9.2.2.5 Seminars

9.2.2.6 Oral pathology

9.2.2.7 Laboratory technique

9.2.2.8 Lectures to be taken

9.3 Third Year

181

9.3.1 Journal clubs

9.3.2 Posting – animal experimentation

9.3.3 Seminars

9.3.4 Case histories

9.3.5 Discussion submission (at end of 6 months)

9.3.6 Lectures for IIIrd BDS

9.3.7 Reporting of slides

9.3.8 Clinico-pathology discussions

9.3.9 Prelim exams

9.3.10 Final MDS examinations

• Two research projects other than dissertation are incorporated in the PG

curriculum.

• Continous Dental Education programmes and work shops are conducted by the

department to upgrade knowledge of students in relation with histopathology

reporting and diagnosis.

Sr. No. Particulars I MDS II MDS III MDS

1. Seminar 5 5 5

2. Case Presentation 5 5 5

3. Journal Article Presentation 5 5 5

4. Research Project / Study 1 1 -

5. Library Dissertation 1 - -

Hematologic Posting 20 10 10

6. a. Blood Sugar estimation 20 10 10

b. Bleeding time, clotting 20 10 10

182

time

c. DLC, TLC, Hb 20 10 10

7. Cytology 30 30 30

8. Carvings 14 - -

9. Ground sections 10 - -

10. Decalcified sections 10 - -

11. Grossing of tissues 50

(individual)

20

(individual)

20

(individual)

12. Histopathology slide examination

with Diagrams

Total 125 175 450

(report

writing)

a. General Histology 50 - -

b. Oral Histology 75 - -

c. Oral Pathology - 100 -

d. PG Slides - 50 150

e. Histopathology diagnosis - 25 300

Microbiology

13. a. Culturing 5 10 -

b. ZN staining 5 10 10

c. Gram staining 10 20 20

14. Carving Demonstrations to first

Year BDS Students & Slides

Entire year - -

183

10 SCHEME OF EXAMINATION:

Descusions

15. Slides Descusions 2nd and 3rd

Year BDS Students

Entire year Entire year

16. Lectures for BDS Students - 5 5

17. Special Staining

(Other than Thesis)

5 5 5

18. Main thesis - - 1

19. Screening/Camps 1 1 -

20. Conference/

Symposium/Seminars

National Conference

PG Symposium Total 3

Others

21. Presentations

a. Paper/ Poster

b. Chart/Model display

c. Interdisciplinary

Presentations

Total 3

1

22. Clinico-Pathological Meet 1 2 1

23. Article Publication in National /

International Indexed Journal

- 1 1

184

10.1 THEORY – 300 MARKS

• Evidence based questions are formulated

a. Written examination shall consist of 4 question papers each of 3 hours duration.

Total marks for each paper will be 100.

b. Paper I, II, III shall consist of two long questions carrying 20 marks each and 5

short essay questions each carrying 07 marks each.

c. Paper IV will be an Essay of 75 marks carrying options

Distribution of topics for each paper will be as follows:

PAPER I: Applied basic sciences:

Applied anatomy, physiology (general & oral), cell biology, general histology,

biochemistry, general pathology, general and systemic microbiology, virology,

mycology, basic immunology, oral biology (oral and dental histology), biostatistics and

research methodology.

ii. PAPER II: Oral pathology, oral microbiology and immunology and forensic odontology

iii. PAPER III: Laboratory techniques and diagnosis and oncology

Questions will be formulated so as to encouraged students to incorporate proper

protocols and related evidences.

iv. PAER IV: Essay

Questions on recent advances with most appropriate levels of evidence are asked to be

quoted.

10.2 PRACTICAL/CLINICAL -200 MARKS

All the practical exercises including clinical examination are to be done according to the

prescribed protocols

A Case presentation – 30 marks

a. Long case – 20 marks

b. Short case 10 marks

B Clinical hematology (any two investigations) – 20 marks

185

C Smear presentations – 20 marks

Cytology or microbial smear and staining

D Paraffin sectioning and H & E Staining – 30 marks

E Histopathology slide discussion – 100 marks

10.3Viva voce – 100 marks

10.3.1 Viva-voce examination: 80 marks

As per the university rules

10.3.2 Pedagogy exercise: 20 marks

A topic be given to each candidate in the beginning of clinical examination. He/she is

asked to make a presentation on the topic for 8 to 10 minutes incorporating appropriate

levels of evidences.

186

BRANCH-VII

PUBLIC HEALTH DENTISTRY

Public health dentistry deals with prevention and control of oral diseases. It works for the welfare of the community rather than an individual. It employs information, education and communication techniques to promote oral health. Further this includes not only the sufferers from the disease in all degrees of severity from the subclinical to the fatal, but also those persons who are left disabled in the wake of disease. 1. AIM 1.1 To train dental graduates as to ensure higher competence in both general and special areas of public health dentistry. 1.2 To prepare a candidate for teaching, research and clinical abilities, including prevention, curative and rehabilitative skills with evidence- based approach. 2. GENERAL OBJECTIVES OF THE COURSE 2.1 Training programme in public health dentistry achieve knowledge and skill in theoretical and field work,attitude, communicative skills and ability to research with understanding of social, cultural, educational and environmental background of the society. 2.2 Have acquired adequate knowledge and understanding of applied basic and systemic medical science, knowledge in general and particularly of head and neck. 2.3 The postgraduates will be able to provide comprehensive oral care for patients with competence and working knowledge with understanding of applied medical, behavioral and clinical science that are beyond the treatment skills of the general BDS graduate and MDS graduate of other specialties, to demonstrate evaluative and judgment skills in making appropriate evidence- based decisions regarding prevention, treatment, after care and referral to deliver comprehensive care to patients. Course7: Public Health Dentistry (Theory & Practical) Outcomes:The candidate should be able to Take history, conduct clinical examination including all diagnostic procedures to arrive at diagnosis at the individual level and conduct survey of the community at state and national level of all conditions related to oral health to arrive at community diagnosis.Plan and perform all necessary treatment, prevention and promotion of oral health at the individual and community level.Plan appropriate community oral health program, conduct the program and evaluate, at the community level. Use of knowledge of epidemiology to identify causes and plan appropriate preventive and control measures.Develop appropriate person power at various levels and their effective utilization.Conduct survey and use appropriate methods to impart oral health education.Develop ways of helping the community towards easy payment plan, and followed by evaluation for their oral health care needs.Develop the planning, implementation, evaluation and administrative skills to carry out successful community oral health programs. After completion of this course the students will come to know

187

about the basic concepts of Biopharmaceutics and Pharmacokinetics specially; Factors affecting Drug absorption from the gastrointestinal tract by different types of dosage forms, Biopharmaceutics considerations in drug product design and in vitro drug performance, extensive study of pharmacokinetics Models and drug interactions, Detailed study of drug product performance in vivo along with Bioavailability and Bioequivalence, and application of pharmacokinetics in dosage forms like; modified-release drug products, targeted drug delivery systems and biotechnological products. Brief introduction to pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics of biotechnology drugs, protein and peptides, monoclonal antibodies, oligonucleotides, vaccines and gene therapies. 3. KNOWLEDGE 3.1 Apply basic sciences knowledge regarding etiology, diagnosis and management of the prevention, promotion and treatment of all the oral conditions at the individual and community level. 3.2 Identify social, economic, environmental and emotional determinants as evident through scientific systematic appraisal of literature, in a given individual patient or a community for the purpose of planning and execution of Community Oral Health Program. 3.3 Ability to conduct Oral Health Surveys in order to identify all the oral health problems affecting the community and find evidence- based solutions using multi - disciplinary approach. 3.4 Ability to act as a consultant in community Oral Health, teach, guide and take part in research (both basic and clinical), generate evidence, present and publish the outcome at various scientific conferences and journals, both national and international level. 4. SKILLS: The candidate should be able to 4.1 Take history, conduct clinical examination including all diagnostic procedures to arrive at diagnosis at the individual level and conduct survey of the community at state and national level of all conditions related to oral health to arrive at community diagnosis, search and appraise evidence to arrive at the most appropriate community treatment plan. 4.2 Plan and perform all necessary treatment, prevention and promotion of Oral Health at the individual and community level. 4.3 Plan appropriate Community Oral Health Program, conduct the program and evaluate, at the community level. 4.4 Ability to make use of knowledge of epidemiology to identify causes and plan appropriate preventive and control measures. 4.5 Develop appropriate person power at various levels and their effective utilization. 4.6 Conduct survey and use appropriate methods to impart Oral Health Education. 4.7 Develop ways of helping the community towards easy payment plan, and followed by evaluation for their oral health care needs. 4.8 Develop the planning, implementation, evaluation and administrative skills to carry out successful community Oral Health Programs.

188

5. VALUES: 5.1 Adopt ethical principles in all aspects of Community Oral Health Activities. 5.2 To apply ethical and moral standards while carrying out epidemiological researches. 5.3 Develop communication skills, in particular to explain the causes and prevention of oral diseases to the patient. 5.4 Respect patient's rights and privileges including patient’s right to information and right to seek a second opinion. 6. COMMUNICATIVE ABILITIES: 6.1 Develop communication skills, in particular, to explain prevention and promotion of oral health. 6.2 Provide leadership and get the best out of his group in a congenial working atmosphere. 6.3 Should be able to communicate in simple understandable language with the patient to explain the principles of health education to the patient. He should be able to guide and counsel the patient with regard to various treatment modalities available. 6.4 Develop the ability to communicate with professional colleagues through various media like Internet use protocol, use of search engines, databases, email, Video-conference, and etc. to render the best possible services. 7. COURSE CONTENTS: The candidates shall undergo training for 3 academic years with satisfactory attendance above 80% for each year. 7.1 The course includes epidemiology and demographic studies, research and teaching skills. 7.2 A minimum of three years of formal training through a graded system of education as specified will enable the trainee to achieve Masters Degree in Public health dentistry, competently and have the necessary skills / knowledge to update themselves with advancements in the field. The course content has been identified and categorized as Essential knowledge as given below. Paper I: Applied Basic Sciences Includes Applied Anatomy and Histology, Applied Physiology and Biochemistry, Applied Pathology, Microbiology, Pharmacology, Oral Pathology, Physical and Social Anthropology, Computers, Research Methodology and Biostatistics. Paper II: Public Health includes Public Health, Health, Disease, General Epidemiology, Enviornmental Health, Public Health Education, Public Health Practice and Administration System in India, Ethics and Jurisprudence, Nutrition in Public Health, Behavioral Science, Hospital Administration, Health Care Delivery System, Oral Biology and Genetics

189

Paper III: Dental Public Health, Epidemiology, Oral Survey Procedure, Delivery of Dental Care, Payment of Dental Care, Evaluation of Quality of Dental Care, Preventive Dentistry, Practice Management Paper IV: Essay- Any content from paper-I, paper-II and paper-III. 8. SYLLABUS DISTRIBUTION: 8.1 PAPER I: APPLIED BASIC SCIENCES: 8.1.1 Applied Anatomy and Histology 8.1.1.1 Development of face. 8.1.1.2 Brachial arches. 8.1.1.3 Muscles of facial expression. 8.1.1.4 Muscles of mastication. 8.1.1.5 Temporo Mandibular Joint. 8.1.1.6 Salivary glands. 8.1.1.7 Tongue. 8.1.1.8 Hard and soft palate, Infra temporal fossa. 8.1.1.9 Paranasal air sinuses. 8.1.1.10 Cranial nerves - with emphasis on trigeminal, facial, glossopharyngeal and hypoglossal nerve. 8.1.1.11 Blood supply of head and neck. 8.1.1.12 Lymphatic system of head and neck, Osteology of head and neck. 8.1.1.13 Structure and relations of alveolar process and edentulous mouth. 8.1.1.14 Genetics-fundamentals. 8.1.1.15 Oral Histology: 8.1.15.1 Development of dentition, Innervation of dentin and pulp. 8.1.15.2 Periodontium-development, histology, blood supply, nerve supply and lymphatic drainage. 8.1.15.3 Oral mucous membrane. 8.1.15.4 Pulp-periodontal complex. 8.1.2. Applied Physiology and Biochemistry 8.1.2.1 Mastication and deglutition. 8.1.2.2 Cell 8.1.2.3 Food and nutrition. 8.1.2.4 Metabolism of carbohydrates, proteins and fats. 8.1.2.5 Vitamins and minerals. 8.1.2.6 Pain pathway and its mechanism. 8.1.2.7 Fluid and electrolyte balance 8.1.2.8 Blood composition, function, clotting mechanism, erythropoiesis, Blood groups and transfusions, dynamics of blood flow. 8.1.2.9 Pulse and blood pressure. 8.1.2.10 Cardiovascular system – homeostasis, heart sounds. 8.1.2.11 Respiratory system- normal physiology and variations in health and diseases asphyxia and artificial respiration. 8.1.2.12 Endocrinology: thyroid, parathyroid, adrenals, pituitary, pancreas and sex hormones and pregnancy, endocrine regulation of blood sugar. 8.1.3 Applied Pathology

190

8.1.3.1 Inflammation and chemical mediators 8.1.3.2 Pathogenic mechanism at molecular level. 8.1.3.3 Cellular changes following injury. 8.1.3.4 Histopathology and pathogenesis of dental caries, periodontal disease, Oral mucosa, malignancies, HIV. 8.1.3.5 Oedema, thrombosis and embolism. 8.1.3.6 Hemorrhage and shock. 8.1.3.7 Neoplasia and metastasis. 8.1.3.8 Blood disorders. 8.1.3.9 Propagation of dental infection 8.1.4. Microbiology 8.1.4.1 Microbial flora of oral cavity. 8.1.4.2 Bacteriology of dental caries and periodontal disease 8.1.4.3 Methods of sterilization. 8.1.4.4 Virology of HIV, herpes and hepatitis. 8.1.4.5 Basic immunology - basic concepts of immune system in human body at cellular, humoral level, antigen-antibody system, hypersensitivity. 8.1.4.6 Autoimmune diseases. 8.1.5. Applied Pharmacology 8.1.5.1 Definitions, scope, relations with other branches, mode of action, bioassay, standardization, pharmacodynamics, pharmacokinetics. 8.1.5.2Chemotherapy of bacterial and viral infections. 8.1.5.3 Local anesthesia. 8.1.5.4 Analgesics and anti-inflammatory drugs. 8.1.5.5 Emergency drugs in dental practice. 8.1.5.6 Vitamins and haemopoietic drugs. 8.1.5.7 Hypnotics and tranquillizers and antipyretics. 8.1.5.8 Important hormones ACTH, cortisone, insulin, oral ant diabetics. 8.1.5.9 Drug addiction and tolerance. 8.1.5.10 Important pharmacological agents in connection with autonomic nervous system, adrenaline,noradrnelline, atropine. 8.1.5.11 Brief mention of antihypertensive drugs. 8.1.6. Oral Pathology 8.1.6.1 Histopathology and pathogenesis of dental caries, periodontal disease and oral mucosal lesions. 8.1.6.2 Disease affecting oral mucosa, teeth supporting tissues and jaws. 8.1.7. PHYSICAL AND SOCIAL ANTHROPOLOGY: 8.1.7.1 Introduction and definitions, 8.1.7.2 Evolution of human race 8.1.7.3 Various anthropological studies. 8.1.7.4 Appreciation of the biological basis of health and disease. 8.1.8. Research Methodology

191

8.1.8.1 Research methodology- definitions, types of research, designing protocol for research, objectivity in methodology, quantification, records and analysis, Quality of research, evidence hierarchy and levels of evidence. 8.1.8.2 Biostatistics: introduction, applications, uses,and limitations, collection of data, presentation of data, measures of central tendency, measures of dispersion ,methods of summarizing ,parametric and non parametric tests of significance, correlation and regression, multivariate analysis, sampling and sampling techniques-types, errors, bias, rail and calibration.. 8.1.9. Computers and Health informatics : Basic understanding of computers and its components, operating software(windows),Microsoft office, preparation of teaching materials like slides, project, multimedia knowledge, searching and retrieval of evidence .Basic operative skills in analysis of data and knowledge of multimedia. 8.2 PAPER II: PUBLIC HEALTH 8.2.1 Public Health 8.2.1.1 Introduction to Public Health. 8.2.1.2 Definition, concepts and philosophy of dental health. 8.2.1.3 History of public health in India and at international level. 8.2.1.4 Terminologies used in public health. 8.2.2 Health 8.2.2.1 Definition, concepts and philosophy of health. 8.2.2.2 Health indicators. 8.2.2.3 Community and its characteristics and relation to health. 8.2.3 Disease 8.2.3.1 Definition, concepts. 8.2.3.2 Multifactorial causation, natural history, risk factors. 8.2.3.3 Disease control, eradication, evaluation and causation, infection of specific diseases. 8.2.3.4 Vaccines and immunization. 8.2.4 General Epidemiology 8.2.4.1 Definition, aims and general principles, Multi factorial causation, natural history, risk factors. 8.2.4.2 Methods in epidemiology, descriptive, analytical, experimental and classic epidemiology of specific diseases. 8.2.4.3 Uses of epidemiology. 8.2.4.4 Duties of epidemiologist. 8.2.4.5 General idea of method of investigating chronic diseases mostly non-infectious in \nature, epidemic, endemic, and pandemic. 8.2.4.6 Ethical conversation in any study requirement. 8.2.4.7 New knowledge regarding ethical subjects. 8.2.4.8 Screening of diseases and standard procedures. 8.2.5 Public Health Education: 8.2.5.1 Definition, aims, principles of health education. 8.2.5.2 Health education, methods, models, contents, planning health education programs.

192

8.2.6 Environment and Health 8.2.6.1 Impact of important components of the environment on health. 8.2.6.2 Principles and methods of identification, evaluation and control of such health Hazards. 8.2.6.3 Pollution of air, water, soil, noise and food. 8.2.6.4 Water purification and international standards of water. 8.2.6.5 Domestic industrial toxins and ionizing radiation. 8.2.6.6 Occupational hazards. 8.2.6.7 Waste disposal- various methods and sanitation. 8.2.7 Public Health Practice and Administration System in India 8.2.8. Ethics and Jurisprudence: 8.2.8.1 Basic principles of law. 8.2.8.2 Contract laws- dentist - patient relationships and Legal forms of practice. 8.2.8.3 Dental malpractice. 8.2.8.4 Person identification through dentistry. 8.2.8.5 Legal protection for practicing dentist. 8.2.8.6 Consumer Protection Act. 8.2.9 Nutrition in Public Health 8.2.9.1 Study of science of nutrition and its application. 8.2.9.2 Nutritional surveys and their evaluation. 8.2.9.3 Influence of nutrition and diet on general and oral health (dental caries, periodontal disease and oral cancer). 8.2.9.4 Dietary constituents and cariogenecity. 8.2.9.5 Guidelines for nutrition. 8.2.10 Behavioral Sciences 8.2.10.1 Definition and introduction. 8.2.10.2 Sociology: social class, social group, family types, communities, social relationships And culture. 8.2.10.3 Psychology: definition, development of child psychology, anxiety, and phobia 8.2.10.4 Intelligence learning, motivation, personalities, fear dentist patient relationship, Modeling and experience 8.2.11 Hospital Administration 8.2.11.1 Departmental Maintenance And Organizational Structure. 8.2.11.2 Types of Practice. 8.2.11.3 Biomedical Waste Management 8.2.12 Health Care Delivery System 8.2.12.1 International oral health care delivery systems – Review. 8.2.12.2 Central and state system in general and oral health care delivery system. 8.2.12.3 National oral health policy. 8.2.12.4 National health programme. 8.2.12.5 Primary health care - concepts, oral health in Primary Health Center and its implications. 8.2.12.6 National and international health organizations. 8.2.12.7 Dentists Act 1928, Dental council of India, Ethics, Indian Dental Association. 8.2.12.8 Role of W.H.O. and Voluntary organizations in Health Care for the Community.

193

8.2.13 Oral Biology And Genetics 8.2.13.1 A Detailed Study Of cell structure 8.2.13.2 Introduction to genetics, gene structure, DNA,RNA 8.2.13.3 Genetic counseling, gene typing 8.2.13.4 Genetic approaches in the study of oral; disorders 8.2.13.5 Genetic engineering-answer to current health problems. 8.3 PAEPR III: DENTAL PUBLIC HEALTH 8.3.1 Dental Public Health 8.3.1.1 History 8.3.1.2 Definition and concepts of dental public health 8.3.1.3 Differences between clinical and community dentistry.. 8.3.1.4 Critical review of current practice. 8.3.1.5 Dental problems of specific population groups such as chronically ill, handicapped and institutionalized group. 8.3.2 Epidemiology Of Oral Diseases And Conditions 8.3.2.1 Dental caries, gingival, periodontal disease, malocclusion, dental flurosis , oral cancer, TMJ disorders and other oral health related problems. 8.3.3 Oral Survey Procedures 8.3.3.1 Planning. 8.3.3.2 Implementation. 8.3.3.3 WHO basic oral health methods 1997. 8.3.3.4 Indices for dental diseases and conditions. 8.3.3.5 Evaluation. 8. 3.4 Delivery of Dental Care 8.3.4.1 Dental person power - dental auxiliaries. 8.3.4.2 Dentist- population ratio. 8.3.4.3 Public dental care programs. 8.3.4.4 School dental health programs- Incremental and comprehensive dental care. 8.3.4.5 Private and group practice. 8.3.4.6 Oral health policy- National and international policy. 8.3.5 Payment for Dental Care 8.3.5.1 Prepayment. 8.3.5.2 Post-payment. 8.3.5.3 Reimbursement plans. 8.3.5.4 Voluntary agencies. 8.3.5.5 Health insurance. 8.3.6 Evaluation of Quality of Dental care 8.3.6.1 Problems in public and private oral health care system program. 8.3.6.2 Evaluation of quality of services and governmental control. 8.3.7 Preventive Dentistry 8.3.7.1 Levels of prevention. 8.3.7.2 Preventive oral health programs screening, health education and motivation. 8.3.7.3 Prevention of dental diseases-dental caries, periodontal diseases, oral cancer, malocclusion and

194

Dentofacial anomalies. 8.3.7.4 Role of dentist in prevention of oral diseases at individual and community level. 8.3.7.5 Fluoride. 8.3.7.5.1 History. 8.3.7.5.2 Mechanism of action. 8.3.7.5.3 Metabolism. 8.3.7.5.4 Fluoride toxicity. 8.3.7.5.5 Fluorosis. 8.3.7.5.6 Systemic and topical Fluorides. 8.3.7.5.7 Update regarding Fluorides. 8.3.7.5.8 Epidemiological studies. 8.3.7.5.9 Defluoridation techniques. 8.3.7.6. Plaque control measures 8.3.7.6.1 Health Education. 8.3.7.6.2 Personal oral hygiene. 8.3.7.6.3 Mechanical plaque control. 8.3.7.6.4 Chemical plaque control. 8.3.7.6.5 Dentifrices, mouth rinses. 8.3.7.7 Pit and fissure sealant, Atraumatic Restorative Treatment (ART). 8.3.7.8 Preventive oral health care for medically compromised individual. 8.3.7.9 Update on recent preventive modalities. 8.3.7.10 Caries vaccines. 8.3.7.11 Diet counseling. 8.3.8 Practice Management 8.3.8.1 Definition. 8.3.8.2 Principles of management of dental practice and types. 8.3.8.3 Organization and administration of dental practice. 8.3.8.4 Ethical and legal issues in dental practice. 8.4 PAPER IV: ESSAY Any contents from 8.1 to 8.3 can be included in essay

9. YEARLY PRACTICAL/CLINICAL SCHEDULE:

9.1 FIRST YEAR: 9.1.1 7 seminars in basic Science subject. A review of the various aspects of the topic of seminar with evidence based appraisal is presented 9.1.2 To conduct 5journal clubs. An evidence based journal club article is chosen either based on a clinical/ community

relevant question for which the PG seeks answer or allotted as an appraisal exercise to

the post- graduate student. Based on the study design in question, different appraisal

check- lists for different research designs are used for evidence- based critical

appraisal. The appraisals of all articles conclude with critical reflections i.e internal and

external validity of the research in question.

195

9.1.3 Library assignment on assigned topics 9.1.4 Submission of synopsis for dissertation within six months 9.1.5 Periodic review of dissertation at 2 monthly intervals. 9.1.6 Clinical training 9.1.6.1 Clinical assessment of patient: The case- history discussions for PG students also include evidence- based dentistry. This is done to promote evidence- based treatment planning, evidence- based appraisal of current public health policies and choice of materials as well as treatment modality. The candidate is encouraged to substantiate the treatment for the given patient seen as a representative of the community at large , based on the best available evidence relevant to the diagnosis and patient demographics. 9.1.6.2 Learning different criteria and instruments used in various oral indices (5 cases each)— 9.1.6.2.1 Oral Hygiene Index-Greene and Vermillion. 9.1.6.2.2 Oral Hygiene Index – Simplified. 9.1.6.2.3 DMF-DMF(T), DMF (S). 9.1.6.2.4 deft/s 9.1.6.2.5 Fluorosis Indices - Dean's Fluorosis Index, Tooth Surface Index for Fluorosis, Thylstrup and Fejerskov Index. 9.1.6.2.6 Community Periodontal Index of Treatment Needs (CPITN). 9.1.6.2.7 Plaque Index-Silness and Loe. 9.1.6.2.8 Recording WHO Oral Health Assessment Form -1997 9.1.6.2.9 Carrying out treatment (under comprehensive oral health care,-10 cases) 9.1.7 FIELD PROGRAMME 9.1.7.1 Carrying out school dental health education 9.1.7.2 . School based preventive programs 9.1.7.2.1 Topical fluoride application- sodium fluoride, stannous fluoride, acidulated phosphate fluoride, fluoride varnishes, fluoride mouth rinses. 9.1.7.2.2 Pit and fissure sealants, 9.1.7.2.3Minimal invasive treatment-preventive resin restorations(PRR),atraumatic restorative treatment. 9.1.7.3 Organizing and conducting dental camps both in rural and urban areas. 9.1.7.4 Visit to slum,water treatment plant,sewage treatment plant and milk dairy,public health institute, anti tobacco cell,primary health centre and submitting reports. 9.1.7.5 In addition the post graduate shall assist and guide the undergraduate students in their clinical and field programmes. 9.2 SECOND YEAR: 9.2.1 Seminars in public health and dental public health topics-7 A review of the various aspects of the topic of seminar with evidence based appraisal is presented 9.2.2 Conducting 5 journal clubs. An evidence based journal club article is chosen either based on a clinical/ community

relevant question for which the PG seeks answer or allotted as an appraisal exercise to

the post- graduate student. Based on the study design in question, different appraisal

196

check- lists for different research designs are used for evidence- based critical

appraisal. The appraisals of all articles conclude with critical reflections i.e internal and

external validity of the research in question.

9.2.3 Short term research project on assigned topics-2 9.2.4 Periodic review of dissertation at monthly reviews. 9.2.5 Clinical training and continuation of clinical training 9.2.5.1 Clinical assessment of patient The case- history discussions for PG students also include evidence- based dentistry. This is done to promote evidence- based treatment planning, evidence- based appraisal of current public health policies and choice of materials as well as treatment modality. The candidate is encouraged to substantiate the treatment for the given patient seen as a representative of the community at large , based on the best available evidence relevant to the diagnosis and patient demographics 9.2.5.2 Learning different criteria and instruments used in various oral indices 9.2.5.2.1 Oral Hygiene Index-Greene and Vermillion. 9.2.5.2.2 Oral Hygiene Index – Simplified. 9.2.5.2.3 DMF-DMF(T), DMF (S). 9.2.5.2.4 deft/s 9.2.5.2.5 Fluorosis Indices - Dean's Fluorosis Index, Tooth Surface Index for Fluorosis, Thylstrup and Fejerskov Index. 9.2.5.2.6 Community Periodontal Index of Treatment Needs (CPITN). 9.2.5.2.7 Plaque Index-Silness and Loe. 9.2.5.2.8 Recording WHO Oral Health Assessment Form -1997 9.2.5.2.9 Carrying out treatment (under comprehensive oral health care,-10 cases) 9.2.6 FIELD PROGRAMME AND CONTINUATION OF FIELD PROGRAMMES 9.2.6.1 Carrying out school dental health education. 9.2.6.2 School based preventive programs 9.2.6.2.1Topical fluoride application- sodium fluoride, stannous fluoride, acidulated phosphate fluoride, fluoride varnishes, fluoride mouth rinses. 9.2.6.2.2 Pit and fissure sealants, 9.2.6.2.3 Minimal invasive treatment-preventive resin restorations (PRR), atraumatic restorative treatment. 9.2.6.2.4 Organizing and conducting dental camps both in rural and urban areas. 9.2.6.3 Assessing oral health status of various target groups like school children, expectant mothers, handicapped, under privileged and geriatric populations. Planning dental man power and financing dental health care of the above group. 9.2.6.4 Application of the following preventive measures in the clinic-10cases, Topical fluoride application sodium fluoride, stannous fluoride, acidulated phosphate fluoride, fluoride varnishes, Pit and fissure sealants. 9.2.6.5 Planning total health care for school children in an adopted school 9.2.6.5.1 Periodic surveying of school children 9.2.6.5.2 Incremental dental care 9.2.6.5.3 Comprehensive dental care 9.2.6.6 Organizing and conducting community oral health surveys for all oral conditions-3 surveys

197

9.2.6.7 In addition the post graduate shall assist and guide the undergraduate students in their clinical and field programs. 9.2.6.8 To take lecture classes- minimum 2 for under graduates in order to learn teaching methods on assigned topic. The post- graduates are guided to teach and substantiate through evidence in Evidence

based pedagogy sessions. Providing the UG students with knowledge supported by

evidence of best available quality/order is encouraged.

9.3 THIRD YEAR: 9.3.1 Seminars on recent advances in preventive dentistry and dental public health A review of the various aspects of the topic of seminar with evidence based appraisal is presented. 9.3.2 Critical evaluation of scientific articles -5 articles An evidence based journal club article is chosen either based on a clinical/ community

relevant question for which the PG seeks answer or allotted as an appraisal exercise to

the post- graduate student. Based on the study design in question, different appraisal

check- lists for different research designs are used for evidence- based critical

appraisal. The appraisals of all articles conclude with critical reflections i.e internal and

external validity of the research in question.

9.3.3 Completion and submission of dissertation. 9.3.4 Clinical training 9.3.4.1 Clinical assessment of patient The case- history discussions for PG students also include evidence- based dentistry. This is done to promote evidence- based treatment planning, evidence- based appraisal of current public health policies and choice of materials as well as treatment modality. The candidate is encouraged to substantiate the treatment for the given patient seen as a representative of the community at large , based on the best available evidence relevant to the diagnosis and patient demographics 9.3.4.2 Learning different criteria and instruments used in various oral indices-5 cases each 9.3.4.2.1 Oral Hygiene Index-Greene and Vermillion. 9.3.4.2.2 Oral Hygiene Index – Simplified. 9.3.4.2.3 DMF-DMF(T), DMF (S). 9.3.4.2.4 deft/s. 9.3.4.2.5 Fluorosis Indices - Dean's Fluorosis Index, Tooth Surface Index for Fluorosis, Thylstrup and Fejerskov Index. 9.3.4.2.6 Community Periodontal Index of Treatment Needs (CPITN). 9.3.4.2.7 Plaque Index-Silness and Loe. 9.3.4.2.8 Recording WHO Oral Health Assessment Form -1997 9.3.4.2.9 Carrying out treatment (under comprehensive oral health care,-10 cases) 9.3.4.3 Carrying out school dental health education. 9.3.4.4 School based preventive programs 9.3.4.4.1 Topical fluoride application- sodium fluoride, stannous fluoride, acidulated phosphate fluoride, fluoride varnishes, fluoride mouth rinses.

198

9.3.4.4.2 Pit and fissure sealants 9.3.4.4.3 Minimal invasive treatment-preventive resin restorations (PRR),atraumatic restorative treatment. 9.3.4.5 To take lecture classes ( Minimum2) for under graduate students in order to learn teaching methods(pedagogy) on assigned topics. The post- graduates are guided to teach and substantiate through evidence in Evidence

based pedagogy sessions. Providing the UG students with knowledge supported by

evidence of best available quality/order is encouraged.

9.3.4.6 Exercise on solving community health problems 9.3.4.7 Application of the following preventive measures in clinic-10 cases each 9.3.4.7.1 Topical fluoride application- sodium fluoride, stannous fluoride, acidulated phosphate fluoride, fluoride varnishes, fluoride mouth rinses. 9.3.4.7.2 Pit and fissure sealants, 9.3.4.8 Dental health education training of school teachers, social workers, health workers, posting at dental satellite centre/nodal centers. 9.3.4.9 In addition the post graduate shall assist and guide the undergraduate students in their clinical and field programs. 9.3.5.0 The student should submit the completed dissertation 6 months prior to the examination. Before completing the 3rd year M.D.S, a student must have attended two national conferences, presented two scientific papers, publication of 2 scientific articles in journals. Minimum Requirements for each student: 1. Journal Discussions – 5 per year 2. Seminars – 7 per year 3. Clinical case discussions – 5 per year 4. Lectures for undergraduates – 2 per year 5. Epidemiological indices-55 per year 6. Comprehensive cases- 10 per year

199

10. SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS THEORY

Paper I : Applied Basic Sciences

(Including Evidence- based dentistry)

Paper II: Public Health (Including evidence based appraisal of

health promotion strategies)

Paper III: Dental Public Health (Including recent advances and

evidence- based recommendations)

Paper IV: Essay (Should include substantiation with scientifically

appraised evidence wherever applicable)

FULLY MARKED QUESTION PAPER PATTERN SUBJECT WISE/ PAPER WISE FOR PG THEORY: (OUT OF 75 MARKS FOR EACH PAPER: TOTAL MAX MARKS: 4 x75= 300) Question-1. Long Question 20

Marks

Question-2. Long Question 20 Marks

Question-3.Short Notes (5 questions of 7 marks each) 7X5=35

Marks

PRACTICALS:(OUT OF 300 MARKS)

Detailed case history and comprehensive treatment planning with evidence- based

substantiation for primary preventive interventions (50 MARKS)

Short case history/preventive procedure (According to evidence- based protocol) (50

MARKS)

Critical evaluation of journal article (with critical appraisal of evidence check- list) (50

MARKS)

200

Community oriented problem solving exercise (with Evidence- based solutions) (50

MARKS)

Pedagogue (Evidence based Pedagogy exercise) (20 MARKS)

Viva- voce (80 MARKS): as per the university rules

201

11. LIST OF RECOMMENDED BOOKS

1. Dentistry dental practice and the community. Stiffler 2. Primary preventive dentistry. Harroson 3. Community dental health. Jong 4. Principles of dental public health. Dunning 5. Dental public health; An introduction to community dentistry, Slack 6. Fluorides in dentistry. Fejerskov 7. Fluorides and dental caries. Tiwari. 8. Dental health education. WHO 9. Text book of preventive and social medicine. Mahajan 10.Text book of preventive and social medicine. Park 11.Metabolism and toxicity of fluoride. Whitford 12.Epidemiology, biostatistics and preventive dentistry. Jekel. 13.Introduction to oral preventive medicine. Muhlman. 14.Text book of preventive medicine. Stallard 15.Handbook of dental jurisprudence and risk management. Pollack 16.Fluorides and human health. WHO 17.Appropriate use of fluorides for human health. Murray 18.Community health. Green 19.Prevention of dental diseases. Murray. 20.Health research design and methodology. Okolo 21.Oxford text book of public health. Holand 22.Guidelines for drinking water quality 23.Dentistry dental practice and community. Burt and eklund 24.Biostatistics; methods and techniques. Mahajan. 25.Laws and ethics in dentistry. Shear 26.Epidemiology, biostatistics and preventive medicine. Katz 27.Fluorides in caries prevention. Murray. 28.Preventive dentistry. Forrest 29.Planning oral health services. WHO 30.Community oral health. Pine 31.Oral health survey; Basic methods. WHO 32.Essentials of preventive and community dentistry. Soben Peter 33.Text book of community dentistry. Joseph John. 34.Text book of preventive and community dentistry. Hiremath

BRANCH VIII

PAEDODONTICS & PREVENTIVE DENTISTRY

202

DEFINITIION:

Pediatric dentistry is age defined specialty that provides both primary and

comprehensive preventive and therapeutic oral health care needs of children and

adolescents, including those with special health care needs.

1. AIMS

1.3 To train dental graduates as to ensure higher competence in both general and

special areas of Paedodontics by means of gathering & implementing highest

levels of available evidence.

1.4 To prepare a candidate for teaching, research and clinical abilities, including

prevention and after care in Paedodontics by means of gathering & implementing

highest levels of available evidence.

2. OBJECTIVES:

At the end of 3 years of training the candidate should be able to:

2.1 Create not only a good oral health in the child but also a good citizen tomorrow.

2.2 Instill a positive attitude and behavior in children.

2.3 Understand the principles of prevention and preventive dentistry right from birth to

adolescence.

2.4 Prevent and intercept developing malocclusion.

2.5 Able to gather and incorporate the highest levels of evidence pertaining to any

case he/she comes across.

Course 8: Paedodontics & preventive dentistry (Theory & Practical)

Outcomes: The student should be able to:

Obtain proper clinical history, methodological examination of the child patient, perform

essential diagnostic procedures and interpret them, and arrive at a reasonable

diagnosis and treat appropriately. Be competent to treat dental diseases which are

occurring in child patient. Manage to repair and restore the lost / tooth structure to

maintain harmony between both hard and soft tissues of the oral cavity. Manage the

disabled children effectively and efficiently, tailored to the needs of individual

requirement and conditions. To acquire skills in managing efficiently life threatening

conditions with emphasis on basic life support measure. After completion of this course

the students will come to know about the extensive knowledge of computers

applications in pharmaceutical research and development specially in Quality-by-Design

in pharmaceutical development, Computational Modeling of Drug Disposition,

203

Computer-aided formulation development, computer-aided biopharmaceutical

characterization, computer simulations in pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics,

application of computers in clinical development and Artificial intelligence (AI), robotics

and computational fluid dynamics.

3. KNOWLEDGE

3.21 The candidate should possess knowledge of applied basic and systemic medical

sciences on human anatomy, embryology, histology, applied in general and

particularly to head and neck, Physiology & Biochemistry, Pathology and

Microbiology, Virology, Health and Diseases Nutrition, Behavioral science, age

changes, genetics, Immunology, Congenital defects and syndrome and

Anthropology, Bioengineering, Bio-medical and Biological Principle and

applications to Dental material science.

3.22 Ability to diagnose and plan treatment for patients requiring a Paedodontic

therapy using the latest & best feasible evidence.

3.23 Ability to read and interpret a radiograph and other investigations for the purpose

of diagnosis and treatment plan.

3.24 Should have essential knowledge on ethics, laws and Jurisprudence, forensic

odontology and gathering the best evidence in Pedodontics.

3.25 General health conditions and emergency as related to Paedodontic treatment.

3.26 Identify cases, which are outside the area of his/her specialty/ competence and

refer those to appropriate specialists.

3.27 Advice regarding case management involving surgical, interim treatment etc.

3.28 To have acquired adequate knowledge and understanding of applied basic and

systematic medical science knowledge in general and particular to head and

neck.

3.29 Should attend continuing education programs, seminars and conferences related

to Paedodontics, thus updating himself.

3.30 Teach and guide his/her team, colleague and other students based on evidence

based dentistry.

3.31 Should be able to use information technology tools and carry out research both

basic and clinical, with the aims of publishing his/her work and presenting his/her

work at various scientific forums with best possible evidence.

3.32 Should have essential knowledge of personal hygiene, infection control,

prevention of cross infection and safe disposal of waste, keeping in view the risks

of transmission of Hepatitis and HIV.

3.33 Should have the ability to plan and establish Paedodontics clinic/hospital

teaching department and practice management.

204

3.34 Should have a sound knowledge for evidence based application of pharmacology

effects of drugs on oral tissue and systems of body and for medically

compromised patients.

3.35 The postgraduates will be able to provide evidence based Paedodontic therapy

for patients with competence and working knowledge with understanding of

applied medical, behavioral and clinical science that are beyond the treatment

skills of the general BDS graduate and MDS graduate of other specialties, to

demonstrate evaluative and judgment skills in making appropriate decisions

regarding prevention, treatment, after care and referral to deliver comprehensive

care to patients.

4. SKILLS:

4.1 Obtain proper clinical history, collection of evidence related to the ailment,

methodological examination of the child patient, perform essential diagnostic

procedures and interpret them, and arrive at a reasonable diagnosis and treat

appropriately.

4.2 Be competent to treat dental diseases which are occurring in child patient.

4.3 Manage to repair and restore the lost / tooth structure to maintain harmony

between both hard and soft tissues of the oral cavity.

4.4 Manage the disabled children effectively and efficiently, tailored to the needs of

individual requirement and conditions.

4.5 To acquire skills in managing efficiently life threatening conditions with emphasis

on basic life support measure.

5. ATTITUDES:

5.1 Develop an attitude to adopt ethical principles in all aspects of Pedodontic

practice.

5.2 Professional honesty and integrity are to be fostered

5.3 Treatment care is to be delivered irrespective of the social status, cast, creed,

and religion of the patients based on evidence based dentistry..

5.4 Willingness to share the knowledge and clinical experience with professional

colleagues.

5.5 Willingness to adopt, after a critical assessment, new methods and techniques of

Paedodontic management developed from time to time. Based on scientific

research which is in the best interest of the child patient.

5.6 Respect child patient`s rights and privileges, including child patients right to

information and right to seek a second opinion.

5.7 Develop an attitude to seek opinion from allied medical and dental specialties, as

and when required.

205

6. COMMUNICATIVE ABILITIES:

6.3 Develop communication skills, in particular with the child patient and also with the

parents, to explain treatment option available in management.

6.4 Provide leadership and get the best out of his group in a congenial working

atmosphere.

6.5 Should be able to communicate in simple understandable language with the

patient to explain the principles of Paedodontics to the patient. He should be able

to guide and counsel the patient with regard to various treatment modalities

available.

6.6 Develop the ability to communicate with professional colleagues through various

media like Internet, e-mail, videoconference etc. to render the best possible

treatment.

7. COURSE CONTENTS:

The candidates shall under go training for 3 academic years with satisfactory

attendance above 80% for each year.

7.1 The course includes Applied basic sciences, Clinical Paedodontics, and

Preventive & community dentistry as applied to pediatric dentistry, epidemiology

and demographic studies, research and teaching skills.

7.2 Ability to prevent, diagnose and treat with after care for all patients for control of

diseases and / or treatment related syndromes with patient satisfaction for

restoring functions of stomatognathic system based on the best available

evidence.

7.3 The program outline addresses the knowledge, procedural and operative skills

needed in Masters Degree in Pedodontics. A minimum of 3 years of formal

training through a graded system of education as specified will enable the trainee

to achieve Masters Degree in Paedodontics and have the necessary skills /

knowledge to update themselves with advancements incorporating evidence

based dentistry in the field. The course content has been identified and

categorized as Essential knowledge as given below.

8. SYLLABUS DISTRIBUTION:

Paper I - Applied basic sciences

Paper II- Clinical Paedodontics

Paper III- Preventive and community dentistry as applied to Paediatric Dentistry

Paper IV- Essay

8.2 APPLIED BASIC SCIENCES:

206

8.1.1. Applied Anatomy & genetics

8.1.1.1. Development of teeth and occlusion

8.1.1.2. Craniofacial bones and their growth

8.1.1.2.1. Skull

8.1.1.2.2. Maxilla

8.1.1.2.3. Mandible

8.1.1.3. Comparison of adult and fetal skull

8.1.1.4. Muscles of mastication and their development

8.1.1.5. Muscles of face

8.1.1.6. Triangle of neck

8.1.1.7. Cranial nerves and their applied anatomy (5th ,7th & 9th nerves)

8.1.1.8. Arteries of face

8.1.1.9. Parotid region

8.1.1.10. Submandibular region

8.1.1.11. Temporal and infratemporal fossa

8.1.1.12. Nose and pharynx

8.1.1.13. Development of face and tongue

8.1.1.14. Chromosomes

8.1.1.15. Applied aspect of genetics

8.1.1.16. Orofacial syndromes

8.1.2 Applied Physiology

8.1.2.1. Blood

8.1.2.2. Endocrine

8.1.2.3. Saliva

8.1.2.4. Protein, carbohydrates, lipid metabolism 8.1.2.5. Immunity 8.1.2.6. Pathways of pain 8.1.2.7. Cardio vascular system of children 8.1.2.8. Respiratory system of children 8.1.2.9. Excretory system

8.1.3 Applied Pathology 8.1.3.1. Inflammation - acute and chronic 8.1.3.2. Healing and repair of oral wounds 8.1.3.3. Hypersensitivity and allergies 8.1.3.4. Hemorrhage, shock, dehydration, reaction of body to injury 8.1.3.5. Circulatory disturbances and hypertensions 8.1.3.6. Pathology of viral, bacterial and fungal infections 8.1.3.7. Common diseases of bone 8.1.3.8. General biology of tumors spread of malignant tumors

207

8.1.3.9. Clinical pathology comprising of anemia and their laboratory investigations, blood disorders including leukemia, bleeding disorders and their investigations

8.1.4 Nutrition and Dietics:

8.1.4.1. Diet and dental caries

8.1.4.2. Nutritional requirements affecting oral health in females, healthy pregnancy

and lactation

8.1.4.3. Nutritional requirements through the life cycle and eating habits affecting

oral health

8.1.4.4. Dietary recommendations and guide lines for growth

8.1.4.5. Toddler and preschool children

8.1.4.6. Children with special needs

8.1.4.7. School age children

8.1.4.8. Adolescents

8.1.4.9. Vitamins, water and minerals required for oral soft tissues, calcified

structures and salivary glands

8.1.5 Growth & Development:

8.1.5.1. Prenatal and Postnatal development of cranium

8.1.5.2. Face, jaws, teeth and supporting structures

8.1.5.3. Chronology of dental development and development of occlusion

8.1.5.4. Dimensional changes in dental arches

8.1.5.5. Cephalometric evaluation of growth

8.1.6 Microbiology & Immunology as related to Oral Diseases in Children:

8.1.6.1. Basic concepts

8.1.6.2. Immune system in human body

8.1.6.3. Auto Immune diseases

8.1.6.4. Histopathology

8.1.6.5. Pathogenesis

8.1.6.6. Immunology of dental caries

8.1.6.7. Periodontal diseases

8.1.6.8. Tumors

8.1.6.9. Oral Mucosal lesions

8.1.7 Dental Plaque:

8.1.7.1. Definition

8.1.7.2. Initiation

8.1.7.3. Pathogenesis

208

8.1.7.4. Biochemistry

8.1.7.5. Morphology & Metabolism

8.2 CLINICAL PAEDODONTICS

8.2.1 Sedation

8.2.1.1. Conscious Sedation

8.2.1.2. Deep Sedation

8.2.1.3. General Anesthesia in Paediatric Dentistry

8.2.1.4. Drugs used in sedation and general anesthesia

8.2.1.5. Synergic & antagonistic actions of various drugs used in Children

8.2.2 Gingival & Periodontal diseases in children:

8.2.2.1. Normal gingiva& periodontium in children

8.2.2.2. Gingival & Periodontal diseases – etiology and pathogenesis

8.2.2.3. Prevention & management

8.2.3 Pediatric Operative dentistry:

8.2.3.1. Principal of Operative Dentistry along with modifications of materials/past,

current & latest including tooth colored materials

8.2.3.2. Modifications required for cavity preparation in primary and young

permanent teeth

8.2.3.3. Various Isolation Techniques

8.2.3.4. Restorations of decayed primary, young permanent and permanent teeth in

children using various restorative materials like glass ionomers, composites,

silver amalgam & latest material (gallium)

8.2.3.5. Stainless steel, polycarbonate & resin crowns / Veneers & fibre post

systems

8.2.4 Pediatric Endodontics:

8.2.4.1 Primary Dentition:

8.2.4.1.1. Diagnosis of pulpal diseases and their management

8.2.4.1.2. Pulp capping

8.2.4.1.3. Pulpotomy

8.2.4.1.4. Pulpectomy

8.2.4.1.5. Materials & Methods, Controversies & recent concepts

8.2.4.2 Young permanent teeth and permanent teeth:

8.2.4.2.1. Pulp capping

209

8.2.4.2.2. Pulpotomy

8.2.4.2.3. Apexogenesis

8.2.4.2.4. Apexification

8.2.4.2.5. Concepts, Techniques and Materials used for different procedures

8.2.4.3 Recent advances in Pediatric diagnosis and endodontics

8.2.5 Prosthetic consideration in Pediatric dentistry:

8.2.6 Traumatic Injuries in Children:

8.2.6.1. Classifications & reaction of teeth to trauma

8.2.6.2. Management of Traumatized teeth with latest concepts

8.2.6.3. Management of jaw fracture in children.

8.2.7 Interceptive Orthodontics:

8.2.7.1 Concepts of occlusion and esthetics:

8.2.7.1.1. Structure and function of all anatomic components of occlusion.

8.2.7.1.2. Mechanics of articulations.

8.2.7.1.3. Recording of masticator function

8.2.7.1.4. Diagnosis of Occlusal dysfunction

8.2.7.1.5. Relationship of TMJ anatomy and pathology and related

neuromuscular physiology

8.2.7.2 A comprehensive review of the local and systemic factors in the causation

of malocclusion

8.2.7.3 Recognition and management of normal and abnormal developmental

occlusions

in primary, mixed and permanent dentitions in children (Occlusal guidance)

8.2.7.4 Biology of tooth movement:

8.2.7.4.1. A comprehensive review of the principles of teeth movement.

8.2.7.4.2. Review of contemporary literature. Histopathology of bone and

periodontal ligament

8.2.7.4.3. Molecular and ultra cellular consideration in tooth movement

8.2.7.5 Myofunctional appliances:

8.2.7.5.1. Basic principles

8.2.7.5.2. Contemporary appliances

8.2.7.5.3. Design & fabrication

8.2.7.6 Removable appliances:

8.2.7.6.1. Basic principles

8.2.7.6.2. Contemporary appliances

210

8.2.7.6.3. Design & Fabrication

8.2.7.7 Case selection & diagnosis in interceptive Orthodontics (cephalometrics,

image processing, tracing, radiation hygiene, video imaging & advanced

cephalometric techniques)

8.2.7.8 Space Management: Etiology, diagnosis of space problems, analysis,

biomechanics, planned extraction in interceptive orthodontics

8.2.8 Oral Habits in Children:

8.2.8.1 Definition, etiology & classification

8.2.8.2 Clinical features of digit sucking, tongue thrusting, mouth breathing &

various other secondary habits

8.2.8.3 Management of oral habits in children

8.2.9 Dental care of Children with special needs: Definition, etiology, classification,

behavioral, clinical features & management of children with:

8.2.9.1 Physically handicapping conditions

8.2.9.2 Mentally compromising conditions

8.2.9.3 Medically compromising conditions

8.2.9.4 Genetic disorders

8.2.10 Oral manifestations of Systemic conditions in children & their Management 8.2.11 Management of Minor Oral Surgical Procedures in Children 8.2.12 Dental Radiology as related to Pediatric Dentistry 8.2.13 Pediatric Oral Medicine &Clinical Pathology:

8.2.13.1 Recognition & Management of developmental dental anomalies

8.2.13.2 Teething disorders

8.2.13.3 Stomatological conditions

8.2.13.4 Mucosal lesions

8.2.13.5 Viral infections etc.

8.2.14 Congenital Abnormalities in Children: 8.2.14.1 Definition

211

8.2.14.2 Classification 8.2.14.3 Clinical features & Management

8.2.15 Dental Emergencies in Children and their Management 8.2.16 Dental Materials used in Pediatric Dentistry 8.2.17 Case History Recording:

8.2.17.1 Outline of principles of examination 8.2.17.2 Diagnosis & treatment planning

8.2.18 Setting up of Pedodontics & Preventive Dentistry Clinic 8.3 PREVENTIVE AND COMMUNITY DENTISTRY AS APPLIED TO PEDIATRIC

DENTISTRY

8.3.1 Child Psychology:

8.3.1.1 Development & Classification of behavior

8.3.1.2 Personality

8.3.1.3 Intelligence in children

8.3.1.4 Stages of psychological child development

8.3.1.5 Fear & anxiety

8.3.1.6 Apprehension & its management

8.3.1.7 Theories of child psychology

8.3.2 Behavior Management:

8.3.2.1 Non-pharmacological

8.3.2.2 Pharmacological methods

8.3.3 Child Abuse & Dental neglect:

8.3.3.1 Definition and types of child abuse and neglect

8.3.3.2 Identification and management of child abuse and neglect

8.3.4 Preventive Pedodontics:

8.3.4.1 Concepts

8.3.4.2 Chair side preventive measures for dental diseases

8.3.4.3 High-risk caries including rampant & extensive caries – recognition, features

& preventive management

8.3.4.4 Pit and fissure sealants

8.3.4.5 Oral hygiene measures

8.3.4.6 Correlation of brushing with dental caries and periodontal diseases

8.3.4.7 Diet & nutrition as related to dental caries

8.3.4.8 Diet counseling

212

8.3.5 Cariology: 8.3.5.1. Historical background

8.3.5.2. Definition, etiology & pathogenesis

8.3.5.3. Caries pattern in primary, young permanent and permanent teeth in

children.

8.3.5.4. Rampant caries, early childhood caries and extensive caries. Definition,

etiology, pathogenesis, clinical features, complications & management.

8.3.5.5. Role of diet and nutrition in Dental Caries

8.3.5.6. Dietary modifications & diet counseling

8.3.5.7. Subjective & objective method of caries detection with emphasis on caries

activity tests, caries prediction, caries susceptibility & their clinical

applications.

8.3.6 Preventive Dentistry: 8.3.6.1. Definition 8.3.6.2. Principles & Scope 8.3.6.3. Types of prevention 8.3.6.4. Different preventive measures used in Paediatric Dentistry including fissure

sealants and caries vaccine

8.3.7 Dental Health Education & School Dental Health Programmers 8.3.8 Dental health concepts:

8.3.8.1. Effects of civilization and environment 8.3.8.2. Dental Health delivery system 8.3.8.3. Public Health measures related to children along with principles of Paediatric Preventive Dentistry

8.3.9 Fluorides: 8.3.9.1 Historical background 8.3.9.2 Systemic & topical fluorides 8.3.9.3 Mechanism of action 8.3.9.4 Toxicity & management 8.3.9.5 Defluoridation techniques

8.3.10 Medico legal aspects in Paediatric Dentistry with emphasis on informed

consent 8.3.11 Counseling in Paediatric Dentistry 8.3.12 Epidemiology:

8.3.12.1 Concepts 8.3.12.2 Methods of recording & evaluation of various oral diseases

213

8.3.12.3 Various national & global trends of epidemiology of oral diseases

8.3.13 Comprehensive Infant Oral Health Care 8.3.14 Principles of Bio-Statistics & Research Methodology and Understanding of

Computers & Photography 8.3.15 Comprehensive cleft care management with emphasis on counseling:

8.3.15.1 Feeding, naso-alveolar bone remodeling 8.3.15.2 Speech rehabilitation

8.3.16 Emerging concepts in Paediatric Dentistry, scope of lasers / minimum

invasive procedures 8.4 ESSAYS:

Any contents from 8.1 to 8.3 can be included in essay

9. YEARLY PRACTICAL/CLINICAL SCHEDULE:

9.1. FIRST YEAR-FIRST TERM-PRECLINICAL EXERCISES

(One on Each Exercise)

9.1.1 Carving of all deciduous teeth 9.1.2 Basic wire bending exercises 9.1.3 Fabrication of

9.1.3.1 Maxillary bite plate / Hawley`s 9.1.3.2 Maxillary expansion screw appliance 9.1.3.3 Canine retractor appliance 9.1.3.4 All habit breaking appliances

9.1.3.4.1 Removable type 9.1.3.4.2 Fixed type 9.1.3.4.3 Partially fixed and removable

9.1.3.5. Two myofunctional appliances 9.1.3.6. Feeding appliances

9.1.4. Basic soldering exercise I – making of a lamp post of stainless steel wire pieces of different gauges soldered on either side of heavy gauge main post.

9.1.5. Fabrication of space maintainers

9.1.5.1 Removable type: 9.1.5.1.1 Unilateral Non – Functional space maintainer 9.1.5.1.2 Bilateral Non – Functional space maintainer 9.1.5.1.3 Unilateral functional space maintainer 9.1.5.1.4 Bilateral functional space maintainer

9.1.5.2. Space regainers:

9.1.5.2.1 Hawley`s appliances with Helical space regainer

214

9.1.5.2.2 Removable appliance with Slingshot space regainer 9.1.5.2.3 Removable appliance with dumbell space regainer

9.1.5.3. Fixed Space maintainers:

9.1.5.3.1 Band & long loop space maintainer 9.1.5.3.2 Band & short loop space maintainer 9.1.5.3.3 Mayne`s space maintainer 9.1.5.3.4 Transpalatal arch space maintainer 9.1.5.3.5 Nance Palatal holding arch 9.1.5.3.6 Nance Palatal holding arch with canine stoppers 9.1.5.3.7 Gerber space regainer 9.1.5.3.8 Distal shoe appliance

9.1.5.3.8.1 Active space maintainers

9.1.5.3.8.2 For guiding the eruption of first permanent molar

9.1.5.3.8.3 Arch holding device

9.1.5.3.8.4 Functional space maintainer

9.1.6. Basics for spot welding exercise 9.1.7. Collection of extracted deciduous and permanent teeth

9.1.7.1 Sectioning of the teeth at various levels and planes 9.1.7.2 Drawing of section and shapes of pulp 9.1.7.3 Phantom head exercises: performing ideal cavity preparation for various

restorative materials for both Deciduous and permanent teeth 9.1.7.4 Performing pulpotomy, root canal treatment and apexification procedures

9.1.7.4.1 Tooth preparation and fabrication of various temporary and permanent restorations on fractured anterior teeth.

9.1.7.4.2 Preparation of teeth for various types of crowns, laminates / veneers 9.1.7.4.3 Bonding & banding exercise

9.1.8. Performing of behavioral rating and IQ tests for children 9.1.9. Computation of:

9.1.9.1 Caries index and performing various caries activity tests 9.1.9.2 Oral Hygiene Index 9.1.9.3 Periodontal Index 9.1.9.4 Fluororis Index

9.1.10 Surgical Exercises: 9.1.10.1 Splinting 9.1.10.2 Wiring 9.1.10.3 Suturing 9.1.11 Radiographic Exercises:

215

9.1.11.1 Taking of periapical, occlusal, bitewing radiographs of children 9.1.11.2 Developing and processing of films, thus obtained

9.1.11.3 Tracing of solt tissue dental and skeletal landmarks as observed on cephalometric radiographs and drawing of various plan\es and angles, further interpretation of Cephalometric radiograph s is analysis.

9.1.11.4 Mixed dentition cast analysis 9.1.12 Library assignment incorporating evidence based dentistry. 9.1.13 Synopsis of the main dissertation 9.2 CLINICAL WORK REQUIREMENTS FROM 7 TO 36 MONTHS

The following is the minimum requirement to be completed before the candidate can be considered eligible to appear in the final M.D.S Examination:

No. Clinical Work Total 7 - 12

Months 13 - 24 Months

25 - 36 Months

1. Behavior Management of different age groups children with complete records.

17 2 10 5

2.

Detailed Case evaluation with complete records, treatment planning and presentation of cases with chair side and discussion

17 2 10 5

3.

Step-by-step chair side preventive dentistry scheduled for high risk children with gingival and periodontal diseases & dental caries

11 1 5 5

4

Practical application of Preventive dentistry concepts in a class of 35-50 children & dental health education & motivation.

7 1 4 2

5. Pediatric operative dentistry with application of recent concepts. (a). Management of Dental Caries

(I) Class I 50 30 10 10

(II) Class II 100 40 50 10

(III) Other restorations 100 20 50 30

(b). Management of traumatized anterior teeth

15 04 06 05

(i) Regenerativeendodontics 02 01 01

(c ) Aesthetic restorations

25 05 10 10

(d). Pediatric endodontic procedures

• Deciduous teeth Pulpotomy / Pulpectomy

150

30

50

70

216

• Permanent molars

• Permanent incisors

• Apexification & apexogenesis

20 15 20

03 02 02

07 03 08

10 10 10

6. Stainless Steel Crowns 50 10 20 20

7. Other crowns 05 01 02 02

8. Fixed : Space maintainers Habit breaking appliances

30 08 12 10

9. Removable : Space Maintainers Habit breaking appliances

20 05 07 08

10. Functional Appliances 05 01 02 02

11.

Preventive measures like fluoride applications & Pit & fissure sealant applications with complete follow-up and diet counseling

20

08

08

04

12. Special Assignments (i) School Dental Health Programs

03 01 01 01

(ii) Camps etc., 02 01 01 -

13. Pharmacological behavioral management

04 01

assistance 01 02

9.3 Library usage

9.4 Laboratory usage

9.5 Continuing Dental Health Programme

(The figures given against Sl. No. 4 to 12 are the minimum number of recommended

procedures to be performed)

9.6 MONITORING LEARNING PROGRESS:

It is essential to monitor the learning progress to each candidate through continuous

appraisal and regular assessment. It not only helps teacher to evaluate students, but

also students to evaluate themselves. The monitoring to be done by the staff of the

department based on participation of students in various teaching / learning activities

incorporating the best levels of evidence available in any topic. It may be structured and

assessment be done using checklist that assess various aspects. Checklists are given

in Section IV

9.6.1. Evidence- based Seminars: all the seminars are presented incorporating the

highest levels of evidence available in that particular topic. It is made mandatory for post

217

graduate students to incorporate a minimum of two highest levels of evidence studies

apart from the vast amount of references cited in the seminar.

9.6.2. Evidence- based Journal Clubs: all the post graduate students are

encouraged to select and present only those kind of articles which contains good

amount of evidence and only from reputed journals. Along with the article chosen for

presentation it has been made mandatory to incorporate a minimum of two related

studies with highest levels of evidence as separate slides. The students have to

critically appraise all the journal club presentations in a designated standard uniform

format in the form of check list which has to be verified and attested by a staff member

and maintain the record of the same.

9.6.3. Evidence based case presentations: The case- history presentations by post

graduate students has to be Compulsorily evidence based and all the staff members are

involved in the discussion actively so that the best possible treatment is provided to the

patients based on the best available evidence after due deliberations and consensus.

9.6.4. Evidence based clinical decision making: The post graduate students are

encouraged to diagnose the clinical problems and to determine the best available

treatment plan including the type of latest materials and techniques available based on

the substantial evidence and the available resources in the department after discussion

with the staff member. Standard protocols incorporating latest evidence are followed for

treating the clinical cases in the department.

10. SCHEME OF EXAMINATION:

10.1 Theory Exams: 300 marks

Written examination shall consist of four question papers each of three hour

duration. Total marks for each paper will be 75. Paper I, II and III shall consist of two

long questions carrying 20 marks each and 5 short essay questions carrying 7 marks

each. Paper IV will be on Essay. Each paper will be inclusive of questions with

218

applicability of evidence based practice. Questions on recent advances may be asked

in any or all the papers. Distribution of topics for each paper will be as follows:*

PAPER –I: Applied Basic Sciences: 75 marks

PAPER–II: Clinical Paedodontics: 75 marks

PAPER–III: Preventive and community dentistry as applied to Paediatric

Dentistry: 75marks

PAPER – IV: Essay: 75 marks

*The topics assigned to the different papers are generally evaluated under those

sections. However a strict division of the subject may not be possible and some

overlapping of topics is inevitable. Students should be prepared to answer overlapping

topics.

10.2 PRACTICAL EXAMINATION: 200 Marks.

The Clinical / Practical and Viva-Voice Examination are conducted for minimum of 2

days.

First Day:

10.2.1 Case Discussion, Pulp Therapy i.e. Pulpectomy on Primary Molars.

Case Discussion : 20 marks

Rubber Dam application : 10 marks

Working length X-ray : 20 marks

Obturation : 20 marks

Total : 70 marks

10.2.2 Case Discussion, Crown preparation on a primary molar for Stainless Steel

crown and cementation of the same.

Case Discussion : 10 marks

219

Crown Preparation : 20 marks

Crown selection & cementation : 20 marks

Total : 50 marks

10.2.3 Case Discussion, Band adaptation for fixed type of Space maintainer and

impression making.

Case Discussion : 20 marks

Band Adaptation : 20 marks

Impression : 20 marks

Total : 60 marks

Second Day:

10.2.4 Evaluation of fixed space maintainer and cementation : 20 marks

10.3 Viva – Voce & Pedagogy Exercise: 100 marks

10.3.1 Viva voice examination: 80 marks

As per the university rules

10.3.2 Pedagogy Exercise: 20 marks

A topic is given to each candidate in the beginning of clinical examination. He

/ she are asked to make presentation on topic for 8-10 minutes incorporating

the best available relevant evidences in the topic.

11. RECOMMENDED BOOKS:

220

Author`s name Title of the book

McDonald Dentistry for the child and adolescent

Shobha tandon Text Book of Pedodontics

Finn Clinical Pedodontics

Peter Heasman Master dentistry vol-II

Nikiforuk. Understanding of dental caries

Declan Millett

Clinical problem solving in orthodontics and pediatric dentistry

Angus.C. Cameron Hand Book of Pediatric Dentistry

Pinkham Pediatric Dentistry

Arthi rao Principles and practice of pedodontics

M.E.J. Curzon Kennedy`s pediatric operative dentistry

S.G.Damle Text Book of Pediatric Dentistry

Marie Therese Hosey

Paediatric dentistry orthodontics

Barbara L. Chadwick

Child taming: how to manage children in dental practice

Richard J. Mathewson

Fundamentals of pediatric dentistry

Mitsuhiro Tsukiboshi Treatment planning for traumatiized teeth

Wright Behaviour management

Stephen H. Wei. Clinical use of fluorides

Kenneth. D. Handbook of clinical pedodontics

M.S. Rani Removable orthodonic appliances

Soben Peter Essentials of preventive and community dentistry

Grossman Endodontic practice

K.D. Tripathi Essentials of medical pharmacology

Amtonio Nanci Ten Kate`s oral histology

Ash & Nelson Wheeler`s dental anatomy physiology and occlusion

Samuel Selzer The dental pulp

Greenberg Burket`s oral medicine

221

Gurkeerat singh Textbook of orthodontics

Melamed Handbook of local anesthesia

Franklin S. Weine

Endodontic therapy

B.D. Chaurasia

Human anatomy vol 3

Anusavice

Phillips` science of dental materials

K. Sembulingam

Essentials of medical physiology

Inderbir Singh

Human embryology

White & Pharoah

Oral radiology principles and interpretation

Newman

Carranza`s cinical periodontology

Harsh Mohan

Essential pathology for dental students

R. Ananthanarayan, Paniker Text book of microbiology

Boon Davidson`s principles & practice of medicine

Vimal Sikri Community Dentistry

Kaban

Pediatric oral and maxillofacial surgery

Castaldi, Brass

Dentistry for the adolescent

Smith`s / Graham Recognizable patterns of human deformation.

Andreasen

Traumatic injuries to the teeth.

Nelson Text book of pediatrics volume-1& volume-2

222

BRANCH - IX

ORAL MEDICINE AND RADIOLOGY

Oral Medicine:

Oral Medicine is the specialty of dentistry that is concerned with the oral health care of

medically compromised patients and with the diagnosis and nonsurgical management

of medically related disorders or conditions affecting the oral and maxillofacial region.

Oral medicine specialists are concerned with the nonsurgical medical aspects of

dentistry. These specialists are involved in the primary diagnosis and treatment of oral

diseases that do not respond to conventional dental or maxillofacial surgical

procedures. The practice of oral medicine will provide optimal health to all people

through the diagnosis and management of oral diseases.

Oral Diagnosis:

Oral Diagnosis is art of using scientific knowledge of identifying oral disease process

and distinguishing one disease from other.

Oral Radiology:

Radiology is a science dealing with x-rays and their uses in diagnosis and treatment

of diseases in relation to oro-facial diseases.

1.AIM

1.1 To train dental graduates to ensure higher competence in both general

and special areas of Oral Medicine and Radiology

1.2 To prepare a candidate for teaching, research and clinical abilities

including prevention of various oral and maxillofacial lesions.

1.3 To train the students to apply evidence based knowledge for the diagnosis and treatment of oral diseases.

2 GENERAL OBJECTIVES OF THE COURSE

At the end of 3 years of training the candidate should be able to acquire -

223

2.1 Training programme in Oral Medicine, Diagnosis and Radiology is

structured to achieve knowledge and skill in theoretical and clinical

laboratory, attitude, communicative skills and ability to research with

understanding of social, cultural, educational and environmental

background of the society.

2.2 Have acquired adequate knowledge and understanding of applied basic

and systemic medical science, knowledge in general and particularly of

head and neck.

2.3 The postgraduates will be able to provide medicinal therapy for patients

with competence and working knowledge with understanding of applied

medical, behavioral and clinical science that are beyond the treatment

skills of the general BDS graduate and MDS graduate of other specialities,

to demonstrate evaluative and judgment skills in making appropriate

decisions regarding prevention, treatment, after care and referral to deliver

comprehensive care to patients.

2.4 Implementation of Evidence based dentistry for oro-facial diseases.

Course 9: Oral Medicine and Radiology (Theory & Practical)

Outcomes: The student should be able to

Have knowledge of all oral mucosal lesions skeletal involvement of maxillofacial region,

diagnostic procedures pertaining to them and latest information of imaging

modules.Recognize oral diseases with radiographic imaging and their

management.Handling scientific problems pertaining to oral treatment.Encourage

younger doctors to attain learning objectives.

3. KNOWLEDGE

3.1 The candidate should possess knowledge of applied basic and systemic

medical sciences on human anatomy, embryology, histology, applied in

general and particularly to head and neck, Physiology & Biochemistry,

Pathology and Microbiology, Virology, Health and Diseases Nutrition,

Behavioural science, age changes, genetics, Immunology, Congenital

defects and syndrome and Anthropology, Bioengineering, Bio-medical and

Biological Principle and applications to Dental material science.

3.2 Ability to diagnose and planned treatment

224

3.3 Ability to read and interpret a Radiograph and other investigations for the

purpose of diagnosis and treatment plan.

3.4 Should have essential knowledge on ethics, laws and Jurisprudence and

forensic odontology.

3.5 Identify cases, which are outside the area of his speciality / competence and

refer those appropriate specialists.

3.6 To have acquired adequate knowledge and understanding of applied basic

and systematic medical science knowledge in general and particular to head

and neck.

3.7 Should attend continuing education programs, seminars and conferences

related to Speciality, thus updating himself.

3.8 Teach and guide his/her team, colleague and other students.

3.9 Theoretical knowledge of evidence based dentistry.

3.10 Should be able to use information technology tools and carry out research

both basic clinical, with the aims of publishing his/her work and presenting

his/her work at various scientific forums.

3.11 Should have essential knowledge of personal hygiene, infection control,

prevention of cross infection and safe disposal waste, keeping in view the

risks of transmission of Hepatitis and HIV.

3.12 Should have a sound knowledge for application of pharmacology. Effects of

drugs on oral tissue and systems of body and for medically compromised

patients.

225

3.13 Theoretical, Clinical and practical knowledge of all oro-facial lesions,

diagnostic procedures pertaining to them and latest information of imaging

modules and recent advances in treatment modalities

4 SKILLS:

4.1 The candidate should be able to examine the patients, investigate the

patient systemically, analyze the investigation results, radiology, diagnose

the ailment, plan a treatment, communicate it with the patient and execute it.

4.2 Understand the prevalence and prevention of diseases of Cranio-mandibular

system.

4.3 The candidate should be able to restore lost functions of stomatognathic

system namely mastication, speech, appearance and psychological comforts.

By understanding biological, biomedical, bioengineering principles and

systemic condition of the patient to provide a quality health care of the

craniofacial region.

4.4 The candidate should be able to interact with other speciality including

medical speciality congenital defects, Temporo-mandibular joint syndromes,

esthetics, implant supported prosthetics and problems of psychogenic origin.

4.5 Should be able to demonstrate the clinical competence necessary to carry

out appropriate treatment at higher level of knowledge, training and practice

skills currently available in the specialty.

4.6 Identify target diseases and awareness amongst the population.

4.7 Three important skills need to be imparted -

4.7.1 Diagnostic skill in recognition of oral lesions and their management.

4.7.2 Research skills in handling scientific problems pertaining to oral treatment.

4.7.3 Clinical and Didactic skills in encouraging younger doctors to attain learning objectives.

226

4.8 Evidence based diagnostic skills in using the latest gold-standard investigative

procedures.

4.9 Evidence Searching Skills using various databases for treatment protocol of

various oral diseases.

4.10 Implementation of best clinical evidence in the management of individual

patients.

5 ATTITUDES :

5.1 Adopt ethical principles in Oral Medicine Practice. Professional honesty and

integrity are to be fostered. Treatment to be delivered irrespective of social

status, caste, creed or region of patient.

5.2 Willing to share knowledge and clinical experience with professional

colleagues.

5.3 Willing to adopt new methods and techniques from time to time based on

scientific research, which is in patient’s best interest.

5.4 Respect patient’s rights and privileges including patient’s right to information

and right to seek second opinion.

5.5 The positive mental attitude and the persistence of continued learning need

to be inculcated.

5.6 Inculcating positive approach towards newer learning methodologies and

treatment modalities based on clinical evidence

6 COMMUNICATIVE ABILITIES :

6.1 Develop communication skills, in particular, to explain treatment option

available in management.

227

6.2 Provide leadership and get the best out of his group in a congenial working atmosphere.

6.3 Should be able to communicate in simple understandable language with the patient to explain the principles of Oral Medicine to the patient. He should be able to guide and counsel the patient with regard to various treatment modalities available.

6.4 Develop the ability to communicate with professional colleagues through various media like Internet, e-mail, video conference and etc. to render the best possible treatment.

7. COURSE :

The candidates shall under go training for Three academic years with satisfactory

attendance above 80 % for each year.

7.1 The course includes epidemiology and demographic studies, research and

teaching skills.

7.2 Ability to prevent, diagnose and treat with after care for all patients for

control of diseases and / or treatment related syndromes with patient

satisfaction for restoring functions of stomatognathic system.

7.3 The program outline addresses the knowledge, procedural and operative

skills needed in Masters Degree in Oral Medicine, Diagnosis and

Radiology. A minimum of Three years of formal training through a graded

system of education as specified will enable the trainee to achieve

Masters Degree, competently and have the necessary skills / knowledge

to update themselves with advancements in the field. The course content

has been identified and categorized as Essential knowledge as given

below-

8 SYLLABUS DISTRIBUTION:

Paper I - Applied Basic Sciences

(Applied Anatomy, Physiology, Biochemistry, Pathology, and

Pharmacology.)

Paper II - Differential Diagnosis, Diagnostic Methods & Oral and Maxillofacial

Radiology.

228

Paper III - Oral Medicine, Therapeutics and Laboratory Investigations.

Paper IV - Essay

8.1 APPLIED BASIC SCIENCES :

A thorough knowledge on the applied aspects of Anatomy, Embryology, Histology

particularly to head and neck, Physiology, Biochemistry, Pathology, Microbiology,

Virology. Pharmacology, health and systemic diseases and principles in surgery

medicine and anesthesia, Nutrition, Behavioral sciences, age changes, genetics, Bio-

engineering and bio-medical and research methodology as related to speciality. It is

desirable to have adequate knowledge in bio-statics, research methodology and use

of computers.

Includes Applied Anatomy, Physiology, Biochemistry, Pathology, and Pharmacology.

8.1.1 APPLIED ANATOMY

8.1.1.1. Gross Anatomy of the Face:

8.1.1.1.1. Muscles of Facial Expression and Muscles of Mastication.

8.1.1. 1.2. Temporo- Mandibular Joint.

8.1.1. 1.3. Facial nerve.

8.1.1. 1.4. Facial artery.

8.1.1. 1.5. Facial vein.

8.1.1. 1.6. Major and Minor salivary glands.

8.1.1.2. Neck Region:

8.1.1.2.1.Triangles of the neck with special reference to Carotid,

Digastric triangles and midline structures.

8.1.1.2.2. Facial spaces.

8.1.1.2.3. Carotid system of arteries, Vertebral Artery, & Subclavian

arteries.

229

8.1.1.2.4. Jugular system - Internal jugular, External jugular.

8.1.1.2.5. Lymphatic drainage.

8.1.1.2.6. Cervical plane.

8.1.1.2.7. Muscles derived from Pharyngeal arches.

8.1.1.2.8. Endocrine glands.

8.1.1.2.9. Sympathetic chain.

8.1.1.2.10. Cranial nerves- V, VII, IX, XI, & XII.

8.1.1.3 Oral Cavity :

8.1.1.3.1. Vestibule and oral cavity proper.

8.1.1.3.2. Tongue and teeth .

8.1.1.3.3. Palate -soft and hard.

8.1.1.4. Nasal Cavity :

8.1.1.4.1. Nasal septum.

8.1.1.4.2. Lateral wall of nasal cavity.

8.1.1.5. Pharynx

8.1.1.6. Paranasal air sinuses

8.1.1.7 Gross salient features of brain and spinal cord with references to attachment

of cranial nerves to the brain stem.

8.1.1.8 Detailed study of the cranial nerve nuclei of V, VII, IX, X, XI, XII.

8.1.1.9. Osteology : Comparative study of fetal and adult skull, Development,

ossification, age changes and evaluation of Maxillo-facial bones and

mandible.

230

8.1.1.10. Embryology:

8.1.1.10.1. Development of face, palate, nasal septum and cavity, paranasal air

sinuses.

8.1.1.10.2. Pharyngeal apparatus in detail including the floor of the primitive

pharynx.

8.1.1.10.3. Development of tooth in detail and the age changes.

8.1.1.10.4. Development of salivary glands.

8.1.1.10.5. Congenital anomalies of face must be dealt in detail.

8.1.1.10.6. Development of the tongue.

8.1.1.11. Histology:

8.1.1.11.1. Study of epithelium of oral cavity and the respiratory tract.

8.1.1.11.2. Connective tissue.

8.1.1.11.3. Muscular tissue.

8.1.1.11.4. Nervous tissue.

8.1.1.11.5. Blood vessels.

8.1.1.11.6. Cartilage.

8.1.1.11.7. Bone and tooth.

8.1.1.11.8. Tongue.

8.1.1.11.9. Salivary glands.

8.1.1.11.10. Tonsil, thymus, lymph nodes.

8.1.2 PHYSIOLOGY : 8.1.2.1. General Physiology :

8.1.2.1.1. Cell.

8.1.2.1.2. Body Fluid Compartments.

8.1.2.1.3. Classification.

231

8.1.2.1.4. Composition.

8.1.2.1.5. Cellular transport.

8.1.2.1.6. RMP and action potential.

8.1.2.2. Muscle Nerve Physiology :

8.1.2.2.1. Structure of a neuron and properties of nerve fibers.

8.1.2.2.2. Structure of muscle fibers and properties of muscle fibers.

8.1.2.2.3. Neuromuscular transmission.

8.1.2.2.4. Mechanism of muscle contraction.

8.1.2.3. Blood :

8.1.2.3.1. RBC and Hemoglobin.

8.1.2.3.2. WBC -Structure and functions.

8.1.2.3.3. Platelets -functions and applied aspects.

8.1.2.3.4. Plasma Proteins.

8.1.2.3.5. Blood Coagulation with applied aspects.

8.1.2.3.6. Blood groups.

8.1.2.3.7. Lymph and applied aspects.

8.1.2.4. Respiratory System:

8.1.2.4.1.Air passages, composition of air, dead space, mechanics of

respiration with pressure and volume changes .

8.1.2.4.2. Lung volumes and capacities and applied aspects.

8.1.2.4.3. Oxygen and carbon dioxide transport.

8.1.2.4.4. Neural regulation of respiration.

8.1.2.4.5. Chemical regulation of respiration.

8.1.2.4.6. Hypoxia, effects of increased and decreased barometric pressure.

8.1.2.5. Cardio-Vascular System:

232

8.1.2.5.1. Cardiac Cycle.

8.1.2.5.2. Regulation of heart rate/ Stroke volume / cardiac output / blood

flow.

8.1.2.5.3. Regulation of blood pressure.

8.1.2.5.4. Anaphylaxis, hypertension, cardiac failure.

8.1.2.6. Excretory system:

8.1.2.6.1. Renal function tests.

8.1.2.7. Gastro- intestinal tract:

8.1.2.7.1. Composition, functions and regulation of -

8.1.2.7.2. Saliva.

8.1.2.7.3. Gastric juice.

8.1.2.7.4. Pancreatic juice.

8.1.2.7.5. Bile and intestinal juice.

8.1.2.7.6. Mastication and deglutition.

8.1.2.8. Endocrine system:

8.1.2.8.1. Hormones -classification and mechanism of action.

8.1.2.8.2. Hypothalamic and pituitary hormones.

8.1.2.8.3. Thyroid hormones.

8.1.2.8.4. Parathyroid hormones and calcium homeostasis.

8.1.2.8.5. Pancreatic hormones.

8.1.2.8.6. Adrenal hormones.

8.1.2.9. Central Nervous System:

8.1.2.9.1. Ascending tract with special references to pain pathway

8.1.2.9.2. Special Senses: Gustation and Olfaction.

233

8.1.3 BIOCHEMISTRY:

8.1.3.1. Carbohydrates

8.1.3.1.1. Disaccharides specifically maltose, lactose, sucrose.

8.1.3.1.2. Digestion of starch/absorption of glucose.

8.1.3.1.3. Metabolism of glucose, specifically glycolysis, TCA cycle,

gluconeogenesis

8.1.3.1.4. Blood sugar regulation.

8.1.3.1.5. Glycogen storage regulation.

8.1.3.1.6. Glycogen storage diseases.

8.1.3.1.7. Galactosemia and fructosemia.

8.1.3.2. Lipids

8.1.3.2.1. Fatty acids – Essential / Non essential.

8.1.3.2.2. Metabolism of Fatty acids- oxidation, ketone body formation,

utilization and ketosis.

8.1.3.2.3. Outline of cholesterol metabolism- synthesis and products formed

from Cholesterol.

8.1.3.3. Protein

8.1.3.3.1. Amino acids- essential/non essential, complete/ incomplete

proteins.

8.1.3.3.2. Transamination/ Deamination (Definition with examples).

8.1.3.3.3. Urea cycle.

8.1.3.3.4. Tyrosine – Hormones synthesized from tyrosine.

8.1.3.3.5. In born errors of amino acid metabolism.

8.1.3.3.6. Methionine and transmethylation.

8.1.3.4. Nucleic Acids

8.1.3.4.1. Purines / Pyrimidines

234

8.1.3.4.2. Purine analogs in medicine.

8.1.3.4.3. DNA / RNA – Outline of structure.

8.1.3.4.4. Transcription / translation.

8.1.3.4.5. Steps of protein synthesis.

8.1.3.4.6. Inhibitors of protein synthesis.

8.1.3.4.7. Regulation of gene functional.

8.1.3.5. Minerals

8.1.3.5.1. Calcium & Phosphorus metabolism

8.1.3.5.2. Iron metabolism.

8.1.3.5.3. Iodine metabolism.

8.1.3.5.4. Trace elements in nutrition.

8.1.3.6. Energy Metabolism

8.1.3.6.1. Basal metabolic rate.

8.1.3.6.2. Specific dynamic action (SDA) of foods.

8.1.3.7. Vitamins

8.1.3.7.1. Vitamins and their metabolic role-specifically - vitamin A, Vitamin C,

Vitamin D, Thiamin, Riboflavin, Niacin, Pyridoxine.

8.1.4. PATHOLOGY:

8.1.4.1. Inflammation:

8.1.4.1.1. Repair and regeneration, necrosis and gangrene.

8.1.4.1.2. Role of complement system in acute inflammation.

8.1.4.1.3. Chronic inflammation.

8.1.4.1.4. Role of arachidonic acid and its metabolites in acute inflammation.

235

8.1.4.1.5. Growth factors in acute inflammation.

8.1.4.1.6. Role of molecular events in cell growth and intercellular signaling cell

surface receptors.

8.1.4.1.7. Role of NSAIDS in inflammation.

8.1.4.1.8. Cellular changes in radiation injury and its manifestations.

8.1.4.2. Homeostasis :

8.1.4.2.1. Role of Endothelium in thrombo -genesis.

8.1.4.2.2. Arterial and venous thrombi.

8.1.4.2.3. Disseminated Intravascular Coagulation.

8.1.4.3. Shock :

8.1.4.3.1. Pathogenesis of Hemorrhagic, Neurogenic, Septic and Cardiogenic

shock.

8.1.4.3.2. Pathogenesis of Circulatory disturbances.

8.1.4.3.3. Pathogenesis of Ischemic Hyperemia.

8.1.4.3.4. Pathogenesis of Venous congestion, Edema, Infarction.

8.1.4.4. Chromosomal Abnormalities :

8.1.4.4.1. Mar fan's syndrome.

8.1.4.4.2. Ehler's Danlos Syndrome.

8.1.4.4.3. Fragile X Syndrome.

8.1.4.5. Hypersensitivity :

8.1.4.5.1. Anaphylaxis.

8.1.4.5.2. Type II Hypersensitivity.

8.1.4.5.3. Type III Hypersensitivity.

8.1.4.5.4. Cell medicated Reaction and its clinical importance.

8.1.4.5.5. Systemic Lupus Erythematosus.

8.1.4.5.6. Infection and Infective Granulomas.

236

8.1.4.6. Neoplasia :

8.1.4.6.1. Classification of Tumors.

8.1.4.6.2. Carcinogenesis & Carcinogens -Chemical, Viral and Microbial.

8.1.4.6.3. Grading and Staging of Cancer, Paraneoplastic Syndrome.

8.1.4.6.4. Spread of tumors.

8.1.4.6.5. Characteristics of Benign and Malignant tumors.

8.1.4.7. Others :

8.1.4.7.1. Sex linked agammaglobulinemia.

8.1.4.7.2. AIDS.

8.1.4.7.3. Management of Immune deficiency patients requiring surgical

procedures.

8.1.4.7.4. De George's Syndrome.

8.1.4.7.5. Ghons complex.

8.1.4.7.6. Post primary pulmonary tuberculosis - pathology and pathogenesis.

8.1.5 PHARMACOLOGY :

8.1.5.1. Definition of terminologies used.

8.1.5.2. Dosage and mode of administration of drugs.

8.1.5.3. Action and fate of drugs in the body.

8.1.5.4. Drugs acting on the CNS.

8.1.5.5. Drug addiction, tolerance and hypersensitive reactions.

8.1.5.6. General and local anesthetics, hypnotics, analeptics, and & tranquilizers.

8.1.5.7. Chemotherapeutics and antibiotics.

8.1.5.8. Analgesics and Anti –pyretics.

8.1.5.9. Antiseptics, Sialogogues, and Anti –Sialogogues.

8.1.5.10. Haematinics.

8.1.5.11. Antacids.

237

8.1.5.12. Antiviral drugs.

8.1.5.13. Anti –diabetics.

8.1.5.14. Vitamins -A B Complex, C, D, E, K.

8.1.5.15. Steroids.

8.2 DIFFERENTIAL DIAGNOSIS, DIAGNOSTIC METHODS & ORAL AND

MAXILLOFACIAL RADIOLOGY

8.2.1. DIFFERENTIAL DIAGNOSIS AND DIAGNOSTIC METHODS:

8.2.1.1 Introduction

8.2.1.2. General Principles of Differential Diagnosis.

8.2.1.3. History and Examination of the patient.

8.2.1.4. Correlation of Gross Structure and Microstructure with Clinical

features.

8.2.1.5. The diagnostic sequence.

8.2.1.6. Soft Tissue Lesions:

8.2.1.6.1. Solitary red lesions.

8.2.1.6.2. Generalized Red Conditions and Multiple Ulcerations.

8.2.1.6.3. Red Conditions of the Tongue.

8.2.1.6.4. White lesions of the Oral Mucosa.

8.2.1.6.5. Red and White lesions.

8.2.1.6.6. Peripheral Oral Exophytic lesions.

8.2.1.6.7. Solitary Oral Ulcers and Fissures.

8.2.1.6.8. Intraoral Brownish, Bluish, or Black Conditions.

8.2.1.6.9. Pits, Fistulae and Draining Lesions.

8.2.1.6.10. Yellow conditions of the oral mucosa.

8.2.1.7 Bony Lesions -

8.2.1.7.1. Radiolucencies of the Jaws -

8.2.1.7.1.1. Anatomic Radiolucencies.

8.2.1.7.1.2 Periapical Radiolucencies.

238

8.2.1.7.1.3. Pericoronal Radiolucencies.

8.2.1.7.1.4. Interradicular Radiolucencies.

8.2.1.7.1.5. Solitary Cyst like Radiolucencies not necessarily contacting

teeth.

8.2.1.7.1.6. Multilocular Radiolucencies.

8.2.1.7.1.7. Solitary Radiolucencies with Ragged and Poorly Defined

Borders.

8.2.1.7.1.8. Multiple Separate, Well defined Radiolucencies

8.2.1.7.1.9. Generalized rarefactions of the jaw bones.

8.2.1.7.2 Mixed Radiolucent – Radiopaque Lesions of the Jaws -

8.2.1.7.2.1. Mixed Radiolucent – Radiopaque lesions associated with

teeth.

8.2.1.7.2.2. Mixed Radiolucent – Radiopaque lesions not necessarily

contacting teeth.

8.2.1.7.3 Radiopacities Of The Jaw Bones -

8.2.1.7.3.1. Anatomic Radiopacities of the jaws

8.2.1.7.3.2. Periapical Radiopacities

8.2.1.7.3.3. Solitary Radiopacities not necessarily contacting teeth

8.2.1.7.3.4. Multiple separate Radiopacities

8.2.1.7.3.5. Generalized Radiopacities

8.2.1.7.4. Lesions By Region-

8.2.1.7.4.1. Masses in the Neck

8.2.1.7.4.2. Lesions of the Facial Skin

8.2.1.7.4.3. Lesions of the Lips

8.2.1.7.4.4. Intraoral Lesions by Anatomic Region e.g. Palate, Floor of

mouth etc.

8.2.1.7.5. Diagnostic Methods and Normal values for Laboratory tests

8.2.1.7.5.1. Methods of clinical diagnosis of oral and systemic diseases as

applicable to oral tissue including modern diagnostic techniques

8.2.1.7.5.2. Laboratory investigations including special investigations of

oral and oro –facial diseases

239

8.2.2 ORAL AND MAXILLOFACIAL RADIOLOGY:

8.2.2.1. Basics of Radiology –

8.2.2.1.1. History of Radiology

8.2.2.1.2. Structure of x-ray tube

8.2.2.1.3. Production and properties of x-rays.

8.2.2.1.4. Units of radiation

8.2.2.2. The Physics Of Ionizing Radiation -

8.2.2.2.1. Radiation Physics

8.2.2.3. Biologic Effects Of Radiation – [EBES Incorporated]

8.2.2.3.1. Radiation Biology

8.2.2.4. Radiation Safety And Protection -

8.2.2.4.1. Health Physics

8.2.2.5. Imaging Principles And Techniques - [EBES Incorporated]

8.2.2.5.1. X-Ray Film, Intensifying Screens, Filtration of collimation and Grids

8.2.2.5.2. Projection Geometry

8.2.2.5.3. Processing of Image In radiology

8.2.2.5.4. Design of x -ray dept., dark room & use of automatic processing units

8.2.2.5.5. Localization by radiographic techniques.

8.2.2.5.6. Faults of dental radiographs and concept of ideal radiograph

8.2.2.5.7. Radiographic Quality Assurance and Infection Control

8.2.2.5.8. Intraoral Radiographic Techniques

8.2.2.5.9. Normal Radiographic Anatomy

8.2.2.5.10. Panoramic Imaging

8.2.2.5.11. Extra oral Imaging techniques

8.2.2.5.12. Digital Imaging

240

8.2.2.5.13. Advanced imaging technique like CT, MRI, Ultrasound &

Thermography

8.2.2.5.14. Radionuclide techniques.

8.2.2.5.15. Contrast radiography in Salivary gland, TMJ & other Radiolucent

pathologies.

8.2.2.5.16. Guidelines for Prescribing Dental Radiographs

8.2.2.5.17. Art of radiographic report, writing and descriptors preferred in reports.

8.2.2.6. Radiographic Interpretation Of Pathology

8.2.2.6.1. Principles of Radiographic Interpretation

8.2.2.6.2. Dental Caries

8.2.2.6.3. Periodontal Diseases

8.2.2.6.4. Dental Anomalies

8.2.2.6.5. Inflammatory Lesions of the Jaws

8.2.2.6.6. Cysts of the Jaws

8.2.2.6.7. Benign Tumors of the Jaws

8.2.2.6.8. Malignant Lesions of the Jaws

8.2.2.6.9.Diseases of Bone Manifested in the Jaws.

8.2.2.6.10. Systemic Diseases Manifested in the Jaws.

8.2.2.6.11. Diagnostic Imaging of the Temporo-mandibular Joint.

[EBES Incorporated]

8.2.2.6.12. Paranasal Sinuses.

8.2.2.6.13. Soft Tissue Calcification and Ossification.

8.2.2.6.14. Trauma to Teeth and Facial Structures.

8.2.2.6.15. Developmental Disturbances of the Face and Jaws.

8.2.2.6.16. Salivary Gland Radiology. [EBES Incorporated]

8.2.2.6.17. Orofacial Implants. [EBES Incorporated]

8.2.2.7. Radiography In Forensic Odontology [EBES Incorporated]

8.2.2.7.1. Radiographic Age Estimation

8.2.2.7.2. Post-Mortem Radiographic Methods. 8.2.2.8. Principles And Complications Of Radiotherapy Of Oro-Facial Malignancies

241

8.2.2.9. Knowledge Of Radio-Active Isotopes

8.3 ORAL MEDICINE,THERAPEUTICS & LABORATORY INVESTIGATIONS

8.3.1. Introduction and History of Oral Medicine.

8.3.2. Principles of Diagnosis -

8.3.2.1. The Practice of Oral Medicine

8.3.2.2. Evaluation of the Dental Patient: Diagnosis and Medical Risk Assessment

8.3.2.3. Maxillofacial Imaging

8.3.3. Diagnosis And Management Of Oral Diseases - [EBES Incorporated]

8.3.3.1. Ulcerative, Vesicular, and Bullous Lesions.

8.3.3.2. Red and White Lesions of the Oral Mucosa.

8.3.3.3. Pigmented Lesions of the Oral Mucosa.

8.3.3.4. Benign Tumors of the Oral Cavity.

8.3.3.5. Oral Precancer

8.3.3.6. Oral Cancer.

8.3.4. Oral Manifestations of Systemic Diseases -

8.3.5. Principles Of Medicine -

8.3.5.1. Diseases of the Respiratory Tract

8.3.5.2. Diseases of the Cardiovascular System.

8.3.5.3. Diseases of the Gastrointestinal Tract

8.3.5.4. Renal Disease

8.3.5.5. Hematologic Diseases

8.3.5.6. Bleeding and Clotting Disorders.

8.3.5.7. Immunologic Diseases

8.3.5.8. Transplantation Medicine

8.3.5.9. Infectious Diseases

242

8.3.5.10. Diabetes Mellitus.

8.3.5.11. Endocrine Disease.

8.3.5.12. Neuromuscular Diseases.

8.3.5.13. Geriatrics.

8.3.6. Hematological, Dermatological, Metabolic, Nutritional, & Endocrinal conditions

with oral manifestations.

8.3.7. Oro-facial Pain. [EBES Incorporated]

8.3.8. Congenital and Hereditary disorders involving tissues of oro-facial region.

8.3.9. Systemic diseases due to oral foci of infection.

8.3.10. Neuromuscular diseases affecting oro-facial region. [EBES Incorporated]

8.3.11. Salivary Gland disorders. [EBES Incorporated]

8.3.12. Tongue in Oral and Systemic diseases.

8.3.13. TMJ dysfunction and diseases [EBES Incorporated]

8.3.14. Sexually Transmitted Diseases [EBES Incorporated]

8.3.15. Allergy and other miscellaneous conditions

8.3.16. Psychosomatic aspects of oral diseases

8.3.17. Management of medically compromised patients including medical

emergencies in the dental practice. [EBES Incorporated]

8.3.18. Maxillary Sinus Disorders.

8.3.19. Forensic Odontology - [EBES Incorporated]

8.3.19.1. Medico legal aspects of Orofacial injuries

8.3.19.2 Identification of Bite marks.

8.3.19.3. Determination of Age and Sex

8.3.19.4. Identification of cadavers by Dental Appliances, Restorations and Tissue

Remnants

8.3.19.5. Role of Dentist in Forensic Science

8.3.20. Therapeutics in oral medicine – clinical pharmacology [EBES Incorporated]

8.3.21. Computers in oral diagnosis and imaging

8.3.22. Evidence based oral care in treatment planning

243

8.3.23. Harmful oral Habits and its Intervention skill and knowledge

8.3.24. Ethics in Dentistry

244

BOOKS RECOMMENDED :

I. ORAL DIAGNOSIS, ORAL MEDICINE & ORAL PATHOLOGY

1. Burkit – Oral Medicine – J.B. Lippincott Company

2. Coleman – Principles of Oral Diagnosis – Mosby Year Book

3. Jones – Oral Manifestations of Systemic Diseases – W.B. Saunders company

4. Mitchell – Oral Diagnosis & Oral Medicine

5. Kerr – Oral Diagnosis

6. Miller – Oral Diagnosis & Treatment

7. Hutchinson – Clinical Methods

8. Oral Pathology – Shafers

9. Sonis.S.T., Fazio.R.C. and Fang.L - Principles and practice of Oral Medicine

10. Goaz & Wood – Differential Diagnosis of Oral & Maxillofacial Lesions.

11. S.N.Bhaskar -- Synopsis of Oral Pathology

12. H.M.Worth – Principles and Practice of Radiographic Interpretation

13. William Young- Atlas of Oral Pathology

14. Fali Mehta-Tobacco related Oral Mucosal Lesions and Conditions

15. S.N.Bhaskar -- Radiographic Interpretation for the Dentist

II. ORAL AND MAXILLOFACIAL RADIOLOGY

1. White & Goaz – Oral Radiology – Mosby year Book

2. Wuehrmann – Dental Radiology – C.V. Mosby Company

3. Stafne – Oral Roentgenographic Diagnosis – W.B.Saunders Co.,

4. Rita Mason – A guide to Dental Radiography

5. McCall & Wald—Clinical Dental Roentgenology, Technique & Interpretation

III. FORENSIC ODONTOLOGY

1. Derek H.Clark –Practical Forensic Odontology - Butterworth-Heinemann (1992)

2. C Michael Bowers,Bell –Manual of Forensic Odontology-Forensic Pr(1995)

245

246

PRACTICALS / CLINICALS:

1. The Student is Trained to arrive at Proper Diagnosis by following a Scientific and

Systematic procedure of History taking and Examination of the Oro-facial region.

Training is also imparted in management wherever possible. Training also shall be

imparted on Advanced and Specialized diagnostic procedures.

2. Training shall be imparted in various Radiographic procedures, Interpretation of

Radiographs and Specialized imaging techniques.

3. The Postgraduate student should Observe, Assist and Perform Procedural and

Operative Skills under Supervision of MDS Teacher / Staff.

4. In view of the above, Each student shall maintain a Record of work done, which

shall be Evaluated at the time of University Practical examination

5. Clinical case presentation: The clinical case presentation and discussion promotes

evidence based diagnosis and treatment planning. The student is encouraged to

substantiate the treatment for the patient based on the best available evidence for

the diagnosis.

6. Seminar presentation: A systematic evidence based appraisal on various

components of Seminar topic is presented.

7. Journal article Presentation: An evidence based journal club article is chosen either

based on clinical/ community relevant question for which the Postgraduate student

seeks answer or allotted as an appraisal exercise. Based on the study design of

the question, different appraisal check lists are used for evidence based critical

appraisal tool kits for RCT, analytical research and diagnostic research etc. The

247

appraisal of the article concludes with critical reflections i.e. internal and external

validity of the research in the question.

8. Pedagogues: The post graduate student is directed to teach and substantiate

through evidence to the undergraduate students with knowledge supported by

evidence of best available quality is encouraged.

9. In Treatment planning for patient: The Postgraduate student applies the best

available Evidence (Diagnostic and Therapeutic) in treatment planning for every

patient reporting to the department having oral and maxillo-facial diseases.

10. Other then the routine daily OPD and Radiographs taking procedure, The

following is the Minimum Prescribed work to be completed and Recorded in the

Log / Record Book before appearing in the subject at the University Examination.

The Academic and Clinical work record as well as the Radiographs should be

preserved in good condition and shall be produced at the time of Final MDS

Practical Examination.

Minimum Requirement of Academic & Clinical Work to be carried out by the

Postgraduate (MDS) Student of Oral Medicine and Radiology in Each Year:

Sr.

No.

Particulars FIRST

YEAR

SECOND

YEAR

THIRD

YEAR

1 Seminar 05 05 05

2 Case Presentation 06 06 06

3 Journal Article Presentation 10 10 10

4 Research Project / Study 01 01 00

248

5 Library Dissertation 01 - -

6 IOPA of Important cases 50 50 50

7 Other Intra oral Radiographs of

Important cases

25 25 25

8 RVG of Important cases 25 25 25

9 Extra oral Radiographs of Important

cases

10 10 10

10 Digital / Advance Imaging of Important

cases

10 10 10

11 Long case History (major) 10 10 10

12 Short case History (minor) 15 15 15

13 Biopsy-Incisional / Excisional 25 25 25

14 FNAC 15 15 15

15 Administration of intra -muscular and

intravenous injections

05 10 10

16 Administration of oxygen and life

saving drugs to the patients

05 05 05

17 Clinical Demonstrations to Third and

Fourth Year BDS Students

10 10 10

18 Lectures for Third and Fourth Year

BDS Students

04 04 04

19. Dental Cast/Model preparations 05 05 05

20. Main Dissertation - - 01

21. IAOMR Conference 01 01 01

22. National PG Symposium 01 01 01

23. Other Conferences/ Symposium/

Update (Optional)

01 01 01

249

SCHEME OF UNIVERSITY MDS EXAMINATION

A. Theory: 300 marks

1. Written Examination shall consist of Four Papers, Each of Three hour’s duration.

Total marks for each paper will be 75.

2. Paper I, II and III shall consist of Two Long essay questions carrying 20 marks

each and Five short essay questions each carrying 07 marks.

3. Paper IV will be an Essay.

4. Questions on recent advances may be asked in any or all the Four Papers.

Distribution of topics * for each paper will be as follows :

PAPER- I : Applied Basic Sciences

PAPER II : Oral and Maxillofacial Radiology.

PAPER III : Oral Medicine, Therapeutics and Laboratory Investigations.

PAPER IV : Essay

*The Topics assigned to the different papers are generally evaluated under those

sections. However a strict division of the subject may not be possible and some

24. Paper Presentation in conferences 01 01 01

25. Poster / Model Display in

Conferences

01 01 01

26. Article Publication in National /

International Journal

01 01 01

250

overlapping of topics is inevitable. Students should be prepared to answer

overlapping Topics.

B. Practical/ Clinical Examination : 300 Marks

1st Day :

Clinical Case Presentation:

1. Two Spotters = 10 Marks (2 x 05 mks.)

2. Two Short Cases = 40 Marks (2 x 20 mks.)

3. One Long Case = 50 Marks (1 x 50 mks.)

Total = 100 Marks

2nd Day :

1. Radiology Exercise :

Including Technique, processing and Interpretation

1. One Intra Oral Periapical Radiograph = 10 Marks

2. One Occlusal Radiograph = 20 Marks

251

3. Two Extra Oral Radiograph = 50 Marks (2 x 25 mks.)

2. Multimedia Presentation and Discussion of Main Dissertation :

= 20 Marks

Total = 100 Marks

3. Pedagogy Exercise = 20 Marks

One Topic having evidence based co-relation will be given jointly by all the

practical examiners to each candidate on the First day of practical

examination. The candidate will be asked to make a Presentation either

extempore or in the form of Power point based on substantial evidence for 8-

10 minutes on the second day of practical examination. The pedagogy

exercise will be reviewed jointly by all the four examiners.

4. Viva Voce = 80 Marks

As per the university rules